to see the User Manual.

SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Registered trademark.
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System
by
Intelligent Medical Systems, Inc.
of Alpine, Texas
Copyright 2004
USER MANUAL
Copyright 2004
Intelligent Medical Systems, Inc.
HC-65, Box 21-B
Alpine, TX 79830
1-800-747-4154
info@smartdoctor.com
1
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Table of Contents
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System................................................................................................................................. 1
CHAPTER 1
BASIC CONCEPTS OF USING THE SMARTDOCTORÒ SYSTEM.......................... 9
Nomenclature...........................................................................................................................................................................................9
Family and Patient file systems..............................................................................................................................................................9
Concepts of data entry..........................................................................................................................................................................10
MAKING CORRECTIONS:..............................................................................................................................................................10
USING THE SINGLE-VALUED PROMPTS:.................................................................................................................................11
USING THE "LINE" PROMPTS...................................................................................................................................................... 11
NAVIGATING THE "LINE" PROMPTS:........................................................................................................................................11
ENTERING DATES.......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
ENTERING PHONE NUMBERS..................................................................................................................................................... 11
ENTERING SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBERS................................................................................................................................11
A WORD ON SELECTION RANGES............................................................................................................................................. 12
REPORTS AND OUPUT.................................................................................................................................................................. 12
CONTROL CHARACTERS, MAIL, AND GENERAL COMMANDS..........................................................................................12
Interoffice mail................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
Terminal or PC Lock-up Problem...................................................................................................................................................... 13
garbage on screen............................................................................................................................................................................... 13
print any screen.................................................................................................................................................................................. 13
LOGIN AND PASSWORDS................................................................................................................................................................14
Is the Terminal On?............................................................................................................................................................................14
Why Can't I Log In.............................................................................................................................................................................14
Changing Your Password................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Rules for Password Security: Choosing & Using your Password .................................................................................................... 15
F-KEYS.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15
F1-Key................................................................................................................................................................................................15
F2-Key................................................................................................................................................................................................16
F4-Key................................................................................................................................................................................................16
F5-Key................................................................................................................................................................................................16
OTHER QUICK MENU OPTIONS................................................................................................................................................... 16
BRANCHING TO OTHER PROGRAMS........................................................................................................................................ 19
CALCULATOR................................................................................................................................................................................. 19
WHO IS LOGGED ON THE SYSTEM?.......................................................................................................................................... 20
PRINT JOB MANAGER................................................................................................................................................................... 21
PHONE BOOK..................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Setting Up the Phone Book ............................................................................................................................................................... 21
MY NOTES........................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Bulletin Board File................................................................................................................................................................................ 24
THE ZIP CODE FILE..........................................................................................................................................................................26
MAKING ADDITIONS TO THE ZIP CODE FILE......................................................................................................................... 26
MAKING CHANGES IN THE ZIP CODE FILE............................................................................................................................. 26
PRINT/REVIEW ZIP CODE FILE .................................................................................................................................................. 27
CLINIC PROVIDER FILE..................................................................................................................................................................27
2
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
MODIFYING INFORMATION IN THE PROVIDER FILE............................................................................................................27
Entering the medical license information...........................................................................................................................................29
Entering provider numbers.................................................................................................................................................................29
Provider Appointment Types............................................................................................................................................................. 29
PRINT PROVIDER LIST..................................................................................................................................................................30
CLINIC FILE........................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
TO ADD A CLINIC:..........................................................................................................................................................................30
TO VIEW OR CHANGE CLINIC INFORMATION: ......................................................................................................................31
TO VIEW OR CHANGE CLINIC BILLING INFORMATION:......................................................................................................32
BILLING HEADER INFORMATION:.............................................................................................................................................32
EDI INFORMATION SCREEN:.......................................................................................................................................................32
LAB INFORMATION:......................................................................................................................................................................33
DEFAULT CLINIC SCHEDULE:.................................................................................................................................................... 33
FAMILY FILE MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................................................................34
Inquire about Head of Household...................................................................................................................................................... 34
DELETE A FAMILY.........................................................................................................................................................................34
ADDING A NEW FAMILY.............................................................................................................................................................. 35
Employment Information: Head of Household, <F7> Screen............................................................................................................37
Employment Information: Spouse of HOH, <F7> Screen................................................................................................................. 38
FAMILY INSURANCE FILE, <F6> Screen.....................................................................................................................................39
FAMILY INSURANCE FILE Screen F Keys................................................................................................................................... 44
GENERAL FAMILY NOTES AND PAYMENT INFORMATION <F9> KEY (Notes/Pay Info)..................................................46
PRINT FAMILY FILE.......................................................................................................................................................................46
MAILING LABELS for FAMILY FILE.......................................................................................................................................... 47
PATIENT FILE MAINTENANCE..................................................................................................................................................... 48
Inquire about Patient.......................................................................................................................................................................... 48
DELETE A PATIENT....................................................................................................................................................................... 48
ADDING A NEW PATIENT............................................................................................................................................................ 49
PATIENT INSURANCE FILE, <F6> Screen................................................................................................................................... 51
FAMILY TREE, <F7> Screen........................................................................................................................................................... 51
PRINT PATIENT FILE..................................................................................................................................................................... 51
APPOINTMENT SCHEDULING MENU..........................................................................................................................................54
SCHEDULING CONCEPTS.............................................................................................................................................................55
TEMPORARY PROVIDER SCHEDULE........................................................................................................................................ 56
PRINT PROVIDER SCHEDULE..................................................................................................................................................... 56
CREATE SCHEDULE...................................................................................................................................................................... 56
PRINT SCHEDULE.......................................................................................................................................................................... 57
REVIEW APPOINTMENT SCHEDULE......................................................................................................................................... 57
BOOK PATIENT APPOINTMENTS.................................................................................................................................................60
INSURANCE CARRIER MAINTENANCE FILE........................................................................................................................... 65
........................................................................................................................................................... 67
BILLING #'S <F6> SCREEN............................................................................................................................................................ 70
PRIORAUTH SCREEN <F7> KEY..................................................................................................................................................73
CO-PAY SCREEN <F9> SCREEN...................................................................................................................................................74
PRINT INSURANCE CARRIERS.................................................................................................................................................... 75
SNF (SKILLED NURSING FACILITY) RESIDENT BILLING.....................................................................................................75
MEDICAL LIBRARY.......................................................................................................................................................................... 76
PRINT APPOINTMENT BOOK........................................................................................................................................................ 77
3
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
PRINT PATIENT CHARTS................................................................................................................................................................ 79
PROVIDER PASSWORD FILE......................................................................................................................................................... 80
REBUILD FAMILY XREF................................................................................................................................................................. 82
REBUILD PATIENT XREF................................................................................................................................................................ 83
CHAPTER 2
ACCOUNTING.......................................................................................................... 84
FAMILY LEDGER...............................................................................................................................................................................84
BILLED <F3> SCREEN....................................................................................................................................................................85
DIST.PAYMENT <F6> SCREEN.................................................................................................................................................... 86
CHARGE ITEM DISTRIBUTION....................................................................................................................................................89
CORRECTING ERRORS..................................................................................................................................................................92
Msg. <F7> Screen.............................................................................................................................................................................. 92
DAY SHEET..........................................................................................................................................................................................94
DAILY ACCOUNTING....................................................................................................................................................................... 94
REVIEW ADJUSTMENTS................................................................................................................................................................. 96
CHAPTER 3
BILLING.................................................................................................................... 99
PRIMARY BILLING........................................................................................................................................................................... 99
NARRATIVE <F6> SCREEN.........................................................................................................................................................105
AUTOMATIC EXIT BILLING SCREEN FOR PAY NOW OPTION. ........................................................................................ 109
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: NON-AUTOMATED OUTSIDE LAB PROCESSING................................................................... 113
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: DX SERVICE – TAKEOFF............................................................................................................. 113
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: PROVIDER REFERRAL – TAKEOFF........................................................................................... 113
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: SCHEDULE PROCEDURES – TAKEOFF..................................................................................... 117
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: SCHEDULE FOLLOW-UP APPOINTMENTS.............................................................................. 118
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: PATIENT INSTRUCTIONS – TAKEOFF...................................................................................... 118
FINAL EXIT SCREEN--AUTOMATIC EXIT PROMPTS............................................................................................................118
SECONDARY BILLING SCREEN.................................................................................................................................................. 127
RE-PRINT OFFICE VISIT BILLS SCREEN..................................................................................................................................131
RE-PRINT NON-VISIT BILLS SCREEN....................................................................................................................................... 133
BILLS TO BE CORRECTED/DELETED SCREEN...................................................................................................................... 134
Correct Rejected Bills. (Electronic)................................................................................................................................................. 134
Delete Bills not yet Sent. (Electronic)..............................................................................................................................................136
Delete Unprocessed Bills................................................................................................................................................................. 137
Remove Processing lock on a Bill....................................................................................................................................................138
Review Bills Sent................................................................................................................................................................................. 139
See Bills sent by Date.......................................................................................................................................................................139
View individual bill Data................................................................................................................................................................. 140
Response Reports................................................................................................................................................................................ 142
THIN Response Reports.................................................................................................................................................................. 142
Response Reports #2........................................................................................................................................................................ 144
APPOINTMENTS NEEDING PRIOR AUTHORIZATION......................................................................................................... 147
4
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
BILLS NEEDING PRIOR AUTHORIZATION..............................................................................................................................149
PRINT GROUPED BILLS.................................................................................................................................................................150
DAILY ADMIN...................................................................................................................................................................................150
CHAPTER 4 MANAGE PATIENT CARE...................................................................................... 153
PATIENT SIGN-IN............................................................................................................................................................................ 153
ENCOUNTER NOTES AND USER CLASSES...............................................................................................................................157
NON-VISIT ENCOUNTER, CLERICAL USER.............................................................................................................................157
PAST MEDICAL HISTORY.............................................................................................................................................................163
ADD PAST MEDICAL & SOCIAL PROBS.(Y/N......................................................................................................................... 164
ADD PAST SURGERIES & PROCEDURES (Y/N)...................................................................................................................... 168
Add Allergies (Y/N).........................................................................................................................................................................168
Add Immunizations (Y/N)................................................................................................................................................................170
Add Reproductive History (Y/N)..................................................................................................................................................... 172
Add Family History (Y/N)............................................................................................................................................................... 173
Add Hospitalizations (Y/N)............................................................................................................................................................. 174
The <F6> key, “Add Images”......................................................................................................................................................... 175
The <F7> key, “Rvw Images”.........................................................................................................................................................177
ORDERS INCOMPLETE & PENDING.......................................................................................................................................... 177
Lab Orders - View Pending & Ordered by Patient.......................................................................................................................... 178
Lab Orders - View Pending for All Patients.................................................................................................................................... 185
INHOUSE X-RAY Processing........................................................................................................................................................ 185
BACK TO: Incomplete & Pending Orders Menu for Prompts #4 through #11...............................................................................192
Dx Service and Referrals..................................................................................................................................................................193
CHAPTER 5 COMMUNICATION LOOPS..................................................................................... 196
CHAPTER 6 NURSING................................................................................................................. 198
ENTER TODAY'S NURSING INFORMATION............................................................................................................................ 198
A WORD ABOUT ABNORMAL FLAGS......................................................................................................................................201
GIVE MEDICATION OR IMMUNIZATION................................................................................................................................ 203
AdminNote....................................................................................................................................................................................... 205
Administration Pop-Up window.......................................................................................................................................................206
MEDICATION REFILL, PHARMACY REQUEST...................................................................................................................... 207
NEWRX OR REFILL <F6> SCREEN............................................................................................................................................ 209
CHECK DOCTOR'S RESPONSE TO REFILL QUESTION AND/OR NON-VISIT ENCOUNTER QUESTION................ 212
Example #1, response from doctor regarding a controlled substance refill that you had forwarded on to the doctor for approval......
213
Example #2, response from the doctor regarding a Non-Visit encounter sent to the doctor by either the clerical or nursing staff.......
214
COLLECT/PROCESS DOCTOR ORDERED LABWORK..........................................................................................................214
Examples of InHouse lab processing............................................................................................................................................... 218
REVIEW OR ADD TO NURSING INFO........................................................................................................................................ 220
Add Addendum to Nursing Intake Info............................................................................................................................................220
5
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Inquire about Nursing Intake Info.................................................................................................................................................... 220
Corrected note Review..................................................................................................................................................................... 222
Return to Main Menu....................................................................................................................................................................... 222
CHAPTER 7 PROVIDER............................................................................................................... 223
PROVIDER VISIT..............................................................................................................................................................................223
Review of last Visit's Plans.................................................................................................................................................................227
Active Medical Problems....................................................................................................................................................................227
chronic medications............................................................................................................................................................................ 228
past medical history............................................................................................................................................................................ 229
SCENARIOS....................................................................................................................................................................................... 229
Scenarios: <F3> “Scen” Screen......................................................................................................................................................... 235
Subjective: <F5> “S” Screen..............................................................................................................................................................236
Problem Specific Subjective Record................................................................................................................................................237
Subjective Notes...............................................................................................................................................................................241
Review of Systems <F6> “ROS” screen from main Subjective screen............................................................................................241
Review of Systems <F6> “ROS” screen from main Subjective screen............................................................................................241
Social History <F7> “SocialHx” screen from main Subjective screen............................................................................................ 242
Objective: <F6> “O” Screen.............................................................................................................................................................. 243
Objective Copy <F7>, “Copy” screen..............................................................................................................................................249
Assessment: <F7> “A” Screen........................................................................................................................................................... 251
Plan: <F8> “P” Screen....................................................................................................................................................................... 254
Menu selection #1, “Provider Performed Lab”................................................................................................................................ 254
Menu selection #2, “Order Lab”...................................................................................................................................................... 256
Menu selection #3, “Order X-RAY, INHOUSE”............................................................................................................................ 256
Menu selection #4, “Order Other Diagnostic Services, incl. X-RAY”............................................................................................ 257
Menu selection #5, “Order Therapeutic Medicine, Inj., or Immun.”............................................................................................... 258
Menu selection #6, “Do Procedures”............................................................................................................................................... 262
Menu selection #7, “Immed. Write Prescriptions (individual Rx's)”. & Menu selection #8, “Delay Write Prescriptions (as a
group)”............................................................................................................................................................................................. 265
Menu selection #9, “Give Instructions”. ......................................................................................................................................... 270
Menu selection #10, “Make Referrals”............................................................................................................................................ 271
Menu selection #11, “Schedule Procedures”................................................................................................................................... 274
Menu selection #12, “Schedule Single Follow-Up Appt. & Disability”.......................................................................................... 276
Work Comp <F6> screen................................................................................................................................................................. 278
Menu selection #13, “Schedule Multiple Follow-Up Appointments”..............................................................................................281
Menu selection #14, “Other Diagnosis Related Plans”.................................................................................................................... 281
Plan Narrative...................................................................................................................................................................................283
Chart Review <F11>, “ChtRv” screen..............................................................................................................................................283
Review Active Medical Problems selection.....................................................................................................................................285
Add to Active Medical Problems selection......................................................................................................................................285
Review Medication List selection.................................................................................................................................................... 286
Add to Medication List selection..................................................................................................................................................... 286
Review Past Medical History selection............................................................................................................................................288
Add to Past Medical History selection............................................................................................................................................. 288
Review Current Visit selection.........................................................................................................................................................288
Review Past Visits/Contacts selection..............................................................................................................................................288
6
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Review Labwork History selection.................................................................................................................................................. 289
Review Procedures Done selection.................................................................................................................................................. 289
Add to Clinic Procedures Done selection........................................................................................................................................ 290
See Selected Vital-Sign Trends selection.........................................................................................................................................290
Review Patient Images (EKG, etc) and Add to Patient Images (EKG, etc) selections.................................................................... 292
Review INHOUSE X-RAY Reports and Read INHOUSE X-RAYs Prelim/Final selections......................................................... 292
Order Patient Labwork..................................................................................................................................................................... 292
In House Labwork............................................................................................................................................................................ 292
Order INHOUSE X-RAY................................................................................................................................................................ 292
Sign Out: <F12> “SgnOut” Screen................................................................................................................................................... 292
Would you like assistance in selecting an E/M code? (y/n)............................................................................................................. 294
NON-VISIT ENCOUNTER............................................................................................................................................................... 297
NON-SCHEDULED PROVIDER VISIT..........................................................................................................................................297
CHAPTER 8 MONTHLY REPORTS............................................................................................. 300
PATIENT STATEMENTS.................................................................................................................................................................300
Summary Statements(w/o Zero bal)................................................................................................................................................. 300
Bill w/DX & CPT w/Pt. Resp.>0..................................................................................................................................................... 301
All Transactions............................................................................................................................................................................... 307
All Transaction with Pt. Resp...........................................................................................................................................................308
Bill by Patient & Prim. Ins............................................................................................................................................................... 309
PATIENT REPORTS......................................................................................................................................................................... 311
Patient by Procedure done (PW....................................................................................................................................................... 311
Patient by Dx.................................................................................................................................................................................... 312
Patient Appointments Due................................................................................................................................................................313
Drugs Prescribed by Patient............................................................................................................................................................. 314
Procedures Due................................................................................................................................................................................ 316
Patient Appts by Sched Prov............................................................................................................................................................ 317
PATIENT APPTS BY APPT. TYPE................................................................................................. 319
Patient by Ins, Sex, Age................................................................................................................................................................... 320
FINANCIAL REPORTS.................................................................................................................................................................... 322
Monthly Financial Report................................................................................................................................................................ 322
Collections by Provider....................................................................................................................................................................324
New Charges by Provider.................................................................................................................................................................325
Chg, Adj, Pay, by Provider.............................................................................................................................................................. 326
Collections by Procedure................................................................................................................................................................. 327
Procedure Charges............................................................................................................................................................................328
Family Receivable Ageing............................................................................................................................................................... 329
Family A/R Ageing w/Bal<>0......................................................................................................................................................... 330
Families with Bal/Fwd <> 0............................................................................................................................................................. 332
Ins. Resp. w/bal <> 0 by Co............................................................................................................................................................. 332
Visits by Insurance Type.................................................................................................................................................................. 333
Bills & Pay by Ins. Co......................................................................................................................................................................334
Detail Collection by Ins....................................................................................................................................................................335
Patient Visits by Provider.................................................................................................................................................................337
Prim & 2ndary Ins w/bal >0............................................................................................................................................................. 338
Charge Items by Trxn Descr............................................................................................................................................................ 339
CHAPTER 9 SYSTEM FILES....................................................................................................... 342
SYMPTOM FILE............................................................................................................................................................................... 342
7
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
SYMPTOM FILE.............................................................................................................................................................................342
PRINT SYMPTOM FILE................................................................................................................................................................ 345
SYMPTOM DELETE......................................................................................................................................................................345
DIAGNOSIS FILE.............................................................................................................................................................................. 346
PRINT DIAGNOSIS FILE.............................................................................................................................................................. 347
DIAGNOSIS DELETE.................................................................................................................................................................... 348
DIAGNOSIS SELECTIVE MAINTENANCE................................................................................................................................348
PROCEDURE FILE........................................................................................................................................................................... 348
PROCEDURE FILE.........................................................................................................................................................................349
PRINT PROCEDURE FILE”.......................................................................................................................................................... 351
PROCEDURE DELETE.................................................................................................................................................................. 352
PROCEDURE SELECTIVE MAINTENANCE..............................................................................................................................352
PATIENT INFORMATION FILE....................................................................................................................................................352
PT. INFORMATION FILE..............................................................................................................................................................352
PRINT PT. INFORMATION FILE................................................................................................................................................. 354
PT. INFO. DELETE.........................................................................................................................................................................354
GLOSSARY FILE.............................................................................................................................................................................. 354
GLOSSARY FILE........................................................................................................................................................................... 354
PRINT GLOSSARY FILE...............................................................................................................................................................356
GLOSSARY DELETE.....................................................................................................................................................................356
TERMS FILE...................................................................................................................................................................................... 356
TERMS FILE................................................................................................................................................................................... 357
FULL IMMUNIZATION CHECK CAPABILITY......................................................................................................................... 359
PRINT TERMS FILE...................................................................................................................................................................... 360
TERMS DELETE............................................................................................................................................................................ 361
LAB TEST FILE................................................................................................................................................................................. 361
LABCORP TESTS FILE................................................................................................................................................................. 361
Print Lab Test File............................................................................................................................................................................363
LAB TESTS DELETE.....................................................................................................................................................................364
Scenarios FILE.................................................................................................................................................................................... 364
ADD OR MAINTAIN SCENARIOS.............................................................................................................................................. 364
SCENARIO DELETE......................................................................................................................................................................369
PROCEDURE Report FILE.............................................................................................................................................................. 369
Add Procedure Report......................................................................................................................................................................370
Proced. Rpt. Delete.......................................................................................................................................................................... 372
CHAPTER 10 SUBSTANCE FILES.............................................................................................. 374
USING THE SUBSTANCE FILE FOR WRITING PRESCRIPTIONS....................................................................................... 374
Locating the substance you want quickly......................................................................................................................................... 374
Pediatric and adult dosing................................................................................................................................................................ 374
Dosages based on disease.................................................................................................................................................................374
Disease contraindications................................................................................................................................................................. 374
Blocked/Deleted drugs..................................................................................................................................................................... 375
8
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
CHAPTER 1 Basic concepts of using the
SmartDoctorÒ system.
The SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System is a comprehensive computer software tool to
be used by physicians, nurses, managers, and the general office staff to provide efficient,
comprehensive, and safe patient care. The system covers all aspects of patient care in a typical
medical office practice. This includes, appointing patients to the clinic, recording their arrival,
nursing intake, provider notes, prescription writing, procedure notes, ordering and reviewing
laboratory data, immunization checks, provider charges, care plans, management functions, etc. In
addition, the system has a complete accounts receivable system, including electronic billing.
Further, the system has many features to make daily tasks much simpler than they would otherwise
be, including facilitated personal note taking, a clinic bulletin board, and an on-line phone book to
keep track of all phone numbers for the entire staff.
There are two basic concepts to grasp in use of the SmartDoctorÒ system. First is, that of the
Family file system and Patient file system. Second is the form of data entry, single valued entries
versus multi-valued entries.
Nomenclature.
In this document, any items enclosed in "<>" brackets represent the key strokes or data to be
entered. Screen text will be shown in bold.
IMS will be used to indicate Intelligent Medical Systems, Inc, of Alpine, TX
All screen shots have fictitious names, addresses, phone numbers, etc.
Family and Patient file systems.
Starting with the concepts for the Family and Patient file systems, patients are assigned to family
units or head of household (HOH) units. This increases the overall efficiency and reduces errors by
only having to enter the basic family information such as address and family insurances one time,
rather than repeating it for each family member. The patient file contains only the unique
information of the patient and a pointer to the family file. The family file indicates the head of
household or responsible party, which can be either the husband, or wife, or possibly a third party
agency.
The family file contains the basic information about the family. The head household is the person to
whom the bills will be mailed. The family file includes the address, contact phone numbers, primary
clinic physician, any notes about the family situation, and insurance policies that would cover
multiple family members. Insurance policies for a single individual such as Medicare or Medicaid,
and those policies written only for the patient, should only be listed in the patient file. When
insurance policies are listed for selection, insurance policies from the patient file will be displayed
first, followed by any insurance policies in the family file which can possibly apply to this individual
also.
To create a new family and patient in the system, first enter the family information. In addition to
the above mentioned information, this would include the social security number and workplace for
both the head of household and spouse. You may add notes regarding the family as well as
information you want to show up at the time of sign-in and exit billing.
9
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
The patient file contains unique patient information: relationship to the head of household, sex, birth
date, social security number, activity status, type of residence, marital status, etc. This file also
contains insurance policies that apply only to this individual.
Since patients are grouped into family units, all billing is addressed to the head of household in the
family ledger files. This method simplifies the task of knowing who to bill for a given individual, and
also shows overall family ledger status.
If the head of household is a patient, then there also needs to be a patient file for this individual.
This is not duplicating any data entry since only information not entered in the family file is needed.
When going into the patient file to add a patient, you will first be prompted to put in a crossreference term to find the family file to be associated with this patient. Next you will be asked: "Is
Patient also Head of Household?" If you answer “yes”, then all the pertinent information will be
pulled from the family file. Finally, complete the specific information needed for this individual.
Concepts of data entry.
There are two forms of data entry, single valued prompts and the multi-valued prompts. The single
valued prompts can only have one data element in them. They are generally preceded with a
prompt number and description. Examples of this would be sex, date of birth, social security, etc.
Generally, when populating single valued prompts when the system is in the "add mode" ( as
indicated at the right hand side of screens title bar), you will be stepped through each of the single
valued prompts. When you complete filling in the single valued prompts, you will automatically be
placed in the "change mode" (as seen on the title bar), and be prompted to go back and make
corrections by the specific Prompt number, All the prompts, or to just Fill in blank prompts. The
multi-valued prompts will start with a line number, and will scroll down the screen to list or enter as
many values as are needed. When in a multi-valued prompt the “Line” heading will be highlighted
for that prompt. An example of a multi-valued prompt would be multiple phone numbers. There
can be none, one, or many. Generally to modify the multi-valued prompts you: (A)dd to the lines,
(C)hange a multi-valued line, or (D)elete a multi-valued item. You can also use the up arrow key to
go back through fields and lines of a multi-valued prompt, while still in a prompt line.
If you go from one type of prompt such as single valued prompts, to the multi-valued prompts, you
can go back up to the first type of prompts by typing <u> (for up) at the change prompt.
When you add a line of text to the LINES section of the data entry screen, just press <Enter>, the
cursor will move to the next line and add a new line number. If you do not want to add any more
lines, press <F1>. See the Line Notes prompts at the bottom of the screen if you want to make any
changes or corrections before you exit. (See "Using the Line Prompts" below for further
information.)
MAKING CORRECTIONS:
If you try to erase a line and receive a message that "a response is required", then you can only
alter it. You may want to retype it (type over text), or use the backspace or space bar to erase parts
of it. If you don't have enough information to fill in a line that requires a response, try typing <F2> or
<?>." to bring up the help screen. To move from the end of a line to the beginning of the same line
quickly, press the down-arrow and then the up-arrow. You may use the left and right arrows for
moving forward and back on a line. After making a correction, always arrow over to the end of the
line (if you are not already there), or hit the <End> key ( if using a PC) before pressing the <enter>
10
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
key. Otherwise you will only enter the part of the line that is before the cursor.
USING THE SINGLE-VALUED PROMPTS:
To make corrections to a single valued prompt, enter the prompt #. After you have made a
correction on that field, arrow over to the end of the field and press <Enter>. Pressing <Enter> at
the end of the field, enters the correction and returns the cursor to the Change prompt below.
Hitting the <enter> key before reaching the end of the field, will truncate the field data to the cursor
position. To make corrections to more than one prompt, enter "A" (for all). You may move down the
single valued prompts by pressing <enter> at the beginning of each field. To Fill in any prompts,
enter "F" (Fill). The cursor will then move to the first blank prompt. You may press <Enter> to move
to the next blank prompt. Enter <F1> or type <end> ( not the End key on a PC) to end filling in
prompts. You then either exit the prompts or will be stopped at a required prompt.
USING THE "LINE" PROMPTS:
To add a line ( in multi-valued prompts), type <A> (add) and press <Enter>. A line number will
appear before each new line of text you type. Press <F1> to end the numbering. To make a
change on a particular Line, at the change prompt at the bottom of the screen, enter <C> (change)
and then the line number. To insert something between lines, enter <I> (insert) and the line number
above which you want to insert the text. For example, to insert text between Lines 2 and 3, enter
<I> and then <3>. To bring any line up to the top of the viewing area, enter <L> (list) and then the
line number you would want to scroll to. To restore the original order, enter <L> by itself. Enter
<D> to Delete a Line of Text. Specify by entering the line number, and then answer the prompts.
NAVIGATING THE "LINE" PROMPTS:
To move around quickly when the Line (multi-valued) prompt is presented with many lines (as in the
Family Ledger), or more than one screen full, the following short cut methods are provided. You
can enter <lb> at the change prompt for “list bottom”. This will scroll you down to the last line. You
can also enter <sb> to “select bottom”, which will have the same effect of scrolling down to the last
line and then selecting it, with it's line number. You can also use the “page up”, “page down”, “up
arrow”, and “down arrow” keys to navigate the multi-value prompt. Once you see the line you want
to work on, enter that line number.
ENTERING DATES
In general, dates can be entered in one of several formats: 0603, 060304, 06032004, 06/03,
06/03/04, 06/03/2004, <TODAY> ( upper or lower case) will be replaced with today's date. If the
year is left off, it is assumed by the system to be the current year. If the century is left off, it is
assumed to be the current century (2000) if the number is between 00 and 10. It is assumed to be
in the past century if the number is 11 through 99. Of course, you can enter the century explicitly.
You will want to do this if the patient was born in the 1800's such as 1899 for a patient who is 105 in
2004. You will also need to add the century for a person born between 1900 and 1910 ( or 2000
will be assumed for the century).
ENTERING PHONE NUMBERS
Phone numbers can be entered in a 7 digit or 10 digit form, to represent phone numbers without or
with area codes respectively. You can enter the numbers with or without the dashes “-”. The
entries without dashes will be converted automatically to numbers with the dashes added.
ENTERING SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBERS
Social security numbers ( often abbreviated as SSN) contain 9 digits. These 9 digits can be entered
without dashes, and dashes will be automatically placed. If you elect to enter these with dashes,
11
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
they must be in the form of: xxx-xx-xxxx.
A WORD ON SELECTION RANGES
When specifying ranges that span both numbers and characters, or that span both upper and lower
case characters, you need to know the sorting order that will be used. The sorting system sorts with
the standard ASCII code system order sequence, as follows: space * 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E F
G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z. There are
many additional characters not listed here (a total of 127 ASCII characters), since they would normally
not be used in the procedure charges coding system. Therefore if you wanted to select from 99212
through a Medicare Pap smear of G0101, you need to list the number as the starting range, and the G
code in the ending range.
In addition, most range prompts can also take and/or will default the following terms: “FIRST”, “LAST”,
“ALL”, “TODAY”. However, they do need to be used in the appropriate context. For example, entering
<TODAY> in a name field, would not result in a good search.
REPORTS AND OUPUT
In general, you will be given an option at the bottom of the screen after a selection menu for the form
of the output you want as follows:
The default will generally be “S” for screen. Each clinic has its own standard printers that can be
selected by using the appropriate F-Key. Further the output can be directed to a specific file or other
printer. This will vary significantly depending on how your clinic is set up, and HIPAA restriction. Talk
to your system administrator if you want to use these other output options.
CONTROL CHARACTERS, MAIL, AND GENERAL COMMANDS
1. $ or # Problem:
If you ever see $ or # sign on the screen waiting for data entry, hit <Ctrl> <d>. This rarely happens
when a program does not shut down properly.
2. To get to the Interoffice mail program - go to the Quick Menu (F4) and then select Mail
You will then be given a selection seen below:
To send mail - press <1>
You will then be asked whom do you wish to send mail. Type in the initials of the person and press
enter. You will then be asked the Subject. Type it in, and press enter. At the next line, type in your
text. When finished, to end the message and send, enter a blank line and press <Ctrl> <d>.
To read mail - press <2>
At the “&” prompt, type the number of the message you want to read or <t> to get the next
12
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
message. Then press <enter> to read the message. If you read a message and then do not delete
it, it will automatically go to Old Mail.
To read Old mail - press <3>
At the “&” prompt, type the number of the message you want to read, or just type <t> to get the next
message. Then press <enter> to read the message.
Simple Commands for the Mail:
t - to type it
d - to delete
q - to quit
3. Terminal or PC Lock-up Problem:
While using a Terminal input device, the screen hangs up. That is, will not respond to any
keystroke or action.
Discussion: This problem is often a result of hitting the(control) <Ctrl> key instead of the shift key
while hitting the letter s. The <Ctrl> <s> combination is a basic system command that tells the
system to stop transmitting to the terminal. The screen will stay frozen until the <Ctrl> <q>
command is given, the system command to continue to transmit.
Correction of problem: While holding the control <Crtl> key down, hit the letter <q>.
On PCs using a terminal emulator or a client application, the system may appear not to be
responding, because the screen is not active. Check to see that the window is active by looking at
the top bar. It should be blue if it is active. If it is gray, then click anywhere on the window to make
it active.
When using a PC with a terminal emulator or a client application, be sure to exit the program before
closing the window. That is, end-out or <F1> back to the point that you are presented with a new
login prompt. Closing the window prior to doing this can result in a locked record or incomplete
posting to an associated file, both of which will cause problems for you later.
4. Unwanted message or garbage on screen. If the screen doesn't look normal, you can redraw
the screen on the Wyse 150 terminal by hitting the <Ctrl>and <n> keys at the same time. On the
PC use the <Ctrl> and <l> (letter L, not number 1) at the same time. If garbage or junk is still on the
screen, type “end” and hit the <enter> key until out of the screen.
5. To print any screen - press <Ctrl> <r> and then press <P> for printer. Once you get the notice
that a print job has been queued, then press <Ctrl> <l> (letter L) to redraw the screen on the PC, or
<Ctrl> <n> on the terminal.
7. If you are working on a screen with single and multi-values, and you need to move up on the
screen, at the prompt sign type <u> and press <enter>. It will move you up a section.
8. Simple commands for Wyse Terminals:
<Ctrl> + <e> - will move you to the end of the line. You can use the <End> key on a PC.
<Ctrl> + <b> - will move you backward on a line without erasing characters. You can use the arrow
keys on a PC.
<Ctrl> + <f> - will move you forward on a line without erasing characters. You can use the arrow
13
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
keys on a PC.
<Ctrl> + <p> - will let you insert (or put) characters without overwriting. You can use the <Insert>
key on a PC.
If the F Keys are not working use these instead:
<F1> is equal to <end>
<F2> is equal to <?>
<F8> is equal to <top> - is defined as exit without save - it is the same as top
When picking from a list - you can use the following commands if you do not want to page through
the list:
LB goes to the bottom of the list.
SB selects the bottom of the list.
LOGIN AND PASSWORDS
Is the Terminal On?
Look for a small green light at the base of the screen. If this light is on, the terminal is on. You
cannot tell just by looking at the screen if the terminal is on or off, because it may appear dark in
either case. If the green light is on and the screen is dark it is only "napping", so press the Shift key
to "wake it up." But if the light is off, you know that the terminal needs to be turned on to bring it to
life. Merely press the on/off button (or toggle) on the terminal. See the instruction manual if you are
uncertain of its location.
Logging in for the First Time: Before you can do any work on the terminal, you must introduce
yourself. Turn on the computer and press the return key a couple of times untill you see the "login"
prompt. You will need a login name and a password. The login name may be the user's (your)
name. The password should be provided by your systems administrator. Type the login name at the
"login" prompt and press Enter. When you see the "password" prompt, enter your password. Use
only lowercase letters for login entries.
Password Security Precautions: You should memorize your password instead of writing it down, for
security reasons. Whenever you type in your password, type it carefully. You will not be able to
see what you have typed, as it will not appear on the screen. If it is incorrect, you will be asked to
log in again. When you enter the password correctly, the date and time of your last (successful or
unsuccessful) logins will be displayed. If these times do not match your actions, consult your
administrator. He may want to change your password if someone has tried to log into your account.
Why Can't I Log In?
If you cannot log in, it is possible that the "lifetime" given your password has expired. Your systems
administrator will need to give you a new password. There may be a limit on the number of
unsuccessful logins you are allowed at your terminal or for your account. Your systems
administrator will need to give you a new password or reopen your account before you can log in
again. Tell your systems administrator immediately if you feel you have entered your logins
correctly, since this might indicate that the system has been tampered with. This system will only
recognize lower case letters in your login entries. Be sure your Caps Lock key is not on. If
everything you type is in capital letters (and your Caps Lock key is not on) try switching the
computer on and then off again. If you forget your password, ask your administrator to change it.
14
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Changing Your Password:
The first time you log in your password will be "password," but you should change this password
immediately after you log in. It should be a password only you know. Open the "Quick Menu" by
pressing F4. In the "Quick Menu" off the “Family & Patient File Maint.” screen (Front Office Menu),
Select #14 and press <Enter>. In the "Quick Menu" off the “Doctor Main Menu”, Select #11 and
press <Enter>. Type in your old password at the prompt. On SCO Unix Systems, you will be given
a choice of picking your own password or having the computer create one for you. To pick your
own password, press <Enter> for the default (or enter the number "1"). Then just enter the new
password. On Linux systems you will just type in your new password after the next prompt. You will
then be prompted to repeat your entry. If you type your password incorrectly when changing it, the
password program will terminate and the computer may log you out. Log in again, if necessary, and
restart the password program.
Rules for Password Security: Choosing & Using your Password
1. Never give anyone your password. This is YOUR password. If someone gets your password
they could log into the system as you and make changes for which you will become responsible.
2. Passwords should never be written, spoken, sent over electronic mail or shared with anyone.
3. Never reuse a password.
4. Never enter your password when someone is watching your fingers.
5. Do not use words spelled backwards.
6. Do not use a password that is easy to guess.
7. A combination of upper and lower case letters, numbers, and special characters is best.
For example: <Golf-Movie> or <this4Me>. Even better, do not used words in dictionary.
Expiration of Your Password: Your systems administrator may have set a date by which your
password expires. If your password has expired, you will have to obtain a new one. The
administrator decides whether or not you can change password for yourself.
Logging out: To log out, return to your Main Menu and then press the <F1> key (End/Exit), which
will automatically log you out of the system. In the event there is a system problem, you may see a
"$" prompt or a "#" prompt. If this happens you should log out as follows to prevent damaging
system files: Type "exit," and press <Return>. Alternately, you may use the quick log out, <CTRL>
<d>. Hold down the CTRL key and press <d>. The "login:" prompt should reappear on your
screen after you have logged out.
F-KEYS
To move to different areas of the system quickly, you can use the function keys (F-Keys) at the
bottom of the screen. The main advantage of using the F-Keys is that with a single key stroke you
can quickly branch to other areas of the system, get the information (or record information), and
then quickly return to where you started. The F-Keys at the bottom of the screen will change
depending on where you are in the system. In this way logical branching can be set in relation to
what you are working on. Screen specific F-Keys will be explained in the specific screens.
The general F-Keys available from most screens are: F1=Exit, F2=Help, F4=QMenu, F5=Cal.
F1-Key: Hitting the <F1> key is the equivalent of typing the word "end". To the AppgenÒ run-time
engine this means end input to single valued or multi-valued prompts. So if there were 10 singlevalued prompts on a screen, and while entering on any of these prompts you hit the <F1> key, you
15
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
would skip that prompt and all others listed in the group of prompts. You would then be presented
with the change prompt at the bottom of the screen or exited from that screen to the prior screen. If
you were on the main starting menu after login, then you would exit that screen and be brought
back to a login screen. If one or more of the prompts is a required prompt, these prompt will not be
skipped, and processing will stop here for a data entry.
F2-Key: Hitting the <F2> key is equivalent to typing the <?> key. To the AppgenÒ run-time engine,
this means present any help messages associated with that prompt. Most data entry fields will have
context sensitive help available for you. So if you are not sure of what information is needed in a
specific field, simply hit the <F2> key or enter <?>, and any context sensitive help that is available
will be presented to you. Occasionally, where the data entry choices are limited, a defaulted "?" will
be seen in the data field. All you have to do here is hit the enter key and the context sensitive help
will pop-up. Of course, if you know which limited character set you want to enter, you may just enter
it and avoid picking from the pop-up list.
F4-Key: Hitting the <F4> key is equivalent to typing the <ctrl+w> keys. The Quick Menu (QM) is
slightly different depending on whether your start screen is the main office screen, the main provider
screen, or the main system screen. This will allow you to quickly branch to another area in the
system and then return automatically to the place that you called it from. Each QM screen available
is show below in Figures 1 through 4, being called from anywhere within one of those main screens.
F5-Key: Hitting the <F5> key is equivalent to typing the <ctrl+d> keys. This brings up the calendar
function as seen in Figure 4. When the calendar screen first pops up, it is in the month mode. You
can right or left arrow to move through the adjacent months. Then to come back to today's date,
just enter <t>.
To go to the year version of this screen ( Figure 5) just enter <y>, and you will see the yearly format.
Move around as above on the monthly screen.
Hit the <F1> from any of these screens to close the calendar function.
OTHER QUICK MENU OPTIONS
In the three Quick Menus above, from the Family ( Front Office) screens, the Provider ( Doctor
Menu) screens, and the System (System Information Files) screens, there are up to 16 items to
select from to perform specific functions. Many of these have been discussed above. Many others
are simply ways to reach other main menu items without having to go back through the screen to
get to these. For example, from the QuickMenu you can temporarily branch to the Booking menu,
the Family menu, Insurance menu, etc. Other options branch to previously mentioned menus, but
16
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Quick Menu from Family File screen:
Figure 1
Quick Menu of the Family File Maintenance screen.
Quick Menu from Provider Main screen:
Figure 2
Quick Menu of the Doctor Main Menu.
17
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Quick Menu from System Main screen:
Figure 3
Figure 4
Quick Menu of the System Information Files screen.
Calendar Pop-Up in Month Mode.
18
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 5
COPYRIGHT 2004
Calendar Pop-Up in Year Mode.
in a lookup mode only, such as the Phone Book Lookup, and Procedure Lookup, etc. The Rebuild
selections are to rebuild the specific cross-reference files indicated. See the section on Rebuild
Family XREF for general instruction and precautions. The only selections from these Quick menu
selections not otherwise discussed are: branching to word processing or other programs, use of the
Calculator, Print Job Manager, and Who is Logged On System?, which is discussed below.
BRANCHING TO OTHER PROGRAMS
The system has the ability to branch to other programs on the server such as word processing. For
example, we show a branch to “WordPerfect” on the Provider Quick menu in Figure 2. To
implement branches such as this, the appropriate software must be installed on the server by IMS.
Have your system administrator call IMS if this option is desired.
CALCULATOR
This branch can be selected from the Provider and System Quick Menu screens. The calculator is
the Unix/Linux “bc” calculator. This is a scientific calculator that is very powerful. It can actually
have programs written in it. However, we will show you how to use it in its most basic form. Upon
selecting the calculator from the Quick menu, the following screen will be seen:
Below are shown two calculations. The first calculation is done to determine what 20% of the fee of
$83.24 will be. The result is $16.65, if you round off the number. In this case we entered 83.24 for
the amount, used the “*” ( accepted math symbol for multiplication) for multiply, and then hit the
<enter> key. The result is displayed on the next line.
19
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
In the second example, we divided a child's weight in lbs by 2.2 to convert it to kilograms. Then
multiplied it by 25mg/kg. Finally divided it by 3 for three times a day dosing, and hit the <enter> key.
The result rounded would be 189 mg per dose.
The basic operators are + - * / for add, subtract, multiply, and divide. The multiply and division will
be done before adding and subtracting. To get the results you want, it is always a good idea to
place the addition and subtraction in parenthesis “()” to get the results you want. Otherwise, do not
mix the add, subtract, multiply, and divide on the same line.
For example:
2+1*10 results in 12.
(2+1)*10 results in 30.
2+1 results in 3.
3*10 results in 30.
When done with the calculator, simply hit the <Ctrl> + <d> keys. You will then be returned to the
Quick Menu.
WHO IS LOGGED ON THE SYSTEM?
This function is available from the System Information Files screen via the Quick Menu. Upon
selecting this item, a screen similar to that shown in Figure 6 below, will be presented.
Figure 6
Who is Logged On.
It is suggested that the system administrator check that everyone is logged off the system at the
end of the day. We have set all systems to automatically kick anyone off the system after two hours
of idle time, unless your clinic requested a different time limit. It is important for system security and
system maintenance that all users be logged off the system when not actively using the system.
Further, it is a HIPAA requirement that users log off when not using the system to preserve privacy
and security of patient data.
In Figure 6 above, you can see that two “User”(s) are logged on, sjj and jhd5. The “Tty” column tells
20
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
you the terminal they were logged in on; the “login@” column tells you when they logged in; and the
“Idle” column tells you how long the terminal has been idle ( in this case, not idle). When done, hit
the <enter> ( return key), and you will be returned to the Quick Menu.
PRINT JOB MANAGER
The Print Job Manager can be reached from the QuickMenu by hitting the <F4> from most front office
screens. The format of the print job manager will change depending on the operating system you are
using. The clinic managers will be shown how to control the print jobs by the system administrator.
The first thing to do if a print job is running and you want to stop it is turn off the printer ( or set it to offline). Once printing has stopped, you will have time to be sure you are deleting the correct print job.
Once the print job is cleared you can turn on the printer again. If the printer starts printing information
you deleted, just turn the printer on and off a few times until the buffer of information that was already
in transit to the printer has been consumed ( every time the printer is turned on, it will fill its buffers with
any information being transferred.).
PHONE BOOK
One of the first things you will want to do to make life easier is enter all the phone numbers you
need in the systems phone book. This listing will include names, addresses, phone numbers, and
any other information you think is pertinent. The Phone Book is listed on the Main Menu as well as
in the Quick Menu.
If you just want to look up an address, phone number, or to check to see whether it has ever been
entered in the phone book, you should press <F4>. This gives you the Quick Menu. Select "Phone
Book Lookup" (#6), and press <Enter> to go to the phone book look-up screen.
At the first prompt (# 1), enter part of the description (part of name, company, city, etc.) of the
phone number you want. If there is more than one entry with the same cross-reference
information, a pop-up window will present the choices from which you can select. In the following
example, Figure 7, <amb> was entered to find an ambulance company.
To add a new address to the phone book, go to the Main Menu and select "Phone Book" (#27).
Then press <Enter>. The screen you see is only to be used for adding or changing addresses and
information.
Setting Up the Phone Book
A number is assigned to each address you add. This is a permanent number for reference only. If
you decide to eliminate an address, however, the related number will not be eliminated. So, the
next address you type will be assigned the next consecutive number. When you accept a new
number ( as seen in Figure 9 below), you will see the following message, "This record is not on
file FP-PHONE_BOOK. Create a new one?" Answer with <y> to add a new record.
Next, a pop-up screen, as seen in Figure 10, will ask if you want to add a referring provider.
If you answer yes, then you are taken to the referring provider screen as seen in Figure 11. Hit the
<F7> key to start a new referring provider record.
21
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 7
Phone Book Lookup—Inquire Mode
Figure 8
Selecting to Add to Phone Book
22
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 9
COPYRIGHT 2004
Initial Phone Book Add Screen
Figure 10
Add Referring Provider Option
Then enter the UPIN number and the rest of the information requested. Upon entering the zip code
in prompt #8, the city and state will be filled in for you with information from the zip code file,
discussed below. Prompts # 10 and 11 on this screen will give you choices from a pop-up screen,
just highlight the selection you want and hit <enter>. The pop-up for prompts # 10 and 11 can be
added to in the TERMS file under keys, "SY-SPECIALTY" and "SY-DEGREE", respectively. When
complete, a new record appears. Hit <F1> and this will return you to the phone book file. In the
phone book, just hit the <Enter> key in each field and the value from the referring provider file will
be placed in that field.
If just entering a new phone number, type in the information requested on the entry screen, as seen
in Figure 12. After you type in the phone number, you will need to indicate whether you will be
making contact by FAX or phone. Press Enter if it is by phone (or type in your choice). For "Type
of Number", you need to indicate the type of profession involved, i.e., hosp, fire, doctor, lab, etc. If
23
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 11
COPYRIGHT 2004
Adding Referring Provider Information.
you do not have a "contact" person, type in "unknown" or "---." You may want to get that
information later. Most of the time you will only need one line for the street address, though two are
provided. If you know the zip code, you may type it in and the rest of the line will be filled in
automatically if it is listed in the zip code file. If you don't know the zip code, press <Enter> to see a
list of towns and their zip codes. Press <Enter> to activate the Line Note section when you have
completed the address information. Here, you may type notes, comments, instructions, or other
information that you would like to have available for contacting this company (such as cell phone
number, alternate numbers, etc.). <F1> out of this screen when it is completed.
MY NOTES
This file is for your personal notes ( see Figure 13), so the content is not limited. Today's date will
be entered on each line automatically. However, you may over-type with any date you wish.
As in all the Line sections, you are allowed to make any changes, additions, or corrections (see
"Using Line Prompts"). Only you can see these notes, or anyone knowing your login name and
password. So don't give anyone your login or password!
Bulletin Board File
This file is similar to the My Notes file with the exception that this is used for public notes ( Figure
14). Everyone in the clinic will be able to read these notes. Most clinics use this as a public bulletin
board. You can keep track of supplies that are needed, place announcements about meetings, etc.
Also, you can add suggestions for your support personnel, such as, ideas for changes to the system
or additional drugs that need to be added to the system. Notify your support staff if you have placed
any messages on this bulletin board for them. They do not routinely check this bulletin board.
24
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 12
Figure 13
COPYRIGHT 2004
Clinic Phone Book Add screen
Personal Notes screen
25
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 14
COPYRIGHT 2004
Bulletin Board screen.
THE ZIP CODE FILE
You may get to the Zip Code file off the main front office screen or from the Quick Menu pop-up
screen. You will then be placed in the ZIP Code Maintenance menu screen.
MAKING ADDITIONS TO THE ZIP CODE FILE
To add zip codes, select #1 in the Zip Code Maintenance menu. Enter the zip code number on the
Add screen (5 or 9 digits--no dashes or spaces). Then enter the name of the city. Enter the twoletter state abbreviation at the "State Code:" prompt. You will not be allowed to add a zip code
already listed. If you want to take a look at the list anyway, answer "Y" to the "Review?" prompt.
The address you have just filled in will not be on the list yet. So, you still have a chance to make
changes once you "end" this screen (type <end> or press <F1>). The change prompt on the Zip
Code Add screen allows changes on lines 2 through 5 only. So if you have typed the zip code
wrong, no changes are allowed. Fortunately, you have the alternative of deleting the whole thing (by
hitting the <F8> to exit with no save), if you catch your error before you exit the screen. You may
always just start over again!
MAKING CHANGES IN THE ZIP CODE FILE
Select #2 and enter a password to bring up the Zip Code File Change screen. Enter the zip code #
to identify the record to be changed. Make the necessary changes using the Change prompt at the
bottom of the screen. The zip code number cannot be changed or deleted at this point, nor can you
delete the entire record. You may want to review the zip code listing again before you exit to a new
screen. If not, enter the default.
26
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
PRINT/REVIEW ZIP CODE FILE
Select #3 in the Zip Code File to see the zip codes listed for a particular state or for all the states. If
you enter a state code ( i.e., postal abbreviation), you will see a listing of zip codes that are on file
for cities in that state. If you enter the word "All," you will see the entire list of zip codes.
CLINIC PROVIDER FILE
The Clinic Provider File, menu item number 18 on the Main Menu, contains identification
information on each provider working at the clinic. It also has information relating to the provider's
medical specialty, medical licenses, provider numbers issued by various agencies, length of
affiliation with the clinic, the group or clinic for billing, etc.
MODIFYING INFORMATION IN THE PROVIDER FILE
Select menu item #1 in the Clinic Provider File menu screen to see the Clinic Provider Change
screen ( Figure 15). In prompt #1, “Prov. Initials:”, hit enter to see the list of providers from the
pop-up screen. Arrow down to the provider you want to see or modify, and hit <enter> to select this
provider. Then add or change information as needed, as seen in Figure 16. Use the <F2> help key
to get information on what is expected for each field.
The “Degree:” field (prompt # 7) is set by IMS and cannot be changed by the user. This field
specifies the user's privileges in the system. The actual degree to be listed after the providers
name, if not that specified, will be listed in the block next to that prompt labeled "chg_to:".
In prompt #11 "Taxonomy Code:", leave blank unless you are certain of your code. Putting in the
wrong number will result in denied claims. However, leaving it blank will be accepted at this time
(this will probably change over time as the HIPAA regulations are modified).
In prompt #12 " Tax ID #:", enter the federally assigned Tax Identification Number of the billing
provider. This can be either the Employer Number or the SSN of this provider.
Prompt # 13 “Type:”, relates to the type of tax ID # entered in prompt #12. Hitting the <F2> key will
bring up the help screen with the limited choices. The choices will be “E” for Employer
Identification Number, “S” for Social Security Number, and “X” for Corporate name.
Prompt #14, "Start Date", is the date the provider started working at the clinic. This must include
the month, day, and year, but you may approximate the date using "01" for the day started. If the
provider is still working at the clinic, press <enter> to skip to the next prompt.
Prompt #15, “Leave:” date, only populate this field if the provider will no longer will work in the clinic.
Prompt # 16, "Group Number:", enter "0" if this provider is part of the primary clinic or group. If
there are multiple groups at this facility, other than the primary clinic, then add group numbers that
correspond to the clinic number for that group. The group number will be used for this provider to
pull information for billing from the clinic file of the same number.
Prompt # 17 "# days Chronic:", is the default number of days this provider wants for a chronic type
of prescription. If the provider generally would prescribe a 90 day supply of medication for chronic
type medications, such as thyroid medications, then indicate 90 here.
27
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 15
Select the Clinic Provider for changes.
Figure 16
Clinic Provider Change screen.
Prompt # 18 " # RF Chronic:", is the default number of refills this provider wants for these chronic
medications. Typically, this is 3.
28
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Prompt # 19, "Non-physician Sup.:", if the provider type in the "Degree" field is NP, PA, or any
non-billing provider type, then you will be allowed to pick the supervising provider from the pop-up
list of providers in that prompt. Of course, you will not be able to pick a provider not entered into the
provider file yet.
Prompt # 20, "Default RxPrinter:", a pop-up list will be presented of available prescription printers
that can be used. Pick the one that would be best for this provider in general. The provider will be
able to choose other available prescription printers, at the time of prescription writing. The available
prescription printers are listed in the TERMS file under the key "ADM-RXPRINTERS. Only system
administrators should edit that record.
Entering the medical license information.
After passing prompts 2-20, you can add to or modify the lower left hand corner multi-value prompt
for medical license information. When you fill in the LINE section of the multi-value, you must enter
the medical license information (left side of screen) first. Then enter the postal abbreviation for the
state where the license was issued ( for example, TX for Texas), followed by the date issued.
Repeat this process for each license the provider has. Once you have entered this information
correctly, press <F1> to end the numbering and press <enter> to continue on to the next Line
section.
Entering provider numbers.
These can be state and federal drug license numbers, insurance carrier ID numbers, or state
nursing board numbers. Enter any provider or license number issued by state or federal agencies,
or insurance companies first. Next, under "Type", pick the appropriate provider number from the list
presented (issuing agency or company). The available list of provider numbers are listed in the
TERMS file under the key "ADM-PROV-NUM".
Provider Appointment Types.
To set or see the provider appointment types and times press <F9> (Appointment Types "pop-up"
screen) to establish the provider's appointment types as seen in Figure 17.
Prompt #1, “Blocking Factor (min. per slot):” on this screen is for block time (blocking factor) for
this provider. From the associated pop-up screen pick the base block time for this provider. These
times go from 1 minute to 90 minutes. Typically, this is 15 minutes.
Next on the lower half of the screen is a multi-valued prompt for the different appointment types.
For example, School Physical, Wound Check, Counseling, etc., and the number of time slots
required for each of these appointment types. The system will then multiply the number of slots
assigned by the blocking factor to come up with the "Actual Time", or minutes for this type of
appointment for this provider. This allows you to specify different amounts of time based on
provider preference for the same appointment type.
The pop-up screen for the appointment types can be modified. You can add any appointment type
you like via the system TERMS file under the ADM-APPT_TYPE key. You must follow the format of
the previously added terms. You should use capital letters. The last character of the 8 characters
must be an "M","F", or "B", for male, female, or both sexes, respectively. Be sure to always have at
least one appointment type for each sex, or one for both ("B"). This prevents getting stuck in the
error loop by trying to make an appointment for a patient of one sex, and not having a
corresponding "M", "F", or "B".
29
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 17
COPYRIGHT 2004
Clinic Provider Appointment Types.
PRINT PROVIDER LIST
Select #2 from the Clinic Provider menu screen to view or print the provider listing by professional
degree and specialty.
CLINIC FILE
The Clinic File, #23 on the Main Office Menu, is where all basic information about the place of
service is entered. The "0" (zero) clinic is the primary clinic for a typical installation. All the
information requested should be filled in if available. Additionally, a "clinic" for each place of
service should be listed for sites where services are rendered. These additional clinics should only
have the clinic name and address entered, since the remaining information only pertains to a clinic
which generates bills. If this is a multiple group practice, you must enter the equivalent of the "0"
(zero) clinic information for each group. The clinic number will become that of the group number.
This group number then must be entered in the provider file to link this information with that
provider.
TO ADD A CLINIC:
Each clinic ( or site where services are preformed) must be assigned a new number before you
enter the clinic name and information. The primary clinic is always assigned the number "0" which is
the default at the first prompt. Press <enter> and type the name of the primary clinic ( as seen in
Figure 18).
If you are adding an additional clinic ( or site of service), hit the <F4> key, “New Clinic Number”, to
get a new number for each clinic you add. Then enter the clinic name, street address, and the zip
code. If you don't know the zip code, press <F7> to make a selection from the zip code list. The
rest of the address will be filled in automatically.
To see all the clinics currently listed in the system, hit the <F3> key, "See All Clinics".
30
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 18
COPYRIGHT 2004
Setting Up Primary Clinic Record
Prompt #5 , "Initially set Patient resp.?", enter <Y>es if you wish to change the default
responsibility to patient instead of insurance. If left blank or <N>o, then the insurance company is
assumed to be responsible until changed in charge item document.
Prompt #6, "Perform Formulary Checks?", enter <Y>es if you want formulary checks done when
prescribing drugs. If left blank or set to <N>o, then no formulary checks will be done.
Prompt #7, "Print routing slip?", set this to <Y>es if you use routing slips (not recommended) and
have a printer dedicated for this purpose. The "printrte" shell script will need to be modified as
needed by your software vendor to indicate the printer to use.
Prompt #8, "Store digital X-Rays?", set to <Y>es if you take In-House X-Rays and store the data
for viewing on-line. Otherwise, leave it blank or enter <N>o.
To make any changes, use the Change prompt, then continue on to the LINE section. Enter the
phone number(s) of the clinic (just numbers--no spaces or dashes in between). Then press <F2> to
select the "Type" you need to enter, or enter "Phone," "Fax," “Billing” ( required for electronic
billing), or "Computer." Press <F1> to end entering these multi-valued items. Use the Change
prompt to make any corrections before continuing on.
TO VIEW OR CHANGE CLINIC INFORMATION:
To view or change the primary clinic information, accept the default at the first prompt. To view or
change any other clinic information, enter the clinic number or the first three characters of the clinic
name, address, or city. You may move through the change prompts to the section you want to
change by pressing the return key in order to "continue on." In the LINE section, if you need to
change the "Type" but not the "Phone Number," press <enter> to skip past the phone number. (See
31
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
“Using the LINE Prompts” for further information.) Press <F3> to see a list of the clinics on file.
This list includes name, city, and state only.
TO VIEW OR CHANGE CLINIC BILLING INFORMATION:
To view or change billing information hit the <F6> key, “Bill#”, from the main clinic screen to go to
the billing information screen, Figure 19.
Figure 19
Billing Information for Clinic
Prompts 1-9 are for "Clinic Numbers Required for Billing" or group billing numbers. If you have
questions about these prompts, hit the <F2> help key while in that prompt for any additional
information that may help you. Prompt #8, “Monthly Interest Rate:”, on this screen is for the
monthly interest rate to be charged for past due balances. This is only for clinics that want to
charge interest. Please notify patients in advance if you plan to do this. This interest will not be
calculated monthly if IMS has not been notified by the clinic to activate the monthly interest posting
program. In addition, no interest will be posted to the family ledger if the interest field is left blank,
the charge item has not be changed to reflect the balance is due from the patient and not the
insurance company, or the date of patient responsibility is not over one month.
BILLING HEADER INFORMATION:
The lower half of the billing information screen contains a multi-valued field for entering up to ten
lines of text for the monthly bill header. This header is placed below the family name and address
and can be left blank, or used to give general notice to ALL families that are billed. This is often
used to notify patients of pending vacations, office hours changes, seasonal greetings, requesting
credit card information, etc.
EDI INFORMATION SCREEN:
The <F10> key is to enter EDI information for this clinic and is generally only used by IMS. You will
not need to go to this screen unless specifically asked to do so by IMS.
32
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
LAB INFORMATION:
The <F11> key is to enter lab information in the "LAB INFORMATION SCREEN", Figure 20.
Figure 20
Lab Information screen.
Prompt #1, “Default Lab:”, is for the default lab. On entering prompt #1 you will be presented with
a pop-up screen to pick the default lab. The available list of labs are listed in the TERMS file under
the key "ADM-LABS". These can be modified by request to IMS. Simply highlight the lab to be the
default lab and hit the <enter> key.
Below this is a multi-valued prompt to give lab information that will be printed out on any lab
requests that are printed and not automated (request not interfaced electronically with a lab). In
adding to the list, you will first be presented with a pop-up from which to select a lab. Next you will
enter the lab's address (where the patient is to go, not the billing address), followed by the lab's
phone number, and, last, any special instruction for patients going to this lab. If the same lab is
entered more than once, delete the incorrect entry. If it is listed more than once, only the
information in the first listing for that lab will be used.
DEFAULT CLINIC SCHEDULE:
The <F7> key, “Sched.”, will take you to the default clinic schedule screen, Figure 21. Here you
have five single value prompts to fill out. By filling these out before you start to make up clinic
schedules, you can save a significant amount of time.
33
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 21
COPYRIGHT 2004
Default Clinic Schedule screen.
Prompt #1, "Prov. Initials for One Dr. Clinics:", is where you will select the initials from a pop-up
of clinic providers. This will be the default doctor the system uses. This can be changed at any
time since it is just a default value.
Prompt #2 through #5, are starting and stopping times for each contiguous block of appointments
for the default clinic schedule. These times should coincide with the block times of the individual
providers. For further information on how to enter the times, hit the <F2> for help at each prompt.
FAMILY FILE MAINTENANCE
From the main menu, go to prompt #15 "Family File". You will be presented with the initial
“FAMILY FILE MAINTENANCE" screen, Figure 22.
Here you are given a number of choices starting with "Inquire about Head of Household". This
choice should always be used before adding a family to check if a family is already in the system. It
is much easier to check before adding a new family each time you think you need to, rather than
have to deal with all the problems that will arise if you enter a family more than once. Please, check
first!
DELETE A FAMILY
If you did not follow the advice given above, and added a family only to find out later this family was
already in the system, you will need to delete one of the entries. Deleting a family is a serious
matter and should not be done without the consultation of the clinic manager. Since the family
ledger and all family charges are attached to the family file, it must be determined which is the best
one to delete. Generally, the one that will need the least amount of work in recharging the correct
family account for charges posted against the bad family account.
34
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 22
COPYRIGHT 2004
Family File Maintenance Menu
To add an additional backup mechanism, we use a very specific way to inactivate or delete a family.
Once the family to be deleted is determined with agreement by the office manager, simply insert the
following term before the family name with no spaces between it and the family name: <xdelete>.
For example, if it was found that there were two John Bonners, you would change one of them from:
BONNER, JOHN J., to: XDELETEBONNER, JOHN J. In this way, we can always find out what was
in the deleted record by looking up the family with this new name. Further, it would be possible to
restore the original record by simply setting the name back to the original.
Then, proceed to move the charges to the correct family, and reverse the charges on the bad
account so that all charge balances are 0 ( zero).
ADDING A NEW FAMILY
Select menu item #3, "Add new Head of Household", Figure 22.
Prompt #1, "Family Number:", the system will default for you the next family number available.
(You can also enter a unique number of your own, but this is not recommended, since the system
will not automatically give you the next number in that sequence.) If you try to enter a number
already in the system, you will be told: "This record is already on file FP-FAMILY. <Return> to
continue.". Accept the new number by hitting the <enter> key.
The screen seen in Figure 23, is where new family data is entered.
Prompt #2, "Responsible party:", enter Responsible party (Head of Household), mother, father, or
legal guardian who has financial responsibility. Start with the Last name followed with a comma.
Then add a space followed by the First name. Then add a space and follow with the Middle name,
or initial, followed by a period. You can also add aliases or a maiden name after this. Only the last
name, the first name, and middle initial will be used in billing. However, all names are available for
cross-reference lookup. This is the name to which all family bills will be sent. This individual should
35
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
have the group insurance policy for the family.
Figure 23
Entering New Family Data
Prompt #3, "GEN:", is for generation. This can be left blank, or you may use one of the terms
allowed by insurance carriers. The terms that are allowed can be selected from the <F2>, help key
pop-up. The help key lists the following choices: I for First generation, II for Second generation, III
for Third generation, IV for Fourth generation, SR for Senior, and JR for Junior.
Prompt #4, "Date of Birth (mmddyy):", enter the date of birth of the Head of Household
(responsible party). Enter in either of the following formats: mmddyy or mm/dd/yy. For dates in a
different century, enter in the MM/DD/YYYY format. e.g. 11231898 or 11/23/1898.
Prompt #5, "Sex (m/f):", enter sex of head of household, either m or f.
Prompt #6, "Address:", enter in form: No. Street, Apt., such as "123 Any Street, Apt. #4".
Prompt #7, "Zip", enter the Zip Code. For a list of Zip Codes, press <enter> on a blank field. The
city and state will be filled in for you automatically once you have entered or selected a zip code. If
the zip code you need does not exist in your current database, you can add it immediately via the
Quick Menu <F4>. From the Quick Menu you can select to go to the Zip Code file maintenance to
enter this information. It will then become immediately available for your use in completing the
address.
The Phone Number multi-value prompt is next. Here you will enter any phone number you want to
store for the family. You will add the Phone Number, Place, Contact Person, and Relationship. The
phone number can be in the form : xxx-xxxx or xxxxxxx. To enter area code, the form can be: xxxxxx-xxxx or xxxxxxxxxx. When you move to the "Place" field, a “?” will be presented as the default.
Since the <?> and the <F2> key mean go to the help screen, by hitting <enter> you will be taken to
36
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
the help screen for valid choices. Just pick one of these choices which fits best. In the "Contact
Person " field, enter the name of the individual to be contacted at this number. In the
"Relationship", again, hit the <enter> key at the “?” to be taken to the help screen to select a valid
choice.
Prompt #12, "Physician:", enter the family physician's initials or hit <enter> to accept the default
physician's initials. The default initials come from the clinic file's default physician for a single
provider clinic. Alternatively, type in the initials of the provider who will be the primary provider for
this family, or type in part of the name of the provider. If more than one provider is found on the
cross-reference lookup, then a pop-up screen will be presented. Arrow up or down to the provider
you want and hit the <enter> key to accept this provider.
Prompt # 13, "Suppress bill printing?", hit the <enter> key to accept the default of <N>o, or enter
<Y>es to suppress bill printing. If suppressed, then a bill will not be prepared for this family (HOH)
when the monthly bills are prepared. This might be appropriate for a contracted family care plan,
such as for an HMO or capitated program, or for a family which you do not want to bill at this time.
Prompt No. 14, "See notes:", hit the <enter> key to accept the default of <N>o, or enter <Y>es to
set the flag to show the "See Notes" message on all provider screens. This alerts the provider that
they should review the family notes prior to seeing this family member. This can be done by hitting
the <F9> as described below.
Figure 24 is an example of previously entered family data.
AUTOMATIC ADD SCREENS and F-KEYS SCREENS
During the add mode the system will automatically take you to the next logical screen for adding
family information. In the change mode, you will get to these screens by using the F keys described
below.
Employment Information: Head of Household, <F7> Screen
This screen, Figure 25, can also be called from the primary Family File Screen by hitting the <F7>
key. Then select the Work Information For: Head of Household.
Prompt # 1, "Social Security Number:", enter the social security number in the form xxx-xx-xxxx or
xxxxxxxxx.
Prompt # 2, “Employment Status:”, an pop-up screen will present you with valid choices to select
from.
Prompt # 3, "Employer:", enter name of employer. If unemployed enter <UNEMPLOYED> in this
field.
Prompt # 4, "Address:", enter employer's address, No., Street, Suite.
Prompt # 5, "Zip:", enter the zip code in the same manner as in prompt #7 of the primary family file
screen above.
Prompt # 6, "Phone:, enter Emp. phone number in form xxx-xxx-xxxx or xxxxxxxxxx, with or without
the area code.
37
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 24
Figure 25
COPYRIGHT 2004
Completed HOH screen.
Work Information screen for HOH.
Employment Information: Spouse of HOH, <F7> Screen
This screen can also be called from the primary Family File Screen by hitting the <F7> key. Then
selecting the Work Information For: Spouse.
38
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
If no information is to be added here, just repeatedly hit the "end" <F1> key to end input and go to
the next prompt. If you have information available to add here, then complete the entry as
described immediately above for Head of Household. There are three additional prompts on this
screen, as seen in Figure 26.
Figure 26
Spouse Work Information screen.
Prompt # 1, "Spouse Name:", enter the Spouse name here in the form: Last, First Middle Maiden
Alias Alias. If widowed (spouse Deceased) indicate by entering <DECEASED> in front of name.
Prompt # 2, "Sex (m/f):", enter sex in the form: M,F or m,f.
Prompt # 3, " Date of Birth:", enter the date of birth of Spouse. Enter in one of the following
formats; mmddyy or mm/dd/yy. For prior centuries, enter the year in the four digit form: yyyy.
FAMILY INSURANCE FILE, <F6> Screen
This screen, Figure 27, can also be called from the primary Family File Screen by hitting the <F6>
key.
This screen is for entering the family insurance information. This insurance applies to one or more
individuals in the family, but is not for individual only insurance's such as Medicare or Medicaid.
These individual insurances must be placed in the Patient File under the insurance screen. The
data entry is the same as described below, with the only difference being that the insurance only
applies to one individual. On selection screens for insurance policies to bill, the individual
insurances will be presented first, followed by the family policies. Generally the individual policy
should be billed first, and then the family policy.
39
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 27
COPYRIGHT 2004
Family Insurance screen.
To add a policy, enter <a> at the Ins. Document change prompt. You will then be placed on a
multi-value "Line", Figure 28, with next defaulted insurance document number that is available. Hit
<enter> to accept this number. This will take you to the insurance document screen, Figure 29
(Insurance Document File -- Add, Screen).
Prompt # 2, "Ins. Type:", here a default of "?" is show. By hitting the <enter> key you can see the
allowable choices. You can also get to this by hitting the <F2> "Help" key for context specific help.
Only HOH or SPO can be used in the family insurance screen since all individual insurance types
must be placed in the patient file. If you select IND, you will be given an error message and then
can select the appropriate entry.
The Figure 30 is an example of previously entered insurance data.
Prompt #3, "Emp. Name:", this prompt is used if this is an insurance for workman's compensation.
Since this is a family insurance that applies to more than one individual, you will not be allowed to
enter anything in this field. This same screen is used in the patient file. In that situation, you would
be able to enter the name of the company the individual works for.
Prompt #4, "Supplemental to the primary insurance?", if this is a supplemental insurance to the
family's primary insurance enter <Y> for Yes. Otherwise, answer <N> for No.
Prompt #5, "Insured ID Number:", enter the Insurance ID number as it appears on the insurance
card. If there is no insurance, then enter <x> ( or None) to indicate no ins.
Prompt #6, "Carrier ID(or Unique xref):”, enter the 5 digit national designation for this company.
If not known, enter at least 3 characters of the Company name for a listing of companies with those
40
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
letters. Enter <none> if without insurance. This will be replaced by 999999. Once this insurance
document is added, you cannot change the Carrier ID Number.
Figure 28
Figure 29
Family Insurance Documents screen
Insurance Document screen
41
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 30
COPYRIGHT 2004
Completed Insurance Document.
Prompt #7, "Payment Source:", if a selected Insurance Carrier already has a Payer Type selected,
the Insurance Document will accept this type and not give the user the option to change it. This is
the preferred method to reduce billing errors. See "INSURANCE CARRIER MAINTENANCE FILE"
below ( Following Figure 60) for details. Otherwise select from the choices given.
If payment type "F" for other is selected, then a screen will pop-up for Prompt #8 "Type code:", the
following table will be presented:
Table Description
MG Medigap Policy
SP Supplemental Policy
IP Individual Policy
PP Personal Payment (Cash - No Insurance)
GP Group Policy
LT Litigation
AP Auto Insurance Policy
LD Long Term Policy
OT Other
MP MEDICARE PRIMARY
12 Working Aged Benefic/Spouse w/Empl Grp Health Plan
13 ESRD Benefic. in 12 Mos. Coor with Emp. Health Plan
14 No Fault Ins. Auto or other
15 Worker's Compensation
16 PHS or Other Federal Agency
41 Black Lung
42 VA
43 Disabled Benefic. under 65 with LGHP
47 Any Liability Insurance
42
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
All the above NUMBER codes are ONLY to be used when Medicare is the Secondary payer and
the Source of Pay code is "C" for Medicare.
Prompts #9 through #12 are optional, and are to be added if this information is available on the
patient's insurance card.
Prompt #9, "Claim Office Number:", enter the claim office number to identify the specific payor
location responsible for processing this claim. The number should be on the patients insurance
card. For MEDICAID use NONE if there is no claim office # for your state. For MEDICARE, use
NONE.
For Champus use the appropriate code for the region below:
SER - Southeast region.
MAR - Mid-Atlantic Region.
WTR - Western Region.
NTR - Northern Region.
SCR - South Central Region.
CRI - California Project
CMN - Catchment Area Management Pro. Navy, SC
CMF - Catchment Area Management Pro. Air Force, TX
Prompt #10, "Other Classifying No.:", an optional entry.
Prompt #11, "Group Number:", if there is a Group/Plan #, enter it here. Otherwise skip.
(Skip by hitting the <enter> key while line is blank).
Prompt #12, "Group Name:", enter Group/Plan name here. If their is no entry for this field, just hit
<enter> with a blank line to skip this field.
Prompt #13, "PPO/HMO Agreement Code:", either accept the default of "N", or choose one of the
following:
Table Description
Y Process claim under PPO/HMO agreement.
I Process claim under CHAMPUS Internal agreement.
E Process claim under CHAMPUS External agreement.
N Claim is Not a PPO or HMO claim.
C Process claim under CHAMPUS "CAM Charleston" agreement.
G Process claim under CHAMPUS Army CAM Demonstration.
H Process claim under CHAMPUS Navy CAM Demonstration.
J Process claim under CHAMPUS Air Force CAM Demonstration.
O Process claim under CHAMPUS MCSP PPO Agreement.
P Process claim under CHAPMUS MCSP Prime agreement.
T Process claim under CHAMPUS TRICARE MCSP Extra agreement.
U Process claim under CHAMPUS TRICARE MCSP HMO agreement.
X Process claim under CHAMPUS Cooperative Care Claim.
Prompt #14, "PPO/HMO ID:", if prompt #13 is indicated as "Y", then you enter the PPO/HMO
Organization number here. (Not the patient insurance # or patient #.)
Prompt #15, "Assignment of Benefits?", (this is a required field) answer <Y> Yes to this prompt if
you will accept assignment of benefits
43
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Prompt #16, "Order to Bill:", choose one of the following from the help screen:
Table Description
1 Bill this company first.
2 Bill this company second.
3 Bill this company third.
0 Order of billing varies.
W Work Comp. billing.
C Cancelled policy.
The next two fields, "Percent of bill paid by Patient:" and "Deductible:" are automatically filled in
from the insurance carrier file.
Prompt #19, "Is the Patient Signature on File?", (or guardians signature) on file for this insurance
policy. Answer yes or no (<y> or <n>). You MUST keep a hard copy of this signature in the patient
file for EACH policy (or have a image of it in the patient's image file). Each insurance must have its
own release form. This is very important for Medicare, Medigap, Medicaid, etc. Be sure the
document on file indicates that the patient or guardian (indicate relationship) authorizes release of
medical information necessary to process claim. It also should authorize payment to physician
when physician accepts assignment. This signature usually would go in item 12 on the HCFA-1500
for Medicare and other commercial insurance, and in item 13 for Medigap (or both if both apply).
Prompt #20, "Date Signed:", should be the date the form was signed, or the last date it was revised
or extended. Enter in the format: mmddyy or mm/dd/yy.
Prompt #21, "Start Date:", enter the date the insurance coverage started. If unsure, but you know it
is valid for the current period, then enter an approximate date based on the information given to
you. You can go back and change this later once you have the correct information.
Prompt #22, "Cancel Date:", enter the date the insurance policy was canceled (i.e. the last day the
policy was in effect). You will not be able to do primary billing of office visits with the cancelled
insurance that occur after this date. You will be able to bill secondary bills after this date, however,
the date of service should be before this date or you will get a rejection.
FAMILY INSURANCE FILE Screen F Keys
The <F6> key will take you to the family insurance notes section, Figure 31. In this multi-value
prompt, you may add any notes that you need regarding the carrier and family.
The <F7> key will take you to the prior authorization (PrAuth.) screen, Figure 32.
This screen should NOT be used for a family insurance since prior authorizations are always for a
specific individual. If you decide to use this anyway, be careful that the prior authorization is
specific enough that it could only be for one individual in the family, for example, a vasectomy on an
adult male. Otherwise, it would be safer to place this insurance in the individual file, where the prior
authorization will be specific to that individual.
The multi-valued prompts on this screen contain all prior authorizations by this carrier. When
adding, enter the procedure number or part of the procedure description for a cross-reference
lookup. Do Not use 6 digit procedure codes that were added by your clinic to indicate special
charging for the standard 5 digit codes. The system will only use the first 5 digits for prior
44
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
authorizations.
Figure 31
Figure 32
Insurance Documents Notes screen
Prior Authorization screen
The <F11> key, "RespIns". Use the <F11> key to go to the Responsible Party screen, Figure 33, if
the person who is responsible for this insurance is not the HOH.
45
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 33
COPYRIGHT 2004
Responsible Party screen
On this screen, if the other responsible is "SPO" (spouse), then enter this in prompt #1 and exit the
screen by using the <F1> key. If it is HOH, do not use this screen since this is assumed. If
however, this is another individual or agency, then select the appropriate relationship from the popup table, and then enter the remaining information. Be aware, that once anything is placed in the
"Last Name" field, the information on this screen will be used with this insurance document
regardless if it is complete or not.
An example of this type of insurance is generally in the individual file of a child, in which the child's
natural parent has an insurance policy on the child. The child however is living with one natural
parent and a step-parent, or the current HOH.
GENERAL FAMILY NOTES AND PAYMENT INFORMATION <F9> KEY (Notes/Pay Info)
This screen ( Figure 34) is called from the primary Family File Screen by hitting the <F9> key.
The top half of the screen is for general family notes. This could be additional contact information
or other general family information. Notes regarding specific services rendered should go in the
Notes section of the Family Ledger in the Transaction file of the specific transaction. The Message
area of the Family ledger is where you should keep notes of what you have told the HOH about
payment of the charges. These messages can also be printed on the monthly statements from that
screen by setting the dates to print.
The bottom half of the screen is for messages that you want to pop-up automatically at the time of
sign-in and billing.
PRINT FAMILY FILE
From the family menu ( Figure 22) select menu item #4, “Print Family File”, to print Family file
sorted by Family name. The selection screen shown in Figure 35 will be presented.
46
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 34
Figure 35
COPYRIGHT 2004
Family Notes and Payment Information screen.
Family Print Selection screen.
Prompt #1, “Start printing with:”, accept the default of “ALL” by hitting the <enter> key, or enter
the first letter of the family names you want to start with. You can also start with a specific family
name if you wish. Please review “A WORD ON SELECTION RANGES” in the beginning of this
manual to understand how selections work. For example, if you just wanted to get the Bonner family,
you would enter “BONNER” in prompt #1, and BONNERz in prompt #2.
Prompt#2, “End printing with:”, accept the default of “LAST”, or the ending letter or name as
indicated above. An example of the output, with only 4 families in the system, is shown in Figure 36.
MAILING LABELS for FAMILY FILE
From the family menu ( Figure 22) select menu item #5, “Mailing Labels”, to print Family mailing
labels. The selection screen and logic is the same as in “PRINT FAMILY FILE” above. An example of
the output, with only 4 families in the system, is as shown in Figure 37.
47
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 36
Figure 37
COPYRIGHT 2004
Example of Family File Printout.
Example of Mailing Label Printout.
PATIENT FILE MAINTENANCE
From the main menu (FP000000) select the " Patient File", prompt #16. You will be presented
with the initial " PATIENT FILE MAINTENANCE" screen, as seen in Figure 38. Here you are given
a number of choices starting with "Inquire about Patient". This choice should always be used
before adding a patient to check to see if a patient is already in the system.
In the Inquire mode: Enter a patient number or at least three letters of the last name and optionally
two or more letters of other names separated by a space. Also, you can look up a patient by SSN,
enter it without any "-" (hyphens) between the three number sets ( i.e. 123456789 not 123-456789).
It is much easier to check before adding a new patient, rather than have to deal with all the
problems that will arise if you enter a patient more than once. Please, check first!
DELETE A PATIENT
If you did not follow the advice given above, and end up with two or more entries for the same
patient, then follow the procedure similar to that described under the heading “DELETE A FAMILY”
48
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
in the family file maintenance screen. However, in this case, instead of transferring charges, you
must transfer clinical information. Clinical information can only be changed by someone who is
designated as a provider.
Figure 38
Patient Maintenance screen.
ADDING A NEW PATIENT
Select menu item #3, "Add a new Patient ", Figure 39.
Prompt #1, "Patient Number:", the system will default for you the next patient number available.
(You can also enter a unique number of your own, but this is not recommended, since the system
will not automatically give you the next number in that sequence.) If you try to enter a number
already in the system, you will be told: "This record is already on file FP-PATIENT. <Return> to
continue.". Accept the new number by hitting the <enter> key, and proceed as indicated below.
Prompt #4, "Family number(or Xref):", is the next prompt to be filled in and not prompt #2. The
reason for this is to be able to copy information about an individual who is the HOH from the family
file. This reduces typing as well as errors in copying that information. Therefore, the only
information that you will be putting in the patient file is unique to that file. You are not doing any
additional work. You now have two options:
1) enter the family number, or
2) enter a partial family name for a cross-reference list from which to choose.
Prompt #5, "Is Patient also Head of Household?" is the next prompt that you are presented with.
Answer with <y> or <n>. If <y> was entered, then the information from the family file for the HOH
will be copied into the remaining prompts from 2 through 9. If any of this information needs to be
changed in the future for the HOH, it must be changed in the family file, and then the prompts of the
individual file refreshed by going back into the patient record. If <n> is entered, then you will be
taken through remaining prompts discussed below.
49
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 39
COPYRIGHT 2004
Patient Add screen.
Prompt #2, "Patient Name:", enter the patient name. Start with the Last name followed by a
comma. Then add a space followed by the First name. Then add a space followed by the Middle
name or initial followed by a period. Finally, add other names in the space allowed you think may
be useful in looking up the patient, such as the maiden name or alias.
Prompt #3, "Gen:", is for generation. This can be left blank, or you may use one of the descriptions
allowed by insurance carriers which are presented to you in the help key: I for First generation, II
for Second generation, III for Third generation, IV for Fourth generation, SR for Senior, and JR for
Junior.
Prompt #6, "Relation to Head of Household:", select a relationship type from the pop-up screen
presented. These are defined by the insurance industry.
Prompt #7, "Date of Birth (mmddyy):", enter the date of birth. Enter in either of the following
formats: mmddyy or mm/dd/yy. For dates in a different century, enter in the MM/DD/YYYY format,
e.g. 11231898 or 11/23/1898.
Prompt #8, "Sex (m/f):", enter sex of the patient, either m or f.
Prompt #9, "Social Security Number:", enter in the from 123456789 or 123-45-6789.
Prompt #10, "Activity Status:", choose one of the following:
Table Description
A Active
I Inactive
D Deceased
50
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
R Reference(not a regular pt., incl. for genetic history only)
Prompt #11, "Date of Death:", will only be able to be entered if "Activity Status:" is indicated as
"D" for Deceased.
Prompt #12, "Date first seen in practice:", you have two options: 1) leave it blank ( the
SmartDoctor® system will then put the date of the visit when the patient first signs in). 2) enter the
date of the patient's first visit. This is important for billing. If the patient is a previously seen patient,
put in the date first seen in the practice. If you are unsure of that date, be sure to put in a date
before today's date if you want to consider this patient an established patient for billing purposes. If
the date is left blank, and the provider sees the patient, the system will then assume that this is a
new patient and indicate a higher charge (new patient charge) for this first visit.
It is not necessary to put in the year in the date field if you want to use the current year. For
example, if you enter 0101, the system will convert this to 01/01/2004.
Prompt #13, "Community Code:", this field can be used to indicate the patient's home community
for those insurers who require this information. For the Indian Health Service, the first 3 digits are
for the Community, the next 2 digits are for the County, and the last 2 digits are for the state.
Prompts #14 through #17, Type of Residence, Marital Status, Student Status, and Employment
Status are all pop-up selections. Pick the appropriate selection for this patient. These selections
have generally been set by the insurance industry, however their order can be changed in the
TERMS file under the appropriate key. This is generally done by the system administrator.
See the completed patient Add screen in Figure 40.
AUTOMATIC ADD SCREENS and F-KEY SCREENS
During the add mode the system will automatically take you to the next logical screen for adding
patient information. In the change mode, you will get to these screens by using the F keys
described below.
PATIENT INSURANCE FILE, <F6> Screen
This is the first automatic screen and is similar to the insurance screen in the Family File. The one
exception is that only "IND" ( individual) can be selected for the insurance type. Insurances placed
here should only be for this patient. Insurances for more than one individual should go in the Family
File (HOH). For more information on completing the insurance document see " FAMILY
INSURANCE FILE, <F6> Screen" , in the family file maintenance section.
FAMILY TREE, <F7> Screen
This screen is for entering blood relatives of this patient for purposes of genetic counseling. The
data entered here is optional. This screen, shown in Figure 41, is used to enter the family blood
relatives which may be patients from more than one family file, but are in the system.
PRINT PATIENT FILE
The printing pf the Patient file is identical in the selection method to family file printing above. There
are 4 options here ( Figure 38):
#4. Print Patient File
#5. Print Pt. by Fam.
#6. Mailing Labels by Pat.
51
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
#7 Mailing Labels by Fam.
The sample output of each of these is presented in Figures 42 through 45.
Figure 40
Completed Patient Add screen.
Figure 41
Blood Relative Linkage screen
52
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 42
Patient File Printout.
Figure 43
Patient file Printout by Family
Figure 44
Mailing Labels by Patient
53
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 45
COPYRIGHT 2004
Mailing Labels by Family, Printout.
APPOINTMENT SCHEDULING MENU
From the main menu (FP000000) select the "Appointments", prompt #17. The Appointment
Scheduling Menu, as seen in Figure 46, will then be presented.
Figure 46
Appointment Scheduling Menu.
54
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
SCHEDULING CONCEPTS
Before getting started with describing how to go about setting up the schedule you want, we should
first look at modern concepts of appointment scheduling. The information presented here comes
from papers and lectures of L. Gordon Moore, M.D., who has been a leader in the Idealized Design
of Clinical Office Practice initiative, which is sponsored by the Institute for Healthcare Improvement.
There are two main concepts two scheduling that will enable an office to run more efficiently and
with less stress: 1. Open Assess Scheduling, and 2. Real-time scheduling. These concepts are
summarized as follows:
a. Set limits on accepting new patients. In a typical practice, there should be 60% of the
appointments open in the upcoming 30 days.
b. In any given day, 0.75% of your active patients can be expected to call for an appointment that
day. So in a practice with 2,000 active patients, you can expect to get calls for 15 appointments for
that day (2,000 x 0.0075). Therefore, leave 15 open appointment slots. This is just an estimate,
you can come up with better number by logging the number of patients that call each day of the
week for an appointment that day. Then set the average number as the number of open slots that
can not be booked before that day of the week. Mondays, Friday afternoons, and days after
holidays generally have the highest requests for same day appointments.
c. Set up the schedule based on actual times for patient care, including phone calls, chart
completion, correspondence required for patients, and prescription refills. To do this, review a week
of patient visits. Get the actual arrival and departure time of the care provider (doctors, nurse
practitioner, physician assistant, etc.), for each clinic day. Subtract hours spent for lunch and
scheduled meetings. What you want to derive is the actual amount of time required to see the
average patient, including time spent on other practice needs at the same time.
An example would be a doctor that arrives at 9 am, leaves for lunch at noon, returns at 1:30 pm,
and actually leaves the clinic at 6:30 pm. During this time, the doctor sees an average of 20
patients. Since the total time in clinic is 8 hours, and the number of patients seen is 20, the average
time needed to see a patient is 24 minutes. Therefore you should be booking patients at an
average of 24 minutes. Then schedule the doctor till 6 pm, and you should be done at that time.
This means, however, that you should book at least one to two patients less per day. If the doctor
really wants to stop at 5 pm, then you can only schedule 16 patients that day.
In using the SmartDoctor® system, this could be done using a blocking factor for slots of 10
minutes each. Then scheduling 3 slots ( 30 minutes) for new problems, 2 slots ( 20 minutes) for
minor or recurring problems, and 1 slot ( 10 minutes) for a wound check or suture removal. An
alternative to this is to set all appointments to 25 minutes each. The patient flow will average out as
the day goes on.
The amount of time spent on juggling the schedule, asking nurses and doctors about fitting patients
in, and time spent on the phone can be reduce by about a factor of 9.
Too many practices cause problems and become inefficient because of anxiety over not seeing
enough patients. They keep on accepting new patients to fill any empty slots. This results in
having to try to work in established patients on a recurring basis. Established patients find they
cannot get an appointment for 2 to 3 weeks or more, and rarely can be seen as soon as they want.
Once they find another clinic with more availability to see them, they will leave your practice, no
matter how good you think you are. You are left with is seeing a higher percentage of new patients.
This is inefficient from several standpoints. First, it is much easier and faster to see an established
55
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
patients than a new one. There is much paper work involved for your office to set up this new
patient. You do not know if they are good at paying bills and keeping appointments. You have to
learn how to bill their insurance carriers. You need to get their past records and enter this
information into your records. A well established practice may only see a couple of new patients
per week. If your doctors occasionally have 15 minutes without a patient, they can catch up on
other things that should be done before the end of the day, and leave on time.
TEMPORARY PROVIDER SCHEDULE
First you must set up a temporary schedule. This should be reviewed by the provider before you
actually create the schedule.
You will need to set up a schedule of hours for each provider for each day. It is recommended that
you schedule two months in advance because some appointments are made at least that far
ahead. You will not be able to make an appointment for a patient on a day the provider hasn't been
scheduled to see patients. Since most providers seldom change their time slots or standard office
hours, setting up this schedule is generally more repetitious than time consuming.
A default clinic schedule as well as a default doctor can be set in the clinic file as discussed under
"Clinic File". If the default doctor is correct, just accept this. Alternatively, you can type in the
initials or part of the name of the provider for whom you want to make a schedule. Next, hit the
<enter> key to accept the default clinic times, or over type with time times you want. Use the <F2>
key to help you define any hours that are different than these. You need to be aware of the
provider's block-time, because this must agree with the hours you enter. If you need to retype a
line (before you enter it), press the up arrow. If you do not want to add any more time blocks, press
<F1>. Check for accuracy and make any changes necessary using the prompts at the bottom of
the screen. Then hit the <F1> key to go to a new screen or back to the Appointment Scheduling
Menu. If you do not want to make a clinic schedule for the defaulted date, hit the <F8> key to exit
with no save, instead of the <F1> (end/exit) key. If you do the latter, it will be saved "as is", even
with blank appointment times. An example of a completed appointment schedule is seen in Figure
47.
PRINT PROVIDER SCHEDULE
Next, you should print the provider schedule which incorporates the provider's hours previously
assigned. This schedule is tentative and must be approved by the appropriate provider. After you
get it approved, you may record it into the system or "create" the schedule. To print the "tentative"
provider schedule, select #2. On the selection screen, identify the provider, or enter "all" if there are
other provider's schedules that you want to see or that need to be approved. Indicate the dates of
the schedules to be printed, i.e. "start" date and "ending" date. You may want to print this schedule
to the screen before printing to the printer, or you may select "B" for both. You will need a hard
copy for the provider to approve.
CREATE SCHEDULE
You must "create" the schedule by answering the prompts given in the Create Schedule screen.
This will record the schedule into the system and create the actual "appointment book" for making
appointments. There are only three prompts in this screen. You should (1)identify the provider or
accept "All", (2) enter the start date, i.e. the first date that you have scheduled for the provider or
providers (or use the default if it is today's date), and (3) enter the ending date by accepting the
default. If you haven't yet received approval for all the temporary provider schedules, you may
enter the date of the "latest dated" approved schedules. You will be returned to the Appointments
menu automatically.
56
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 47
Provider Schedule screen.
PRINT SCHEDULE
The final schedule or work load summary should be of help in planning the staffing of nurses and
other clinic personnel. This schedule is broken down by date to show the clinic load each day, i.e.
the number and % of slots already booked for the doctors in clinic on the days scheduled. To print
this schedule, select #4 and answer the next three prompts on the Summary Appointment Schedule
screen. Select a printing option or enter the default (S) for printing to the screen. If you print it on
the screen, since there is only one day listed to a screen, you will need to page down or hit the
<enter> key for each succeeding day to see the entire schedule. (You may view the schedule again
by entering "Y" at the "Reprocess Summary Schedule" prompt). When you print it to the printer, the
entire summary will be condensed into one document.
REVIEW APPOINTMENT SCHEDULE
Selection #5 “Review Appointment Schedule” presents appointment information in a format which
is valuable when arranging patient appointments. It lists each provider followed by the days he will
be seeing patients, the number of slots already booked for appointments and the number of slots
still available. This is similar to "Print Appointment Schedule", but cannot be printed.
Selection #6 “See Clinic Appts (Over-Book & Cancel clinic)”. This menu is broken down into
three mini menus ( see Figure 48): 1) The first mini-menu item is designed to view or inquire about
appointment booking, 2) the second is to add special message at the top of the appointment
schedule, add overbook slots, or add or change room numbers, and 3) the third is to delete
appointment booking (cancel clinic). The screens look the same, see Figure 49, however the mode
changes from “Inquire” in the “See Bookings” selection to ”Change” in the "Add Rm#, Over-Book
Slot or Message" selection, and finally to “Delete” in the “Cancel Clinic” selection.
Selection #1 "See Bookings," to get information about a provider's bookings ( patient
schedule) for the day you designate. Enter the date and identify the provider on the Appointment
Booking Inquire screen to see the appointment list. See Figure 49.
57
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection #2 "Add Rm#, Over-Book Slot or Message", to add/change room numbers, add
an over-book slot, or add a header message to the appointment schedule.
On the Appointment Booking Change screen, enter the date of the clinic schedule that you want to
change, and identify the provider.
To add or change the "Special Message:" header, go to prompt #3. See Figure 50.
To add or change the room number in the multi-valued prompt on the lower half of the screen, go
into the change mode for the line number you want to change. See Figure 51.
SEE CLINIC APPOINTMENTS (OVERBOOK, CANCEL)
Figure 48
Appointment Booking Menu screen.
To insert an "over-book" slot, go to "Time Slot" prompts at the bottom of the screen and select "I" to
insert. Indicate the line number before which you wish to add the new appointment and enter the
new time. You may not enter any of the times already booked, but only the times in between. If
you are working in a patient between 9:00 and 9:15 you may assign any time between 9.00 and
9.15, such as 9.01, 9.02, ... 9.14, etc. Once you have added the appointment to the provider's
record, you may add it to the patient's appointment record. A new slot will be available. See Figure
51.
Selection #3 "Cancel Clinic" only after you have cancelled the patients. To cancel a clinic
on a particular date, you will first need to cancel each patient's individual appointment on that day.
Select #1 Booking to see the Appointment Booking Inquire screen. Enter the date of the clinic to be
cancelled and identify the provider. Note the number of patients scheduled. To cancel an
appointment for one of these patients you must go to the Booking Appointments Add screen. To do
58
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 49
Figure 50
COPYRIGHT 2004
Appointment Booking screen.
Change Appointment schedule Display Message.
59
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 51
COPYRIGHT 2004
Change Appointment Schedule Room Number.
this, press Ctrl W (or <F4>) to get a Quick menu, and select #2 "Book patient appts(Add,ch,can)".
Identify the patient, skip the "Check Family File?" prompt ( enter <n>), and enter the cancellation
on a new line. Be sure you have the right Line # entered in the cancel column. You will get a popup to confirm that you are cancelling the correct appointment. Hit the <enter> key to accept the
default of yes, if this is correct, or enter <n> if this is incorrect. Then, <F1> back to the Appointment
Booking Inquire screen to select another patient (unless you have a photographic memory), and
repeat the procedure. When the last patient is cancelled, you may select #3 to cancel the Clinic.
Enter the password to get into the Appointment Booking Delete screen. Enter the date and provider
information, and answer the prompt confirming that this is indeed the right record to delete.
The last prompt on the prior menu screen #7, "Book patient appts (Add, Change, Cancel)", is the
same as the first menu item on the main office screen "Book Patient Appointments." The
description of which follows.
BOOK PATIENT APPOINTMENTS
From the main office menu select prompt #1 "Book Patient Appointments". This will take you to
the "Booking Appointments" screen. This screen can also be reached while working in other areas
by hitting the <F4> key for Quick Menu. On the Quick Menu screen this is choice #2 --”Book patient
appts(Add,ch,can)”.
In prompt #1, on the "Booking Appointments" screen ( see Figure 52), enter at least three letters
of the last name and optionally two letters or more of other names separated by a space. You can
also find a patient by entering the patient number or Social Security Number (SSN) without dashes.
If you enter a name that is not on file, you will receive a message "not found in cross-reference."
If this is a new patient, you will need to add the patient to the Patient File (#16 on the Main Menu)
before you can make an appointment. The first appointment on the Patient Appointment Record
60
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
will be entered at LINE 1 of the multi-valued field. All subsequent appointments, cancellations and
referrals will be listed on succeeding lines as they are made.
You will first be asked if you want to review the family file information. Answering <y> or hitting
<enter> will result in you going to the Family file in the "Inquire" mode. If you want to bypass this
since you have already reviewed this, enter <n>.
The next prompt (Prompt #2), in the Booking Appointments screen is for daytime phone numbers.
Either enter the number, or hit <enter> to go by this prompt (on existing patients you will be dropped
to the change prompt area). This number will NOT be added to the family file. That file should be
used for all other phone numbers.
Figure 52
Booking a Patient Appointment.
After you pass prompt #2, you will be at the multi-valued prompt for adding an appointment. If you
are in the Add mode, just start entering the appointment. In the change mode, to add an
appointment to the Appointment Record, type <A> (for Add), and a new number will appear on the
left margin followed by the initials of the patient's Provider (doctor). If you need to schedule a
different provider to see the patient, enter his/her initials (or part of name) instead of the defaulted
Family file doctor.
In the "Sym/Reas (Cancel)" field, enter the reason for the appointment. The reason for the
appointment which will most often be the symptom for which the patient is seeing the doctor ( you
should be able to select a symptom from the symptom list which coincides best with the patient's
complaint, i.e. cold, allergy, headache, etc.). You only need to type part of the symptom or reason
since this field is cross-referenced with the Symptoms File, which contains all the terms your clinic
wishes to use ( and can be changed by your clinic).
However, if the patient was referred to the clinic by another doctor, you need only type <Ref> or
61
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
<Referral> as the reason for the visit. A "pop-up" screen will then request the Diagnosis code and
the Name of the referring doctor. The F1 key will return you to the Patient Appointment Record
after you have entered this information.
The “Can. #” field. Cancellations of appointments are recorded in the Patient Appointment Record
in the same manner as the appointments. Type "A" (for add), press <Enter>, and then type
<Cancel> in the Symp/Reas(Cancel) field. To identify the appointment that was cancelled, type in
the line number(#) of the appointment to be cancelled. A prompt will then ask you to indicate
whether the patient cancelled or if it was a clinic cancellation. Highlight your choice and press
<Enter>. To be sure you are not making a mistake, the system will prompt you to verify that you
want this appointment cancelled for this patient. Just hit the <enter> key (or <return> key) to
indicate yes, or enter y. To void this cancellation enter <n> for no.
The "R" field is for " Requested appt type". Hit the help key <F2> for a list of possible terms, "R" will
be defaulted for routine. A regular appointment is recorded as an “R”, automatically, after you type
in the reason for the appointment. However, you may change this to fit the circumstances. Insert
an <M> (mandatory) if the doctor considers it mandatory that the appointment be kept. Insert an
<N> (for no problem) if the reason for the appt. is a school physical, etc. And a <C> (for cancelled)
will automatically appear whenever you enter a cancellation in the "Sym/Reason(Cancel)" field.
The “S” field is for Appointment Status. After you enter the reason for the appointment, this will be
set to a "P" to indicate the patient visit is pending. The system changes this field automatically.
See Figure 53.
Figure 53
An Appointment Line in the Patient Appointment Schedule.
The "L" field is where you specify how to look for a provider's appointments. Enter <Y> (the default)
to choose a date from the providers entire schedule. If you only want to look at the providers
schedule for the current day, enter <N> for “now”. Or you can enter <S> to select from a list of all
62
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
providers' schedules ( if you pick a different providers schedule, the "Prov" field will change to that
provider upon a screen refresh). The default is set to <Y>. Press <Enter> to accept the <Y> (yes)
prompt if you want to see how many slots have already been booked on this provider's schedule
( see Figure 54). Then, highlight the date for the appointment and hit <Enter>.
In the “Appt” field, an "Appointment Types" pop-up screen (see Figure 55) will list the types of
appointments available. Highlight the type of appointment the patient requires and press <Enter>.
If you pick an appointment type of the wrong sex, you will get a warning message to that effect and
will be forced to pick an appropriate appointment type for the patient's sex.
Next, the appointment schedule for that day opens and you select time slot, as seen in Figure 56.
At this point, you have the last opportunity to up-arrow, back through the prompts on this line before
you select the appointment time, completing the appointment. If you up-arrow all the way back to
the first field on this line and hit the <F1> key, it will cancel this line. Then you may then start again
or quit.
Figure 54
Select Date for Appointment.
The appointment type you designated and the number of slots required for the visit will be recorded
on the appointment record. You may now enter another appointment or hit the <F1> key to end
adding appointments for this patient. The completed appointment screen is seen in Figure 57.
You may get a warning that this appointment may need a prior authorization. This is a result of the
system looking at the reason for the appointment in the Symptom file and finding it is flagged for
possible prior authorization request. If this is flagged, then the system checks to see if any
insurances the patient has have prior authorizations indicated. If both conditions are true, then a
flashing message is displayed: " Please check for need of Prior Authorization ". As you then
move to the next field you will get a pop-up window asking, " Should this appointment be placed
in the file indicating that Prior Authorization is required?" If you want to be reminded to get this
63
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
prior authorization before the appointment, answer yes. You can check to see if this was already
Figure 55
Select Appointment Type
Figure 56
Select Appointment Time.
obtained for this patient by hitting the <F7> key which will take you the patient prior authorization
screen, where all prior authorizations are listed. The example shown in Figure 58 is for a different
64
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
patient.
Appointment security screen, F12.
The system employs several different methods to track when and who made significant additions or
modifications to the system data. In the case of the appointment screen, you can find out who
added each line in the appointment record multi-valued prompt by hitting the “hidden” F12 key for
security auditing. This will open up the “SECURITY SCREEN” ( as seen in Figure 60), after
prompting for a security password. Figure 59 is an example of a longer appointment list for John
Bonner. Figure 60 shows the security screen presented after hitting the hidden F12 key and giving
the security password.
Figure 57
Completed Appointment Screen.
INSURANCE CARRIER MAINTENANCE FILE
This is an important file that keeps all insurance company information. From the main front office
menu select menu item #22, Insurance Carrier File. You will be taken to a sub-menu from which
you can choose to: 1) “Add or Change” or 2) “Print File”. On selecting #1, the "Carrier
Maintenance File" will open, as seen in Figure 61. Enter at least 3 characters of the name of the
carrier you want. If it is not the only one with those characters, a list to choose from will pop-up.
Pick the carrier you want to review or change information for. In the example seen in Figure 61,
"blu" was entered, and the carrier comes up.
You can make additions or corrections to each insurance company record to keep it up to date.
That is, except for the ID #. All the insurance companies have an ID # of their own which is
permanent and cannot be changed.
If you are adding an insurance company, you may have to call the company to get the number if
you are not using the Texas Health information Network (THIN). Once added, you can look up that
carrier again by entering the first few letters of the company's name. You can download the current
65
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
THIN Participating Professional Payer List at http://www.thinedi.com/pdf/prof_payer.pdf, which is
Figure 58
Figure 59
A Patient's Prior Authorization screen.
List of Appointments Made.
66
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 60
Figure 61
COPYRIGHT 2004
Security Screen for Appointments.
Insurance Carrier screen.
updated frequently. You can also call your THIN representative to ask about a carrier's number or
request that a carrier be added. If you add a carrier number that is not on the list, then please place
a <+> sign in front of the alphanumeric value you add. This will prevent any confusion with existing
carriers or numbers to be added by THIN.
If adding a new carrier to the file, enter the carriers national number (as discussed above) and press
<enter>. If this number is not listed in the cross-reference file, you should press <enter> again to
continue on.
Prompt #2, "Carrier Name:”, Enter the name of the carrier. For example; TRAVELERS,
67
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
BLUE CROSS, or BLUE CROSS/BLUE SHEILD OF TEXAS, etc.
Prompt #3, “Unique ID:”, add a unique ID term here to help you look up this specific carrier's
information in the future. This is extremely useful when there is more than one type of policy
offered by a specific carrier. An example of this are carriers that offer cafeteria plans. The carrier's
primary national ID number is the same, but the coverage can vary significantly in regard to:
Percent Paid by Patient, Deductible for Year, Basic Co-Pay per Visit, Maximum Pay per Visit, CPTs
Excluded from Discount, and Other Payment restrictions. To distinguish between these different
version of policies by the same company, simply add another record to the carrier file with the same
carrier id number, but with an additional single character appended. Now, by typing in the unique
ID, you will be able to locate the specific type of policy that company offers quickly.
Prompt #4, “Address-1:”, enter the first line of the carrier's address.
Prompt #5, “Address-2:”, enter the second line of the carrier's address if needed. If the second line
not needed, leave it blank.
Prompt #6, “ZIP Code:”, enter ZIP code. If not known, just press enter for a selection list. The city
and state will be filled in automatically from data entered in the zip code file previously.
Prompt #7, “Phone #:”, enter the phone number with or without dashes, and with or without area
code.
Prompt #8, “Bill Elect.:”, indicate <y> if this insurance is to be billed electronically. You will then be
asked to select the proper Receiver Type, as seen in Figure 62.
Figure 62
Specifying Receiver Type.
Or, indicate <n> if this is to be billed with the HCFA-1500 paper claim form.
68
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Prompt #10, “Formulary:”, Select one formulary term from the pop-up, or enter a space to delete
the term. See Figure 63.
Figure 63
Select Formulary Carrier Requires.
Prompt #11, “Payer Type:”, is an automatic pop-up screen from which you must select a payer
type. The payer types have been specifically set up for your system/location, as seen in Figure 64.
The Payer Type selected should be the type recognized by the claim receiver for billing to the
selected Insurance Carrier Number (prompt 1). Clinics should try to input the correct Payer Type for
every Insurance Carrier to ensure proper electronic billing. If the Insurance carrier selected for an
insurance document already has a Payer Type set, the Insurance Document will accept this type
and not give the user the option to change it.
Prompt #12, “Lab:”, will give you an automatic pop-up screen, as seen in Figure 65, from which you
can select a lab used by the carrier if the carrier requires you to use a specific lab. If no lab is
required by the carrier, then hit the <F1> key to leave this field blank.
Prompt # 13, “Opt. LabCorp Code:”, if “LABCORP” is selected in the preceding prompt, then a
specific pop-up screen will be seen based on the name of this carrier as seen in Figure 66. In this
case all the LabCorp carriers with the first three characters of the insurance carrier name “blu” will
be presented.
For non- “LABCORP” labs, this field can be left blank or filled in as needed.
“LINE NOTES ON CARRIER PROMPT”, enter any carrier specific notes you need here.
F-KEY SCREENS
69
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
BILLING #'S <F6> SCREEN
Specific billing information for this carrier should be entered on the Carrier Specific Billing
Information screen as needed, as seen in Figure 67.
Figure 64
Figure 65
Select Payer Type.
Selecting Lab Required by Carrier.
70
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 66
Figure 67
COPYRIGHT 2004
LabCorp Carrier Code screen.
Carrier Specific Billing Information.
Prompt #1, “Provider Signature on File Y/N:”, is the provider signature on file for this specific
71
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
carrier? You must answer (Y)es or (N)o.
Prompts 2, 3, and 4, can only be modified by the EDI administrator.
Prompts #5-12, are to be used to override the standard paper print defaults required by this specific
carrier. In the pop-up boxes described below, just hit <F1> if you do not wish any of the choices
presented and the field will be left blank. The data normally output in that field on the HCFA-1500
form will not be changed.
Prompt #5, “HCFA-1500 Field 23:”, the pop-up for field #23 can be replaced with one of the
provider numbers, as seen in Figure 68. Provider number types are found in the “ADM-PROVNUM” record in the TERMS file. This record can only be modified by IMS personnel to prevent
billing errors.
Figure 68
Provider Numbers Selection screen.
If you make this change, be sure the the corresponding provider number type is listed in each
provider's file for whom you will be billing to this carrier.
Prompt #6, “HCFA-1500 Field 24K:”, is similar to prompt #5, with the exception that this information
will be placed on each line of 24K.
Prompt #7, “HCFA-1500 Field 31:”, is similar to prompt #5, with the exception that this information
will be placed in box 31.
Prompt #8, “HCFA-1500 PIN# F'ld 33a:”, is similar to prompt #5, with the exception that this
information will be placed in box 33a.
Prompt #9, “HCFA-1500 GRP# F'ld 33b”, is similar to prompt #5, with the exception that this
information will be placed in box 33b.
72
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Prompt #10, “HCFA-1500 Box 24C :”, if you would like the Type of Service (box 24C) to be filled on
the HCFA form when printing claims for this carrier, enter a "Y". Otherwise, leave blank or set to
"N".
Prompt #11, “HCFA-1500 Field 32:”, enter a "Y", to put the facility address in Field 32 of the HCFA1500. Leave blank or set to "N" to put "SAME" in the facility address.
Prompt #12, “HCFA-1500 Fld 24A :”, set as 'Y' to populate the "To" date fields in Box 24A.
PRIORAUTH SCREEN <F7> KEY
To enter prior authorizations required by this carrier, hit the <F6> key. The screen seen in Figure
69 will be used to enter this information.
Figure 69
Entering Carrier Required Prior Authorizations.
In this example, “vase” was entered in field #1 of the multi-value which has the system check the
cross-reference file for a procedure type. Number 55250 was selected. The system then defaulted
the same number in the “To CPT” field. Hitting <enter> had the system take this as the ending
value also. A range of CPTs could also be specified. For example, if you wanted, you could also
list a range of surgeries, a range of lab tests, or any other procedures.
On billing, the system will check to see if the specified insurance carrier requires prior authorization
for the procedure being billed. If it does, the system will then check the individual's patient file for
approved prior authorization for this procedure. If it exists, then it will check for dates allowed and
number allowed. If all checks are valid, then the system will use this prior authorization number in
billing and debit the patient file for one procedure of this type. If no valid prior authorization exists,
then the bill will be suspended and placed in the file of bills requiring prior authorization before
billing. This will be discussed further in the billing screens.
73
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
CO-PAY SCREEN <F9> SCREEN
To enter information on payments required by the patient for this carrier, hit the <F9>key to get to
the screen in Figure 70.
Figure 70
Payment Required by Carrier.
Prompt #1, “Percent Paid by Patient:”, enter the percent to be paid by the patient, or patient's
responsible party. Twenty percent should be entered as 20. The percent should be a whole
number from 0 to 100.
Prompt #2, “Deductible for Year:”, enter the deductible amount the patient must pay each year
before the insurance carrier must start to pay. For example: Medicare is $100.00. Some patients
may have very high deductibles, $10,000 or more.
Prompt #3, “Basic Co-Pay per Visit:”, this is where you should enter required payment at the time
of the visit. This is generally the amount the insurer asks each patient to make at each visit, before
or at the time of the visit, the purpose being to discourage overuse. Typically this is $5.00, $10.00,
$25.00, etc.
Prompt #4, “Maximum Pay per Visit:”, some insurers, for some types of practices, have a
maximum amount that they will pay for any given visit or procedure. Therefore regardless of the
percent paid by the carrier, the amount the carrier pays is limited to this maximum amount. The
balance is due from the patient.
Line Prompt--”Other Payment Information.”, enter other information that is unique to this carrier.
This information should only be that which will be of assistance to the sign-in clerk and the biller.
Line Prompt--”CPT codes Excluded from Discount”, enter the specific CPT and/or other
procedure codes that will not be paid for by the carrier. These are generally cash items, such as
74
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
equipment, crutches, and non-covered procedures. Enter the actual CPT code or other KEY from
the procedure file, one per line, left adjusted. For example,
Line CPTs Excluded from Discount
1
55250
2
55400
PRINT INSURANCE CARRIERS
Select #22, “Insurance Carrier File” from the Main Menu. Then select menu item #2, “Print File”,
to print up the list of insurance carriers' names and ID numbers on file. Choose one of the printing
options, or enter the default if you want it printed to the screen.
SNF (SKILLED NURSING FACILITY) RESIDENT BILLING
You can ensuring proper Medicare billing for SNF residents in two steps:
1.) Sites must have a clinic record, in the "Clinic File" (Prompt 23 off the main menu), for each SNF
where the the doctor may see a patient. In that clinic record, the SNF's Medicare Site Provider
Number must be entered in Prompt 7 on the <F6> "Bill#" screen, as seen in Figure 71.
Figure 71
Entering the Medicare Facility Number.
2.) For all SNF resident patients, the patient file must indicate "N.H. Skilled" in prompt 14, "Type of
Residence". Upon selecting this item, a list of clinics will pop up. Select the SNF that the patient
resides.
With both steps completed, HCFA forms will put the SNF number in the appropriate box, 23 or 32.
75
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
MEDICAL LIBRARY
This file is a collection of medical information that the physician needs to have available for instant
referral. It may include data from guidelines, medical journals, conferences, or merely past
experience. Your provider may specify the types of information needed to store here, such as
drugs, diseases, x-ray, lab, finance, or any other subjects of interest. As part of the support
services from IMS, many commonly used guidelines, reference information, and ACLS protocols
are kept up to date for your doctors automatically.
To enter or change information, access the “Medical Library“ from the main front office screen or
the doctor main menu screens. To just reference the medical library, access this file from the front
office or provider QuickMenu, the <F4> key. From the front office menu, you would select menu
item #28 “Medical Library, Add/Change/Del”. From the doctor main menu, you would select menu
item #14, “Medical Library”. In both cases, you would be placed in these screens for adding,
changing, or looking up information. As in the “Phone Book”, these add and change screens should
only be used for that purpose ( adding and changing information), and not for routine inquiries. For
routine inquiries, use the QuickMenu, <F4> key, since you cannot change or delete information
accidentally from this “Inquire Only” screen. Figure 72 shows the medical library screen in the add
mode:
Figure 72
Medical Library Add screen.
Prompt #1,”Record # or Xref lookup:”, hit the <enter> key to accept the system number for a new
document number, or enter a partial description of the type of document you are looking for. For
example, for fungal nail infection <nai> or <inf na> or <nai fu> may be entered. For all drugs, enter
<drug>, etc. If this is a new record key, enter <y> at the “Create a new one?”, at the bottom of the
screen.
Prompt #2, “Date entered/changed:”, enter the date of adding or changing the record, or hit
76
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
<enter> to accept the default of “TODAY”.
Prompt #4, “Type of Information:”, hit <enter> at the defaulted “?”, to bring up a help screen with
the following possible choices:
drug
- Drugs
disease
- Diseases
x-ray
- Radiology
lab
- Laboratory
finance
- Financial
other
- Other
Prompt #5, “Title:”, enter the title or subject of the article.
Prompt #6, “Keys:”. The title you entered above in prompt #5 will automatically be filled in here.
All titles should be condensed, if possible, by omitting any words not pertinent to a cross-reference,
such as "and", "or", "of", “the", etc. You may list other descriptive key words if the title is brief or not
easily associated. You are permitted nine words for cross-reference at the “Keys” prompt
(separated by spaces only--no commas). Any of the words you record in the “Keys” prompt will
bring up the article the next time you want to retrieve it.
Next is the multi-value prompt “Document text:”, enter the article information, or other information
here. You may type lines or paragraphs in the Lines section, but you will have to hit <enter> on
each line you type before you can begin a new line ( unlike your word processor). If you type a
complete sentence on a line, press <enter> after the period. If you have to continue a sentence
onto the next line, you will press <enter> after the cursor moves to the left margin of the next line.
Each line will be numbered automatically for easy reference.
You can cut and paste entire documents in this prompt. To have this work properly, the margins of
the document you will cut and paste from must be 74 characters or less per line. If the text you are
trying to cut and paste is wider than this, you will only get the first 74 characters and everything after
that will be lost. Figure 73 is an example of cutting and pasting from an article on treating head lice.
To quickly lookup information, the provider, from the “Doctor Main Menu”, can hit the <F4> key and
select “Medical Library”. The screen presented will look just like the first add mode screen above
with the exception of indicating “Inquire” on the right header bar. No changes or additions can be
made on this screen. You can type in a partial description of the information you want to find ( as
described above in this section), or hit the <F9> key to get a list of documents available as seen in
Figure 74.
Please note, that the sort starts with upper case letters first. To avoid mixed sorts (ABC.. followed
by abc..), always title your additions in upper case letters. See “A WORD ON SELECTION
RANGES” for more information on sorting.
PRINT APPOINTMENT BOOK
The main front office screen, menu item #13, “Print Appointment Book”, will print the appointment
book for the range of dates you choose. The selection screen is as seen in Figure 75:
Prompt #1, “From:”, enter the starting date of the appointment book pages you want to print.
77
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 73
COPYRIGHT 2004
Pasting into the Medical Library.
Figure 74
Medical Library List.
Prompt #2, “To:”, enter the ending date of the appointment book pages you want to print.
Prompt #3, “Provider”, enter the provider initials of the appointment book pages you want to print, or
accept the default of “ALL” to get all providers. The resulting screen output of the report will appear as
seen in Figure 76.
Of course, you can also request this report to be sent to the printer or to a file as usual.
78
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 75
Print Appointment Book Selection screen.
Figure 76
Printout of Appointment Schedule.
PRINT PATIENT CHARTS
From the main front office screen, menu item #14, “Print Patient Charts”, will print the portions of the
patient chart that is needed. The selection screen is as seen in Figure 77.
Prompt #1, “Patient Number:”, enter the patient number, or if unknown, enter at least 3 characters of
the patient's name for a cross-reference lookup. Once the patient is selected, at the “Change prompt”,
enter either <2> to “Print the Patient's Active Problems, Medications, and Past medical History”,
<3> to “Print a Visit Encounter”, or hit the <F1> key to end and exit.
79
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Prompt #2, “Print Active Problems, Medications and PMHx?”, enter <y> or <return> if you wish to
print the Patient's Medical History, <n> otherwise. If you enter “y” here, then the screen seen in Figure
78 will pop-up, and the Past Medical History will print. The special confidential information screen will
not be printed. Only the provider can see this, and this must be on-line. The patient's Medical History
will print from the clinics main printer. Now just follow the instruction at the bottom of the screen and
hit the <enter> key.
Figure 77
Print Patient Chart screen.
Prompt #3, “Print Visit/Encounter?”, enter <y> or <enter> if you wish to print a visit review. Enter <n>
if you do not. The selection screen shown in Figure 79 will then be presented, showing all the patient's
visits or encounters in the system:
In Figure 79, we have highlighted the visit we wish to printout. Upon hitting the <enter> key, the
screen in Figure 80 is presented as the complete visit note prints from the clinic's main printer.
Then, by hitting the <enter> key, you will be brought back to the main “Print Patient Chart” menu. Here
you may make another selection or hit the <F1> to “end” or exit.
PROVIDER PASSWORD FILE
The provider password file is for modification of the provider's “sign out” password. This is similar to
the login password in concept, but it is only for “providers” to indicate signature of their note. For
primary front office users that are also providers, they can maintain their sign out passwords by use of
this menu selection #19, “Provider Password File”. For providers that log on to the “Doctor Main
Menu”, this same menu item is reached from the “QuickMenu” <F4> key ( item # 12 “Provider Pwd
File”). The maintenance screen is as seen in Figure 81.
80
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 78
Figure 79
COPYRIGHT 2004
Printing the Patient's Past Medical History.
Selecting Encounter Note to Print.
Prompt #1, “Enter new signature password:”, Enter 3 to 10 characters for a new password. This
can be any combination of standard keyboard characters. Ex: <HarryX9> or <tennis now> or <joe-sig>
or <mary-789*> or <##jones>, etc. The password must be unique. If you get a response that the
entry already exists, choose another password for your signature. As you leave Prompt #1 and enter
prompt #2, the first prompt will go blank. This is done in the rare case that you may not have noticed
someone watching what you are doing, or your being called away before completing the screen.
Prompt #2, “Enter old signature password:”, enter your old signature password. If this is the first
time you are setting your password, enter “password”, this first time only.
81
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 80
Printing the Selected Encounter Note.
Figure 81
Sign-Out Password Change screen.
Before initializing or changing your sign out password, be sure your provider profile is set up as you
wish. For example if your name has not been added in that file, your signature will show up something
like “ , , MD”. If correcting a spelling or changing to a married name, do this first in the provider file
before you change your signature password. The system pulls the information to use as your
signature block from your existing provider file.
Prompt #3, “Reenter New signature password:”, reenter the new password. If you enter the new
password incorrectly, you will be prompted to reenter or quit.
Once complete, the system will prompt you to exit by hitting the “F1” key twice.
REBUILD FAMILY XREF
Menu item #24 off the main office screen, “Rebuild Family Xref”; is to rebuild the Family crossreference file. Only choose this selection when the system will not be used for at least one hour. It
takes a long time to rebuild a large Family file. Further, if anyone is using the Family file at this time,
82
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
the cross-reference file may be corrupted. On the selection screen, there is only one prompt. At
prompt #1, press <enter> to continue or <F1> to end. Then, wait while the cross-reference is rebuilt.
Stopping the process part way through will definitely corrupt the cross-reference file. Rebuilding the
cross-reference may be desirable periodically if the cross-reference list is significantly out of
alphabetical order.
REBUILD PATIENT XREF
Menu item #25 off the main office screen, “Rebuild Patient Xref”; is to rebuild the Patient crossreference file. Only choose this selection when the system will not be used for at least one hour. It
takes a long time to rebuild a large Patient file. Further, if anyone is using the Patient file at this time,
the cross-reference file may be corrupted. On the selection screen there is only one prompt. At
prompt #1, press <enter> to continue or <F1> to end. Then, wait while the cross-reference is rebuilt.
Stopping the process part way through, will definitely corrupt the cross-reference file. Rebuilding the
cross-reference may be desirable periodically if the cross-reference list is significantly out of
alphabetical order.
83
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
CHAPTER 2
COPYRIGHT 2004
ACCOUNTING
FAMILY LEDGER
The “Family Ledger” is accessed from the main front office menu at menu item #9. Upon selecting
this menu item, you will be presented with the screen shown in Figure 82.
Figure 82
Family Ledger Start Screen
Prompt #1, “Family Number:”, enter the Family Number if known. If not enter at least 3 characters of
either the family name or the name of a member of the family. The following actions will then occur:
A) A search of the patient records is performed.
a) If a match to your input is found, then a list of these patients is presented.
i) If the list contains the name of a family member, choose it. You will then see the Family Ledger.
ii) If not, press <F1> to exit this list. Go to item B) in this help message.
b) If no match is found in the patient records, then
B) A search of the family file is then performed.
a) If a match is found, then a list of these families is presented.
i) If the list contains the name of a desired family member, choose it. You will then see the Family
Ledger.
ii) If not, press <F1>. You will be re-prompted for additional inputs.
b) If no match is found in the Family records, you will be re-prompted for additional inputs.
Once selected the screen will appear as seen in Figure 83:
In Figure 83 you will notice the Family Ledger (HOH) has charges for all the family members. This
is much more efficient than keeping all individuals separate. The bill is sent to the HOH only.
However, bills can be produced by insurance carrier so that problems will not arise with insurances
such as Workmen's Compensation carriers. Further, on mailing statements only one bill needs to
be sent to the HOH, saving a significant amount of time and money spent on postage.
84
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 83
COPYRIGHT 2004
Family Ledger
On this screen, you can see all charges in a chronological order. If you want to see the last entries
when there are many charges posted over time, you can quickly go to the bottom of the list by entering
<lb> at the change prompt ( at the blinking cursor at the bottom of the screen next to, “Items to act
on: - S)elect, L)ist“). The “lb” stands for “list bottom”. Also, you can select the last item posted to the
family ledger by entering <sb> at this same location. The “sb” stands for “select bottom”.
At a quick glance, you can see the family balance at the bottom of the screen. This is broken out as,
“Pat. Balance”, “Ins. Balance”, and the ( total) “Family Balance”.
F-KEY SCREENS (specific to Family Ledger)
BILLED <F3> SCREEN
Hitting the <F3> key will open up the “Bills” screen as seen in Figure 84.
On this screen the top half of the screen shows when bills were printed and who the user was that
requested them to be printed. This is a multi-value prompt. To see all the lines, you may have to page
or arrow down. You can also use the <lb> command at the change prompt to list the bottom row. The
bottom half of the screen has 3 additional prompts.
Prompt #4, “Print Family Bill Now ?:”, enter <y> to print family bill now.
Prompt #5, “Print Family Bill Later ?:”, enter <y> to place family bill in a file for group printing.
Prompt #6, “Print Family Receipt ?:”, entering a "Y", will create a "Family Receipt." The receipt
displays all charges for this day, and any previous charges in which the patient is responsible and the
balance is non-zero.
85
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 84
COPYRIGHT 2004
Family Ledger Billing Screen
DIST.PAYMENT <F6> SCREEN
Hitting the <F6> key will open up the “Dist.Payment” screen, Figure 85 below. Please note that before
going to this screen the primary Family Ledger screen, Figure 83, shows the “Payment to
Distribute:” to be “$.00” and the “Balance to Distribute:” to be “$.00”. Distributing a payment starts
with determining the type of distribution you want to make, as indicated on the first of the distribute
payment screens seen in Figure 85.
At prompt #1 on this screen, enter the type of distribution you want to make. Enter <S> to select an
individual item for general payment. Enter <I> to distribute Insurance payments by dates. Enter <P>
to distribute “Patient/Resp. Party” payments by dates. Enter <C> to choose a number of items to
which you want to distribute “Patient/Resp. Party” payments. In all the examples below, we will use an
example of posting $5.00. Upon choosing “S”, you will be taken to the “Distribution of Funds screen,
Figure 86 below.
Prompt #1, “Payment to Distribute:”, enter the amount you wish to distribute to the Charge Items
on the main screen. In this case we entered $5.00.
Prompt #2, “Payment from:”, enter the source of the payment (patient, insurance, etc.) Just hit enter
to accept the default of: “Paid-Pt./Resp.Party”.
Prompt # 3, “Method of Payment:”, a pop-up screen is presented as shown in Figure 87 below. This
screen shows the different payment types available at this clinic. These can be changed for your site
by having the system administrator modify the information for this pop-up screen in the TERMS file
record “ADM-PAY_TYPE”. Highlight the one you want, or enter its line number and hit <enter>.
Prompt #4, “Check/CC Number:”, enter the check or credit card number. If you choose “Cash” from
the prior selection screen, the value of “--” will be placed in the field, and it will be skipped.
86
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 85
Payment Distribution
Figure 86
Distribution of Funds
87
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 87
COPYRIGHT 2004
Select Payment Type, Pop-Up
Any time you need to make corrections, indicate at the change prompt which prompt you want to go
back to, or you can select “A” for all. If you do not catch your error until after you get into the charge
item screen, hit <F1> to “end” back to the primary family ledger screen and start again.
You will then be taken to the prior screen. Hit enter, not changing your previous selection. Then hit
<enter> again to get back to the primary Family Ledger screen. Now from this screen, you will see a
prompt at the bottom of the screen ( just above the F-Keys line) instructing you as follows:
“Items to act on: - Enter the line number to select”. Enter the line number of the charge you want to
distribute part or all of the amount you indicated for payment. You can also use the multi-value
shortcuts to move around in these items, <lb>, <sb>, page up, page down, arrow up, and arrow down,
as discussed previously under “NAVIGATING THE "LINE" PROMPTS:”. Then distribute the
payment as described below in “CHARGE ITEM DISTRIBUTION”.
Upon choosing “i”, you will be taken to the insurance carrier screen seen in Figure 88 below.
Since you have chosen payment distribution by an insurance carrier, the system will present you with
the carriers that have been billed for charges in the Family Ledger. This is done to save you typing
and reduce errors. Also, since the text entered will be consistent, a future search that may be wanted
will be more accurate. Pick the appropriate carrier that is making payment.
The system will now find all charges, in the date range specified, for that carrier. You will then be
presented with these in a serial fashion. To skip an item, hit <F1> to “end” input on this particular
charge and go on to the next one selected, if there are any more.
An example of choosing the “P” type of distribution was already described in the “Primary Billing”
section of this manual. Please refer to that section for an example of completion of the remainder of
the prompt items.
88
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 88
COPYRIGHT 2004
Select Insurance carrier, Pop-Up
Upon choosing “C”, you will be taken to the screen shown in Figure 89 below.
Prompt #1, “Pt./Resp. Paying:”, will default “Paid-Pt./Resp. Party” to indicate the the payment was
made by the patient or the responsible party (HOH). This can be over-typed as needed to indicate the
correct source of payment. Please keep the terms used consistent, so that others in the clinic know
what you mean. Also, this will aid in any future database searches.
Prompt #2, “Amount to Dist.”, enter the amount you wish to distribute to the Charge Items
on the main screen. In this case, we entered $5.00.
Prompt # 3, “Method of Payment:”, a pop-up screen is presented as shown in the “s” type distribution
in Figure 87.
Next a screen will open, showing all the charge items as shown in Figure 90.
In the screen shown in Figure 90, you can select one or more charge items to be processed one-byone. Hit enter at each line number you want to select. An asterisk, “*”, will be placed at the beginning
of each line selected. In the above example, the last two charge items were selected. To un-select
any item, arrow back to that line number and hit the <enter> key again to remove the asterisk. Also,
you can use the “F5” range function key which will allow you to indicate the first line and then scroll to
the last line. The “F6” clear function key will clear any selections made.
CHARGE ITEM DISTRIBUTION
Once the charge item(s) have been selected, you will post the payments as follows. In the following
screen, Figure 91, hit the <enter> key in prompt #1 to accept the defaulted charge item number
presented. Then to distribute part or all of the amount to distribute, enter <a> ( Add) at the change
prompt to enter a transaction line.
89
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 89
Distribution to a Group of Charges.
Figure 90
Charge Item Multiple Select
90
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 91
COPYRIGHT 2004
Charge Item Distribution
Line 2 in Figure 91 is opened with the previously entered value of the “Pt./Resp. Paying:” in the
“Describe Transaction” field. If you want to change this, hit the <up arrow> key, and over type the
information. Next, accept “TODAY” in the “Date” field by hitting <enter>. Generally, you would then hit
<enter> at the “Charges” field and the “Adjustment” fields to take the default of zero (.00). Then, in
the “Payment” field, enter the amount of the “Amount Remaining to Distribute:” amount you want to
disperse to this charge item. If you try to disperse more than the $5.00 remaining to distribute, you will
be stopped and informed that “There is only $5.00 remaining to distribute”. Upon entering the $5.00,
you will see the distributed amount, the balanced reduce appropriately, and the “Amount Remaining to
Distribute:” drop to “.00”. You will also be presented with a pop-up screen for any adjustments you
may want to make on the next line. All of these above actions are shown in Figure 92 below.
The pop-up screen shown in Figure 92 can be changed by the system administrator or clinic manager
in the TERMS file record of “ADM-TRANSACTION”. In that record, you can enter the most common
terms you want to see in the “Describe Transaction” field of the next line. Although you can make
additional charges and adjustments all on one line, it is better to do this on separate lines for clarity.
You can over-type or free text the “Describe Transaction” field, but it is best to use consistent terms so
that others working with the charge items know what you mean. Also this will aid in searches for
specific transaction types.
If you do not want to make any further entries on this charge item at this time, hit the <F1> key to “end”
and to close the pop-up screen. Hit <F1> again if you do not want to make any further additions to this
charge item. Next, you will be presented with the next selection if you indicated more than one charge
item to distribute funds.
If you do not wish to work on the next charge item hit <F1> to “end” input. Then <F1> back to the
main Family Ledger screen. Here you will see all the changes made. If the “Balance to Distribute:” is
equal to zero, then you will be allowed to exit this screen. If it is not, and you try to exit, you will get a
91
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 92
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selecting Additional Transaction Type.
“Failed Validation” error and will be presented with possible causes and ways to correct the error.
CORRECTING ERRORS.
To correct errors, simply pick a transaction term that is appropriate ( don't forget you can add any
standard terms you wish to the pop-up selection screen as discussed above). For the transaction
term, you could also hit the <F1> key at the pop-up box, to place you on a blank transaction field
where you can place a free text entry, for example <correct adj. Ln #3>. Then, correct one error at a
time. That is, one per line, so it is clear what you are doing. The screen image of this example is
shown in Figure 93 below.
As discussed at the end of this section, you can hit the <F12> to see the hidden security screen, to
see who made each transaction and when.
Msg. <F7> Screen.
The “Message” (Msg) screen, Figure 94, is used to tract and give information to the HOH regarding
problems with payments on the HOH account.
Prompt #1, “Suppress Dunning Message (y/n)?”, enter <y> to suppress dunning messages. Leave
blank or enter <n> to allow dunning messages. The dunning messages for greater than 30, 60, or 90
days can be modified by the system administrator, clinic manager, or billing manager. These changes
are made to the “ADM-BILL-OVER30”, “ADM-BILL-OVER60”, “ADM-BILL-OVER90” records in the
TERMS file.
In the multi-valued prompt for “Messages”, the first field is for the message. The second and third
fields are start and stop dates to show the message on the monthly HOH bill. The messages, as well
as the dunning messages, and any general clinic messages are inserted into the HOH bill. The HOH
bill is generated via the “Monthly Reports”screen by choosing menu item #2, “Bill w/DX & CPT w/Pt.
92
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 93
Example of Charge Item Correction.
Figure 94
Family Billing Messages Screen.
Resp.>0”. The other 4 types of “Patient Statements” will not have this information.
93
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
DAY SHEET
The main office menu item #10, “Day Sheet (PW req'd)”, will take you to the Day Sheet, Figure 95,
which shows all transactions for that date.
Prompt #1, “Date of Posting:”, will default today's date. You can also enter prior dates if you wish to
review those dates. In the above screen will be listed all transactions for a given day. If any of the
listed items need to be reviewed, enter the appropriate line number to select the transaction to review.
The transaction screen as shown in Figure 96 will be presented. All the pertinent information about
that specific transaction is presented along with the security information showing the user, date, time,
and terminal used.
DAILY ACCOUNTING
Menu item # 11, “Daily Accounting (PW req'd)”, off the front office menu will take you to the screen
seen in Figure 97, where you can perform several daily tasks.
Figure 95
Day Sheet
Generally, only menu items #2 through #4, which are all reports, are used regularly. Menu item #1 is
only used if there has been a posting error. This would be indicated in the “Daily Admin” menu item
from the “Billing” screen. The “Daily System Monitor” would indicate that the posting was “Bad”, as
discussed in that section.
The first of these reports is seen in Figure 98, the report of the Day Sheet.
Each of these reports gives you several options for output as listed on the bottom of the screen. This
can be seen in Figure 98, above. You can hit <enter> to accept “s” for screen which will present the
report to you on the screen, <p> for the default printer, <b> to send it to both the screen and the
default printer, <f> to a file, <o> to specify another printer, and any printers listed as F-Keys.
94
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 96
Transaction Screen
Figure 97
Daily Accounting
95
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 98
COPYRIGHT 2004
Day Sheet Report
Below, Figure 99, is an example of this specific report as shown on the screen. The other reports work
in a similar manner. Menu item #3 prints the bank deposit slip. Menu item #4 prints the day sheet
by user. Menu item #5 prints the day sheet by provider.
REVIEW ADJUSTMENTS
To review adjustments select menu item #30, “Review Adjustments (Pwd Req'd)”, off the main front
office menu. You will then be presented with the selection screen seen in Figure 100 below.
Prompt #1, “Provider:”, enter provider initials or <ALL> to select all providers.
Prompt #2, “DOS from:”, Enter date of service in the following form: 0201, 020104, 02012004, 02/01,
02/01/04, 02/01/2004, or enter <FIRST> to start with the first date of service in the system.
Prompt #3, “DOS to:”, enter as in prompt number 2, or enter <LAST> to select through the last date
of service.
Prompt #4, “CPT Code:”, accept the default of <ALL>, or enter the CPT Code in the form: 99212, or
10060*.
Prompt #5, “Ins. Co.:”, accept the default of <ALL> for the insurance company, or enter a partial
description of the insurance company to select from a list.
The typical resulting screen will be presented starting with the first Charge Item Number defaulted for
you. If no number is presented, then no charge items were found meeting the criteria you input above.
To see the information, hit <enter> at prompt #1 with a defaulted Charge Item Number. Figure 101,
below, is an example of an adjustment that was found.
96
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 99
Figure 100
COPYRIGHT 2004
Day Sheet
Review Adjustments Selections Screen
In this example, this charge item contains a $10.00 adjustment in the adjustment field of the multivalue. To see the security screen, hit the <F12> key. This screen, as seen in Figure 102 below, will
show you the User , Date, Time, and Terminal for each line in the transaction multi-value prompt.
Information on this transaction could have also been seen in the Day Sheet screens discussed
97
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
previously ( Figure 99). This information could also be reviewed from the Family Ledger. The
advantage of this method of review, is that a manager can more easily concentrate on looking at all
adjustments of a selected type at one time, without having to go to the individual Day sheet or Family
Ledger.
Figure 101
Adjustment found in Transaction File
Figure 102
Transaction Security Screen
98
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
CHAPTER 3
BILLING
The billing screens are reached from the main menu via menu item #8. This screen present you with
numerous tools to process office visit bills, out of office bills (including hospitals and nursing homes),
bills of office visits not billed at the time of the visit, and many other functions as will be described in
Figure 103 below.
Figure 103
Billing Menu
PRIMARY BILLING SCREENS
Select menu item #1 above to go into the primary billing screen. This screen, Figure 104, will display
ALL of the bills not yet processed at the time you open the screen. This screen might reflect the
situation after the first two patients of the day have been seen and are exiting. These bills are in
reverse chronological order, so the most recent bill is at the top. This would be the last patient seen by
the doctor, generally. Any bills from prior days will remain here until billed, or specifically deleted via
other screens requiring passwords to access.
Enter the line number of the bill you want to process, and hit the <enter> key. The billing screen seen
in Figure 105 below, will now open.
Prompt #2, “Is this the correct Patient & Family?”, is the name of the person shown above this
question the Responsible Party, Head of Household, legal guardian, or the adult listed as the patient?
Answer yes <y> or <n>. If there is no insurance company or a balance is due after insurance has
paid, this person will be billed. All actions on the account will be reported to this person.
Next the insurance screen, Figure 106, will automatically open showing all available insurances for the
patient. The patient's individual insurances will be shown first, followed by any HOH family insurances.
If the patient was see in the clinic, and had the insurance for the visit selected at sign-in, the insurance
99
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 104
Primary Billing screen.
Figure 105
Starting Billing screen.
the insurance previously selected will be shown in line #1 of the lower half of the screen for the
insurance policy to be billed. Initially you will be in the multi-value prompt at the top half of the screen.
You are place here in case you want to look at the other insurance policies, to see if one of them
would be more appropriate. You would do this by entering the appropriate line number.
100
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 106
COPYRIGHT 2004
Insurance screen.
This section allows you to select an insurance policy, to see the insurance policy information, before
selecting it for billing. If you do not enter a number and just hit <enter>, then you will be moved to the
bottom half of the screen in a multi-value prompt. Here you will be able to indicate C(hange) to change
the to another carrier if you want before the bill is processed. If you just hit <enter> then this carrier will
be used for billing. You may change this at any time before reaching the “Pay Now or Bill” screen by
using the F10 key to go to the insurance screen again.
You are next automatically taken to the referring provider and visit information screen as seen in
Figure 107.
Prompt #1, “Provider to bill to:”, will be skipped if the provider of the service was a provider that can
legally bill (MD, DO, DC, etc.). For other providers such as PAs, working under a physicians
supervision, you will be stopped at prompt #1 with the defaulted value of the supervising physician
taken from the provider file for this individual ( prompt # 19, for Non-physician's Sup.:). If this is correct
just hit <enter>, if not, type part of the name of the supervising physician at that time, and pick the
appropriate physician if more than one choice is given.
Prompt #2, “Are billing Prov. & referring the same:”, if this appointment was scheduled as a referral,
and a referring physician was indicated, then this will be defaulted for you. If this wasn't initially
indicated as a referral, and the provider was a physician, then a “Y” is defaulted to indicate, that they
are the same (which is the most common case). Medicare and some other carriers requires you to
specify the referring physician, even if the provider the patient came to see initially, is the same
provider, i.e., not a referral. If it is the same provider, just hit <enter> to keep this as yes. If the
referring provider is different from that presented, you will be able to enter part of the referring
providers name, and then select from the choices presented. These providers can be clinic providers
or referring provider's listed in the referring provider file discussed previously.
101
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
If this is a standard office visit, then just hitting the <F1> key here will drop you through the remaining
prompt items, placing default values where appropriate.
Figure 107
Referring Provider and Visit Information screen.
On the remaining prompts 4 through 12, you can take the default values, or enter the appropriate
information. The <F2> can be used at each prompt to get context specific help. Prompts 4 through 6
have a logic check so that you do not make mutually exclusive choices. Basically what is being asked
here, is someone else possibly responsible for the bill.
The next screen that pops-up is the charges screen, as seen in Figure 108. Here the charges entered
by the provider and the system (InHouse lab, automated lab, and InHouse X-Rays) are listed in the top
half of the screen. The base fee as well as the standard adjustment and final fee are shown. The
standard adjustment is the contracted ( or reduced amount) for this carrier, to be distinguished from a
write-off. The fees for all CPT and other procedure codes are defined in the Procedure file, described
elsewhere in this manual. The only thing that can be done on the top half of the screen is change the
modifier by going to that line in the change mode, or deleting the charge entirely.
By hitting the <F9> key while in this area of the screen, a list of acceptable modifiers will be presented,
as seen in Figure 109.
Scroll to the modifier you want and hit <enter>. A star “*” will be placed next to that item. Do the same
for up to 4 selections. Delete the previous selection by going back to it and hitting <enter> again.
When satisfied you have specified the modifiers you want, hit the <F1> key to accept them. Also, you
can hit <F1> without starring any selections to get a blank field.
102
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 108
Provider Charges and System Charges.
Figure 109
Adding Modifiers to Provider Charges.
In the bottom half of the screen, additional procedure charges can be entered.
Adding or changing additional charges, besides the charges indicated by the provider, is done after
103
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
exiting the multi-value prompt on the top half of the screen. If you need to get back to the top half of
the screen to change modifiers or delete a charge, you can do so by entering a “u” for up, at the
change prompt for the multi-value at the bottom half of the screen.
Both the provider placed charges on the top half of the screen and the additional charges added on
the bottom half of the screen are checked for age and sex appropriateness, as well as Medicare
Correct Coding Initiative (CCI) checks. You will be prompted to select again, or asked to add a
modifier.
Figure 110
Adding Additional Charges.
In the example seen in Figure 110 above, the first additional charge for a tetanus toxoid immunization
was added as an after thought, after the provider completed the note and charges. Note that all
charges can be added simply by entering part of the description of the procedure or CPT code. In this
case “teta “ was entered, and then the proper code was picked from the selection list. All the checks
noted above will be done as the codes are added. The fees and adjustments are pulled from the
Procedure file. It is a better practice to enter part of the description rather than the actual code
number. Since codes are deleted every year, and IMS deletes the cross-reference of these deleted
codes, you will not inadvertently enter a deleted code. If you just enter the code number you have
memorized, and do not see that it is described as a deleted code, then it will be billed and probably
rejected.
The “X” field just before the base fee field is to indicate the number of units to charge. The default is
“1”, which would be correct for most situations.
In a second example, a special type of charge is being added as a nutritional supplement. The “99199”
is a non-existent CPT code number. This is the only code in the system in which you can enter the fee
as you wish, under the base fee field. This was done for those practices that sell nutritional
supplements of varying prices. In general, this should be done as a stand alone bill, and not part of a
104
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
bill sent to a carrier (generally a non-visit bill). All carriers will reject any such charges.
NARRATIVE <F6> SCREEN
Hitting the <F6> will bring you to the narrative screen, as seen in Figure 111. Go to this screen if you
know that the primary procedure needs a narrative to be sent with the claim.
Figure 111
Selecting Narrative Type.
When the narrative screen first pops-up, you will be asked to select from one of the permitted types of
narrative reports. Once this is done you will be able to enter one line of text to send with the claim, as
shown in Figure112.
The narrative will apply only to the first procedure listed. If you have multiple charges to enter, and
they each need a narrative, then enter each additional procedure as a non-visit bill, and delete those
from this bill.
VISIT REVIEW <F9> SCREEN
The visit review screen shown below in Figure 113, is the one time that the billing personnel can see
the visit record. They can only view the visit they are currently billing, and are in the inquire mode so
that the record cannot be altered. This screen allows the billing personnel to review the visit for
additional charges. Confidential, provider only information, is not displayed.
AUTOMATIC EXIT SCREENS
The first exit screen for a Medicare carrier is shown in Figure 114 below. This screen shows the
Medicare discount and the total fee due.
105
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 112
Figure 113
COPYRIGHT 2004
Completed Narrative Billing Note.
Visit Review for Billing.
106
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 114
COPYRIGHT 2004
Medicare Payment Exit screen.
Prompt #3, “Medicare Deductible paid this year:”, is where the billing clerk would enter what the
patient thinks they paid so far this year. If they paid over $100.00, then you can just enter $100.00,
since this is the standard amount they are required to pay by Medicare this year.
The system will then calculate what the patient owes at this time on these charges. A good way to
handle things at this time is to tell the patient that their portion of the Medicare charges is ( “the amount
needed for today's visit”). How would you like to pay for this? At this time the patient may offer to pay,
or may ask you to bill them after Medicare has paid. This will allow you to be able to answer the
questions on the next automatic exit screen.
The first exit screen for a non-Medicare carrier is different from the Medicare screen as seen in Figure
115. This screen shows carrier specific payment requirements. The standard adjustment if any is
shown first, followed by the amount due, the percent to be paid by the patient, any basic visit co-pay
required, and the deductible for this policy per year.
Prompt #1, “Deductible paid this year:”, is where you will enter the amount that the patient thinks
they have paid this year on this policy.
The area of the screen for “Carrier Specific Instructions”, is information from this carriers file with any
other specific instructions, relating to payments or restrictions on this policy. These are informational
only and cannot be changed here.
Prompt #2, “Add Additional Required Amounts:”, can be used to add additional amounts based on
the Carrier Specific Instructions. Or, this prompt can be used to add negative amounts to eliminate a
co-pay amount based on this information.
None of these calculations will affect the basic charges, but is only an on-line assistant to help you tell
107
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
the patient what they should pay today.
Figure 115
Standard Carrier Exit Payment screen.
At this point you will choose one of the two options presented in payment form exit screen shown in
Figure 116.
Figure 116
Select Payment Type.
108
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
AUTOMATIC EXIT BILLING SCREEN FOR PAY NOW OPTION. If the patient elects to pay now, the
following payment screens, starting with Figure 117, will be presented. After these screens, the normal
exit process will continue ( starting at Figure 124).
Figure 117
Family Ledger screen.
You have been taken to the Family Ledger to make a payment. The Family Ledger will be discussed
further in the Accounts Receivable section. In the current exit example a payment of $10.00 will be
posted to the initial charge. This is done by hitting the <F6> key for Distribution of Payments.
The screen shown in Figure 118, allows you to choose how you want to distribute the payment. In this
case only the “P” type for for “distribution of Patient/Resp. Payment by dates”, will be shown. The
other options will be discussed further in the Accounts Receivable section. Once the type of payment
distribution is indicated the appropriate screen will open, as shown in Figure 119 ( for this example),
below.
Prompt #1, “Pt./Resp. Paying:”, ( in Figure 119) will be defaulted for you based on your previous
choice. This can be over typed if you wish, but it is generally better to leave it as the default or to use
some standard text description, should there every be a need to search for all transactions of a specific
type (and avoids spelling errors).
Prompt #2, “Amount to Dist.:”, enter the amount of money that needs to be distributed. In this
example, $10.00 will be used.
Prompt #3, “Date from:”, you can hit the <F9> key listed on the bottom of the screen for “Today's”
date. This will restrict charges brought up for possible distribution of funds for this starting date to the
ending date below. So, to just select today's charges, both should be today's date. Or, enter the first
date of service that you want to distribute part or all of this money.
109
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 118
Select Type of Distribution.
Figure 119
Distribution of Pt./Resp Party Payment.
Prompt #4, Date to:”, will default the date from prompt #3. You can over type this if you wish if prompt
#3 was other than today's date. Or, enter the last date of service that you want to distribute part or all
of this money.
110
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Prompt #5, “Method of Payment:”, will have a pop-up screen with the method of payments defined for
your clinic. Select the type of payment. These payment types are specified in the Terms file under the
“ADM-PAY_TYPE” key. These will be changed for you by IMS at your request. Another standard type
in addition to “Check” and “Cash”, is “Other”, which is not shown here. Most sites use the Check,
Cash, or pick a Credit card company. We have added the “Other” category for sites for “Other” types
of payments, such as direct deposit. This will be reflected in the report of “Chg, Adj, Pay, by Provider”,
menu item #17 of the Reports Menu.
Prompt #6, “Check/CC Number:”, if you choose other than cash, enter the check or credit card
number as per your clinic policy. Selecting Cash, will cause this field to display “--”, since there is no
number to record.
You will next be taken to the transaction file, as seen in Figure 120, where all transaction on the charge
item will take place. The charge items that can be acted upon, based on your date selection, will be
presented one at a time. If the transaction item is the one you want to apply payments to, then hit <A>
at the change prompt to start adding to the the multi-value prompt. Otherwise, hit the <F1> key to end
input on this item and go to the next one ( if there are any more).
Figure 120
Charge Item screen.
The next screen, as shown in Figure 121, shows the automatic step after a line was added and a
payment of $10.00 was made. Please note that the above screen shows an “Amount Remaining to
Distribute:” to be “10.00”. Compare this to the next screens, as shown in Figures 121 and 122, after
the payment has been posted.
Once the amount has been posted, a pop-up screen is presented ( Figure 121) in which you may
select one of these descriptions to be defaulted in the first field of the next multi-value line. If you do
not want to make any changes or adjustments, just hit the <F1> key to end input.
111
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 121
COPYRIGHT 2004
Pop-UP Transaction screen following Payment.
The following screen, Figure 122, shows the results of the actions taken above, assuming the <F1>
key was hit, to not add any transactions such as adjustment on the line following the payment line.
Figure 122
Transaction screen Completed.
Any other transactions for this date range will be presented next. To skip these, if there are any, just
112
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
hit the <F1> key to skip (end). On return to the main Family Ledger screen, the results of these
actions are shown, with the Family Balance reflecting these changes, as seen in Figure 123.
Figure 123
Family Ledger After Payment Posted.
Next you will be taken back to the automatic exit screens.
AUTOMATIC EXIT SCREENS (continued).
Prior to going to the final exit screen you may be taken to one or more optional screens for order
processing, referrals, appointment follow-ups, etc. The number of optional screens depends on the
provider's orders. All orders not processed as requested at time of exit are automatically stored for
later processing in the “Orders Incomplete & Pending” screens from main menu item # 7.
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: NON-AUTOMATED OUTSIDE LAB PROCESSING. See Figure 124
below. From this screen you would hit the <F9> key to print information for the patient. This will print
a lab requisition sheet with all necessary information. Specific information on each lab is contained in
the “LAB INFORMATION SCREEN” of the clinic file as discussed in the Clinic File section.
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: DX SERVICE – TAKEOFF. See Figure 125 below. To indicate order
placed, at the change prompt indicate the line number of the order being processed. The system
then will indicate the date and time the order was placed by you.
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: PROVIDER REFERRAL – TAKEOFF See Figure 126 below. The first
line of this multi-value prompt, shows the name or site of the provider to whom the referral is to be
made. Also it shows the when the referral is to take place, and for what diagnosis. The second line is
to record the appointment scheduled. To get to this line, indicate the line number you need to work
with at the change prompt. While on this second indented line, you will enter the date and time of the
appointment. The system will add your user login and the time this line item was completed by you.
113
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
You will then be stopped and asked if you want to print out the referral form. The answer, generally,
should be yes. The referral form, similar to the example shown in Figure 127 below, will then be
printed for you to give to the patient.
The form contains the following information:
1. Patient name, Patient Number, and DOB.
2. The Health Care Provider to whom the patient is being referred, including:
Name, Address, Phone Number, Appointment Date, and Time of Appointment.
3. The reason for referral.
4. The referring providers comments regarding the referral.
5. The referring providers name, UPIN number, and date of referral.
6. The patient's Active Medical Problem List.
7. The patient's Chronic Medications and Acute Medications of the Past 12 Months.
8. The patient's Past Medical History, including:
Past Medical Problems, Past Surgeries and Procedures, Allergies, Immunizations, Reproductive
History for Females, Family Medical History with age of onset and relation, Hospitalizations
including duration of stay and admit date.
If the referral is not completed, then this referral will be stored for later processing in the “Orders
Incomplete & Pending” screens from main menu item # 7.
Figure 124
Order for Non-Automated Outside Lab Work.
114
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 125
Orders for Diagnostic Services.
Figure 126
Orders for Patient Referrals.
115
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 127
COPYRIGHT 2004
Example Patient Referral Form.
116
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: SCHEDULE PROCEDURES – TAKEOFF. See Figure 128 below. On
this screen, you select the order you want to work with at the change prompt. Once you have
scheduled the patient procedure via the <F4> QuickMenu, indicate <Y> in the first field of the second
half of the multi-value line. The system will place the current date, time, and user. If you do not
indicate that the order has been placed, then this order will be stored for later processing in the “Orders
Incomplete & Pending” screens from main menu item # 7.
Figure 128
Orders to Schedule Patient Procedures.
Figure 129
Orders for Follow-Up Appointments.
117
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: SCHEDULE FOLLOW-UP APPOINTMENTS. See Figure 129 above.
Information through prompt #10 is completed for you by the system, based on the providers order.
Once you have made the follow-up appointment (via the QuickMenu), choose prompt #11 from the
change prompt to record the date of the appointment.
If you do not indicate that the appointment has been made as described above, then this order will be
stored for later processing in the “Orders Incomplete & Pending” screens from main menu item # 7.
OPTIONAL SCREEN FOR: PATIENT INSTRUCTIONS – TAKEOFF. See Figure 130 below. All those
patient information documents requested by the provider for you to hand out on patient exit will be
presented to you. As you hand out these documents, go to the change prompt and indicate which line
item you need to update as given. You indicate the document has been given by placing <y> in the
first field of the second half of the multi-value prompt. The system will then place the user and the time
done.
If you do not indicate that the materials have been handed out, then this order will be stored for later
processing in the “Orders Incomplete & Pending” screens from main menu item # 7.
Figure 130
Orders for Patient Instructions and Information Handouts.
FINAL EXIT SCREEN--AUTOMATIC EXIT PROMPTS. See Figure 131 below.
First prompt:
Print Active Problems, Medications, and PMHx? (<enter>=Yes/n=No). Hit <enter> or enter <y>
to print the Active Problems, Medications, and PMHx ( Past Medical History) list. Enter <n> to skip
printing.
118
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Second prompt:
Print the Visit Review? (<enter>=Yes/n=No). Hit <enter> or <y> to print the Visit Review, or hit <n>
to skip printing.
Third prompt:
This will either say: “The Bill will be Sent Electronically” if the insurance carrier file for this carrier is
indicated to be sent electronically, or “Print the Bill? (<enter>=Yes/n=No)” if it is not. If the latter, hit
<enter> or enter <y> to print the Bill, or hit <n> to skip printing.
The second half of this screen will indicate if the system found a problem with required authorizations.
If it is found that a procedure code (CPT, HCPCS, or other) is indicated to require a prior authorization
in the insurance carrier file, and no valid prior authorization is found in the patient file for this
procedure, then the bill will be suspended and placed in the file of “Bills Needing Prior Authorization”.
This suspended list of bills can then be processed later by going to prompt #10 (with the same title) on
the “Billing” screen. This prevents bills being sent that will be automatically refused by the insurance
carrier.
Figure 131
Final Billing Exit screen.
NON-VISIT BILLING SCREEN
Select menu item #2, “Non-Visit Billing”, from the main billing screen. This will bring up the Non-Visit
billing screen as seen in Figure 132 below.
Here, you first enter part of the patient's name to do a cross-reference lookup. The screen then
changes ( as shown in Figure 133 below) showing the bill number and defaults the family provider's
initials.
119
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 132
Initial Non-Visit Billing screen.
Figure 133
Non-Visit Bill with Defaulted Family Provider.
If this is the correct provider, just hit <enter>. Otherwise enter the initials of the provider that provided
the service, or part of that provider's name for a cross-reference lookup. In the example below ( Figure
134) when “john” is entered you get the following Pop-Up selection screen.
120
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 134
COPYRIGHT 2004
Pop-Up Provider Selection screen for Non-Visit Billing.
Upon selecting line #2 ,the provider's initials are placed in prompt #2, and you are next stopped at
prompt #3 ( see Figure 135). Here you are asked if this is the correct family associated with this
patient for billing purposes. If it is, answer <y>, and you will then proceed to the insurance selection
screen as in the Primary Billing screens.
Figure 135
Verify Correct Family for Non-Visit Bill.
121
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
You will notice in this example that “See Family Notes” is in red ( and flashing when on-line). If you
know what this is about, you do not need to investigate, otherwise hit the <F4> key to go to the
QuickMenu to access the Family file and review the family notes.
In the next screen ( Figure 136) you will be able to enter up to four (4) diagnosis codes for billing.
Always make the most significant diagnosis the first one. Start by entering part of the diagnosis
description or shortcut description, as shown below.
Figure 136
Entering Non-Visit Billing Diagnoses.
Entering “htnb”, resulted in a “direct hit” on Essential Hypertension Benign, as shown in Figure 137
below. On the following line we entered “dm” for diabetes, and get a cross-reference lookup as shown
in Figure 138 below.
In this case simply highlight the diagnosis you want (or enter the line number) and hit <enter> to select.
Please note that all diagnoses presented for selection are to the highest level of specificity and are
checked for age and sex appropriateness. If a diagnosis is selected that is inappropriate, based on
the patient's age or sex, one of the following messages will be presented at the bottom of the screen:
Diagnosis is not possible for this patient's age, return to continue
OR
This Dx not possible for pt. Sex, return to continue
You will then be forced to select again or end input.
Once the diagnoses have been entered, you will be placed at the change prompt where you will be
able to Add, Change, Delete, or Insert diagnoses. In the screen shown in Figure 139 below we, have
added the diagnosis for appendicitis.
122
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 137
Figure 138
COPYRIGHT 2004
Entering a Partial Description for Diagnosis Lookup.
Selecting a Diagnosis.
You will notice that the Non-Visit billing screens do not have the “F9-VisRev” screen to review the
associated visit. This is because there is no associated visit note to review, by definition, in a Non
123
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 139
COPYRIGHT 2004
Completed Diagnoses screen for Non_Visit Billing.
-Visit” bill. This type of bill is generally used for a hospital procedure such as an appendectomy, where
the provider documents the procedure in the hospital records, to which you generally do not have
access. The Non-Visit Billing can also be used for office visits in the rare case that the note was never
completed. The Non-Visit Bill is also used for charging for a service or supply not billed at the time of
the visit, or that was independent of the visit. Further, Non-Visit Billing can also be used for nursing
home or emergency room charges, that were not entered via the Non-Scheduled Provider Visit
system.
However, there are two additional F-Keys, “F7=Charges” and “F10=DX”. These two keys are for going
back to the Charges screen or the Diagnosis screen if you realize that you need to add something are
make a correction before completing the bill.
The next screen you are automatically taken to is the “Patient charges” screen, as seen in Figure 140.
In this screen, you enter part of the description of the procedure in the first field of the multi-value line.
You will then either get a direct hit, or a selection screen from which to choose the proper procedure to
be billed.
Once the charge is picked, you will taken to the specific charge window, as seen in Figure 141. In this
case, we have picked the procedure code for Appendectomy. Now you must go through prompts #1
through #5.
Prompt #1, “Dx Code:” As seen in Figure 141 below, a selection screen pops up with the diagnoses
you previously entered. If you do not find the diagnosis needed in the list of this pop-up, then select
one of these temporarily. Then, after completing the remaining prompts on this screen, use the
“F10=DX” key mentioned above to insert the diagnosis. Come back to this screen again by going to
this item on the Patient Charges screen in the Change mode and replace with the correct diagnosis.
Prompt #2, “Date of Service:”, hit <enter> to take the default of today's date, or enter at least the
124
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
month and date.
Figure 140
Adding Charges to Non-Visit Billing.
Figure 141
Adding a Diagnosis to Charge screen.
Prompt #3, “Place of Service:”, here you must select from the “Place of service” pop-up screen (Page
down or arrow down to see all of the choices.), as seen in Figure 142 below.
125
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 142
COPYRIGHT 2004
Place of Services screen for Non-Visit Billing.
Prompt #4, “Name of Service Facility:”, is another pop-up window, as seen in Figure 143, with the
places of service available for you to select from based on the clinics listed in your clinic file. Please
note that the clinic file also is used for hospitals, nursing homes, and any other facility where care
may be rendered.
Figure 143
Selecting Service Facility for Non-Visit Billing.
126
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Prompt #5, “Modifiers:”, here you may enter up to four, two digit, modifiers manually. You can also
hit the <F9> key “F9=See and Select Modifiers”, to get a pop-up with all modifiers listed, from which
you can select up to four. An example of this is seen below in Figure 144.
Figure 144
Selecting Modifiers for Non-Visit Billing.
To select from this multi-select pop-up, press <return> to select (a star “*” will be placed or
removed) or <end> to accept the starred selections.
Prompt #6, “Multiplier:”, hit <enter> to take the default of one (1), or enter the number of times this
procedure was done. A number greater than one may be appropriate when the provider repeats a
procedure multiple times as in Acne surgery with multiple lesions.
The screen shown in Figure 145 comes up next, showing the completed charge item line for the first
procedure. Now additional charges can be added to this bill if appropriate ( in this example, this
charge generally would be submitted by itself). In a missed office visit, being billed as a Non-Visit
bill, it might include other charges for lab test and supplies, etc.
The “F6=Narrative” screen is the same as the primary billing discussed earlier.
Exiting from the Non-Visit Billing screen is the same as in the Primary Billing, except there are no
Optional Exit Screens of orders to process, since there is no associated visit note.
SECONDARY BILLING SCREEN
Select menu item #3, “Secondary Billing”, from the main billing screen. Enter in part of the patient's
name in the screen shown in Figure 146 below. Then a selection list will appear if not a direct hit.
Once the proper patient is selected, a pop-up screen showing prior bills will be shown, as seen in
Figure 147.
127
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 145
Completed Charge Item Line for Non-Visit Billing.
Figure 146
Select Patient for Secondary Billing.
Now select the bill you would like to bill secondarily or resubmit. These are called “Unit Bills”, and may
each contain one or more charges each. They can represent “Primary Bills” from Office Visits, or NonVisit encounters, or Non-Visit bills. They each represent a specific patient encounter. Once selected,
the screen seen in Figure 148 is presented.
128
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 147
Figure 148a
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection of Prior Bill for Secondary Billing.
Secondary Billing Screen.
This screen has 4 sections. The first section gives the patient and responsible party, as well as the
provider of the service. The second section, “Patient Charges”, lists one or more charges associated
with that encounter. This section is a multi-valued change prompt so that you can make changes, but
to the modifier field only. Upon selecting a charge in this second section ( which you may or may not
129
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
want to do), the following screen ( Figure 148) will open to allow a change or addition of a modifier.
Figure 148
Changing Modifier for Secondary Billing.
Going into prompt #1 in this screen will allow a change or addition to the modifier. In this example we
added modifier “24” for “Unrelated E/M in same postop period” which results in the change seen in
Figure 149, which now shows the modifier “24” that was selected.
Figure 149
Modifier Change for Secondary Billing.
130
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Next we go to the third section of this screen, “Previous Insurances Billed:”. Here ( Figure 149) we
can look at the insurance document that was billed by selecting the appropriate line number, if more
than one is listed. This is the same as looking at these insurance documents in the billing screens.
Finally, we get to section four, “New Billing:”, which is a one value, multi-valued prompt. At the
change prompt in this section, enter <2> to bring up the selection screen for all insurances available
for this patient and family. You will then be presented with the following pop-up screen ( Figure 150) to
select the appropriate insurance to bill. The individual insurance type documents are always
presented first, followed by any group insurances from the family file.
Figure 150
Selecting Insurance for Secondary Billing.
After the proper insurance is indicated, a pop-up screen ( Figure 151) is presented asking if the bill
should be printed now. All secondary billing is done via paper. Medigap approved secondary policies
are automatically billed via the carriers if the initial bill is sent electronically.
If you were to go back into these screens again to re-bill, you will see that the prior billing is
documented, as is seen below in Figure 152.
RE-PRINT OFFICE VISIT BILLS SCREEN
Select menu item #4, Re-print Office Visit Bills, from the main billing screen. The screen shown in
Figure153 will be presented. If you enter a bill for reprinting which has not been processed, as done in
this example, then you will get a warning message at the bottom of the screen telling you that the bill
for that visit number “has not yet been processed” yet. If you go to the primary billing screen, you will
see it there waiting to be processed.
If you select a bill that has been processed, the bill will be printed as soon as you enter the line
number.
131
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 151
Figure 152
COPYRIGHT 2004
Printing Secondary Billing.
Review of Added Secondary Billing.
132
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 153
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selecting a Bill for Reprinting.
RE-PRINT NON-VISIT BILLS SCREEN
Select menu item #5, “Re-print Non-Visit Bills”, from the main billing screen. The screen seen in
Figure 154 will be presented:
Figure 154
Select Non-Visit Bill to Reprint.
133
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Simply enter the line number of the visit to print, and it will be printed immediately.
BILLS TO BE CORRECTED/DELETED SCREEN
Select menu item #6, “Bills to be Corrected/Deleted”, from the main billing screen. The screen in
Figure 155 will be presented.
Figure 155
Selecting Bills to be Corrected or Deleted, Not Yet Sent.
On selection of Menu item #1, “Correct Rejected Bills. (Electronic)”, you will be taken to the screen
shown in Figure 156.
In prompt #1, you will either have a defaulted number for the “Unit_BILL Number:”, or no number in
this prompt's input field. If you see a number, then there is a Unit_Bill to be corrected. To see the
errors and make corrections to this bill, just hit <enter>.
If there is no number, then there are no Unit_Bills that need correction. Just hit <F1> to “end” and
return to the prior screen.
In the above example, after hitting the <enter> key, you are presented with the Unit_Bill information,
and the preprocessing error report. In this case a single error was found: “Policy ID blank on
Insurance Document.”. If their was more than one error, they would all be presented on this screen, so
that you can fix all the errors at one time, and then reprocess the bill automatically.
To correct the errors, you can use the F-Keys to navigate through the supporting documents that need
correction. Besides the general “F4” or QuickMenu key, there are 4 F-keys that will take you to the
indicated area and return you back to this same screen when you have made the corrections.
134
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 156
COPYRIGHT 2004
Correcting Electronic Billing Errors.
Specifically:
F6=Fam: Will take you to the family file for this patient.
F7=Car: Will take you to the carrier file used in this Unit_Bill.
F9=InsDoc: Will take you to the insurance document referenced for this Unit_Bill.
F10=RefDoc: Will take you to the referring provider file.
In this example, you would hit the <F9> key to go to the insurance document in question, add in the
policy ID number, and return. On return, hit <F1> to “end” input and get the next screen seen in Figure
157.
If you answer <y> to the first question ( in Figure 157) on the pop-up screen, then the system will
reprocess this Unit_Bill to be sent electronically. It will then delete this record from the errors file and
bring you to the next Unit_Bill requiring correction, if any. The bill will be reprocessed before being
sent out electronically the next day. If you haven't made all the required corrections, you will be
presented with the Unit_Bill again the next day.
If you answer <n> to the first question above, you will be placed at the second question in the pop-up
above, “Delete this record without reprocessing:”. If you answer <n>, then the record will be left
here for later processing. If you answer <y>, then you will be presented with the following pop-up
screen question:
“You are about to delete this reminder record without posting an Electronic Bill or printing a
Bill. Do you still want to DELETE(y/n)?”
Answering <y> will delete this bill. Answering <n> will leave this bill for the next time you come back to
correct Unit_Bills. If you really want to delete this bill answer <y>. If you delete this bill, it will not affect
the charges in the Family Ledger. So if this is not sent, you should at least send this bill out from the
135
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
family ledger as a secondary billing, or no bill will ever be sent to the insurance carrier. Or, correct the
charges off the Family Ledger if these charges were an error.
Figure 157
Delete or Reprocess Electronic Bill with Error.
On selection of Menu item #2 from “Bills to Correct/Delete” menu screen above ( Figure 155), “Delete
Bills not yet Sent. (Electronic)”, you will be taken to the following screen ( Figure 158) after being
asked for a management password to allow access to this area.
Figure 158
Selecting Electronic Bill to be Deleted.
136
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
At the selection prompt, enter the line number of the bill you want to delete before it can be processed
for electronic transmission. You will then be presented with the following pop-up ( Figure 159):
Figure 159
Verify Electronic Bill Before Sending.
If you really want to delete this bill answer <y>. If you delete this bill, it will not affect the charges in the
Family Ledger. So if this is not sent, you should at least send this bill out from the family ledger as a
secondary billing, or no bill will ever be sent to the insurance carrier. Or correct the charges off the
Family Ledger if these charges were an error.
On selection of Menu item #3 from “Bills to Correct/Delete” menu screen above ( Figure 155), the
“Delete Unprocessed Bills.”, you will be taken to the screen shown in Figure 160, after being asked
for a management password to allow access to this area.
Figure 160
Delete UnProcessed Bills.
At the selection prompt, enter the line number of the bill you want to delete that has not yet been
processed from the “Primary Billing” screen. You will then be presented with the pop-up screen in
Figure 161.
137
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 161
COPYRIGHT 2004
Delete Unprocessed Bill.
If you answer <y>, this Unit_Bill will be deleted and no charges will be entered in the Family Ledger,
nor will any bills be sent out. In this case, you must capture any charges by entering them by way of
the Non-Visiting billing screens.
On selection of Menu item #4 from “Bills to Correct/Delete” menu screen above ( Figure 155), the
“Remove Processing lock on a Bill.”, you will be taken to the screen shown in Figure 162, after
being asked for a management password to allow access to this area.
Figure 162
Remove Processing Lock on a Bill.
In the above screen ( Figure 162), any bills that are being processed will have the patient's name
replaced with the word “Pending”. If this continues to stay here on repeated returns over time, then
this is probably a bill that hasn't completed processing. On the Primary Billing screen it may indicate
billed, but remain there on subsequent entries to that screen, which indicates a locked record. This
can happen if in the process of working on a primary bill, the client PC that you are using crashes, gets
turned off, or you close the client session without completing the screens and coming back to a login
138
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
prompt.
Review Bills Sent
Select menu item #7, “Review Bills Sent”, from the main billing screen. The screen in Figure 163 will
be presented.
Figure 163
Review Bills Sent Electronically.
On selection of Menu item #1, “See Bills sent by Date.”, you will be taken to the following screen
shown in Figure 164.
Figure 154
Review Bills Sent Electronically.
Prompt #1, “Date of Transmission:”, enter a date to bring up a list of electronic bills sent on that date.
Electronic bills are sent out the day after they are billed. Any bills listed would have been billed out the
day before or previously. The automated program which sends the bills "believes" the bills to have
been sent if they are on the list. Your response report or remittance from the payer is the only
guarantee the claim was received.
139
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
At the Multi-value change prompt: “Visit Number”, select a bill by its Line Item number. This will take
you to that bill's claim data. There, you can find a bill's File ID and other such information, as seen
in Figure 165 below:
Figure 165
Record of Electronic Bill Transmitted.
Just above the F-Keys listed on the bottom of this screen, is the “Date sent electronically:” This will
be populated by the system once sent electronically. The F-keys on the bottom of the screen can be
used to look at the different components of information sent with this bill.
F3, Additional Billing Information, eg Referring Provider, employer name
F6, Indian Health Service Information
F7, Information on Legal Representative if other than the Patient
F9, Insurance Information
F10, Accident Information
F11, Charges and diagnoses
F12, Will take you to any reported errors by the carrier, once the response report is received from that
carrier.
On selection of Menu item #2 ( Figure 163), “View individual bill Data.” , you will be taken to the
screen shown in Figure 166 below.
Selection menu item #1, “Date bill sent electronically”, enter the date the bill was sent electronically
(usually the day after it was billed.) You may also enter the default, "ALL", to select on all electronic
bills sent.
Selection menu item #2, “Patient Number”, enter the patient number to select bills for that patient.
"ALL" will include all bills.
140
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection menu item #3, “File/Batch ID”, enter a File/Batch ID to review the bills sent under that ID.
"ALL" will include all bills. The resulting screen, as seen in Figure 167, will be presented repeatedly
for all bills selected. To stop reviewing bills, hit the <F1> key to “end”.
Figure 166
Figure 167
Select Bill Individual Bills Sent Electronically.
Individual Bill Sent Electronically.
Prompt #1, “Bill Num.:”, if you know the Bill/Visit number you are looking for, you can enter it here.
Otherwise, you can accept the defaulted bill number which will be in the set of bills you selected.
As you come out of a selected bill, the next selected bill in the set will be made available for review.
When a bill number is entered, the prompts on the screen will be populated with that bills details.
The main screen is primarily patient demographic data. You will find the File/Batch ID at the
bottom, right hand side of the screen, prompt 26. The following informational screens are also
141
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
available through F-Keys:
F3 - Additional Billing Information, eg Referring Provider, employer name
F6 - Indian Health Service Information
F7 - Information on Legal Representative if other than the Patient
F9 - Insurance Information
F10 - Accident Information
F11 - Charges and diagnoses
F12 - Electronic response error messages
Response Reports
Select menu item #8, “Response Reports”, from the main billing screen ( Figure 103). The screen in
Figure 168 will be presented:
Figure 168
Response Reports Selection Menu.
The selection of Menu item #1, “THIN Response Reports”, will allow you select and view Response
Reports uploaded into SmartDoctor® system from THIN. The sub selection menu is shown in
Figure 169 below.
Figure 169
Response Report Selection Menu.
142
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Menu selection item #1, “From:”, enter the beginning date for report date range selection, or accept
“TODAY” as default to only look at today’s reports.
Menu selection item #2, “To:”, enter the ending date for report date range selection, or accept
“TODAY” as default.
Menu selection item #3, “File/Batch”, enter the File/Batch ID of a claim file to select all reports
reporting on that file. A claim’s associated File/Batch ID may be referenced in the “View Individual
Bill Data” program found on the “Review Bills Sent” menu. The default, “ALL,” may be entered to
select on all File/Batch IDs.
Menu selection item #4, “Payor ID:”, enter the Payer/Carrier ID of an insurance carrier to select only
reports for that carrier, or accept the default, “ALL,” to select reports for all carriers. The
Payer/Carrier ID is the key (prompt 1) to that insurance carrier’s record in the “Carrier File,” prompt
22 off the Patient and Family Main Screen.
Menu selection item #5, “Provider Code:”, enter the Provider ID of a clinic provider to select only
reports for that provider, or accept the default, “ALL,” to select on all providers reports.
An example of the screen presented as a result of this selection is seen in Figure 170, below.
Figure 170
Viewing THIN Response Report.
If there were reports found within the selected set, their access information will be defaulted in
prompts 1-3. The user need only hit the <enter> key at each prompt to accept the default key for
the selected response report. When a valid response report key (date of download, File/Batch ID,
and Payer ID) has been entered, the system will display this response report. Pg Up, Pg Down, and
the up and down arrow keys can be employed to view reports which continue off the screen.
Among the common F-Keys available, F3 is also available to print the screen image.
143
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
After a report has been viewed, the user may hit the <enter> key or the <F1> key to come out of the
record and bring the next report in the selection set up for viewing.
The selection of Menu item #2 ( Figure 168), “Response Reports #2”, will allow you to view
Response Reports from other payers by date of download. The screen seen in Figure 171 will be
presented.
Figure 171
Select ClearingHouse
Please select a ClearingHouse by entering the number for the ClearingHouse/Payer from which you
would like to view reports. Otherwise, you may enter the number next to “Exit” to exit the program.
You will then be presented with the screen seen in Figure 172 to see the reports.
Figure 172
Select to See or Print Reports.
Then enter <1> to view reports, enter <2> to print reports, or enter <3> to exit.
You will next be prompted as follows:
Enter date of Response Reports in MM/DD/CCYY:
Upon entering <06/04/2004>, and <enter>, you will be prompted as follows:
Response Reports downloaded on 06/04/2004
1) mail.643.13303
2) mail.651.13303
Enter number to View, or q, to quit to Main Menu:
When the selection screens have been completed, a list of reports in your selection set will be
displayed ( as seen above). Enter the number of the report on the list to select it. Enter <q> to quit
to the main menu. These reports are displayed in the form they are received. No editing has been
done on the downloaded file. Some reports come in an 132 character format. The PowerTerm®
144
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
client software can be set to a 132 character display if necessary. Upon entering <1> ( above), the
following report is displayed ( Figure 173):
145
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 173
COPYRIGHT 2004
Sample Response Report.
The above report shows that there were 3 batches of charges sent in 3 files, with a total of 8 claims.
There were no rejections.
Figure 174
Response Reports Cont.
146
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
The last page above is the summary of errors, in this case none.
To page through this report, just hit the <enter> key.
To go up, hit the <-> “minus” key followed by <enter>. To quit looking at the report, hit <q> to quit.
Upon entering <2> above, the second report is shown. This is the transmission report, is seen
below in Figure 175.
Report for BXB32038B, submission id: p6447154.323342 (200406020316.3)
Initial transmission successful. For a more complete review
of your transmission and final acceptance, please review your
997 functional acknowledgment(s) in your CABBS mailbox the next
business day.
GS-GE segment: 837 version 004010X098A1: Claim(s) counted
Total number of 837 claim(s) received this transmit
(EOF):
Figure 175
:3
:3
Transmission Report.
After reviewing the reports, hit <q> to quit and go back to the previous screen. Once finished
reviewing all reports, enter the number next to “Exit” on the “Select a ClearingHouse” screen to exit.
APPOINTMENTS NEEDING PRIOR AUTHORIZATION
Select menu item #9 , “Appts. Needing Prior Authorization”, from the main billing screen (Figure
103). The screen seen in Figure 176 will be presented.
Figure 176
Appointments Needing Prior Authorization.
147
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
If any prior authorization appeared to be needed during an appointment scheduling, and you indicated
you wanted a reminder to get a prior authorization, then a record will be waiting in the file for
completion. If there are no records requiring a prior authorization, then prompt #1, “Sequence
Number:”, will be blank.
If a “Sequence Number” is shown, then by simply hitting the <enter> key the screen will be populated
with the needed information, as well as a pop-up of any individual insurance companies, as shown in
Figure 177 below.
Figure 177
Choosing Insurance for Prior Authorization.
Choose the appropriate insurance carrier from those presented. Then the screen shown in Figure
178, with additional information for contacting the insurance carrier, will be presented.
With the insurance carrier name and phone number now presented in prompt #2, you can call the
insurance carrier to obtain the remaining information needed in the subsequent multi-valued prompt.
In the first field of that prompt, you can enter a partial description of the procedure needed based on
the information in the “Symptom/Reason” prompt. A cross-reference lookup will be done for you, so
you do not need to know the procedure number ahead of time. Then enter the Prior Authorization
Number, Who Issued with an extension number if appropriate, the date the procedure can first be
performed, the last date the procedure can be performed, the original number of times the procedure
is authorized, and the remaining number to be preformed.
Next a pop-up screen is presented asking the following two questions:
1. Post to file and delete this record? .
2. Delete this record without posting?
148
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 178
Entering Prior Authorization Information.
For the first prompt, enter <y> if you want to post the Prior Authorization information to the patient's
insurance document file and delete this record. Enter <n> if you are not finished or you do not want to
post the information at this time.
If you answer <y> at the first prompt, the second prompt will be skipped since the record will
automatically be posted and deleted. If you answer <n> at the first prompt, you will then be placed at
the second prompt. At the second prompt, if you indicate <y> to “Delete this record without
posting?”, then a subsequent screen will pop-up with the following warning:
You are about to delete this reminder record without
posting a Prior Authorization to the Insurance Doc.
1. Do you still want to DELETE(y/n)? .
If you want to delete this record because you do not need a prior authorization, then answer <y>.
Else, if you want to leave this reminder in the file and exit, answer <n>.
This information will be place in the individual's prior authorization section of the associated insurance
document on normal exit from this screen. The result of posting the above prior authorization is shown
below ( in Figure 179) in the patient's insurance document.
BILLS NEEDING PRIOR AUTHORIZATION
Select menu item #10, “Bills Needing Prior Authorization”, from the main billing screen ( Figure
103). You will then be placed in a screen that is identical and processed in the same way as in
prompt #9, “Appts. Needing Prior Authorization”, above (Figure 179). However, this queuing is a result
of the billing process when a required prior authorization is not found at the time of billing. The bill is
suspended and placed in this queue for later processing, once the prior authorization has been
149
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
obtained. Once the prior authorization information is completed, the system will ask you if want to
process the bill and delete this record, similar to the preceding section.
Figure 179
Completing the Prior Authorization Request.
PRINT GROUPED BILLS
Select menu item #11, “Print Grouped Bills”, from the main billing screen ( Figure 103).
A screen will be presented titled: “Group Billing Report”. At the bottom of the screen will be the
standard screen print options:
Enter (S)creen, (P)rinter, (B)oth, (F)ile, or (O)ther printer : S
Enter <p> to print the bills.
DAILY ADMIN
Select menu item #12, “Daily Admin”, from the main billing screen ( Figure 103).
The following screen shown in Figure 180 will be presented.
Meaning of “Daily System Monitor” screen information:
Backup
Good, indicates that a verified back-up was performed successfully. You must take a
copy of the backup media off site for storage. This will insure that you have a good
backup copy of all your data should the building burn down, or if someone steals the
150
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
server.
Figure 180
Daily System Monitor screen.
Bad, indicates that the backup has failed. Check the the media was in the backup
device and that it was not set on write-protect. If no apparent cause is found, call your
hardware support personnel, system administrator, or IMS immediately.
Posting
Good, indicates that an integrity check of all accounting information from the beginning of
time was done, and was successful. This check involves comparing all items in the
Family Ledger to that of the Charge Item file and the DailyPost file. This makes sure that
not only todays data is intact and balances, but all the data from system initialization.
Other systems are not as comprehensive, so that previous data may be damaged and
will not be discovered until the old information is reviewed. This cannot happen with the
SmartDoctor® system.
Bad, indicates a failure. This is most commonly caused by the system being down or
turned off at the scheduled time that this checking is to take place. If this is the case, as
in a one day power outage, then you can correct this easily. Go to the main front office
menu and select menu item #11, “Daily Accounting”. Then on the “Daily Accounting”
menu select #1, “Proof of Posting”. For the proof of posting date, enter a date at least
two days before the day of failure. If this is successful, repeat this again for each
subsequent date through yesterday's date. All users should be off the system while
doing this. If proof of posting fails again, call IMS.
Free Disk Space
Good, indicates that there is greater than 20 percent free disk space. This is satisfactory
151
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
for normal system performance.
Bad, indicates less than 20 percent free disk space. System performance may start to
suffer. Call your system administrator, or hardware support person, to have this
corrected within the next week.
Corrupt Files
Good, indicates that all the system data files are in good order with no data corruption.
Bad, indicates that one or more data files are corrupted. THIS IS AN EMERGENCY.
Call IMS immediately. Stop using the system if possible. The most common case for
this is failing hardware.
Elec Billing
Good, means that the bills pending electronic transmission were processed and sent
successfully.
Bad, means the bills pending electronic transmission were not sent. Check that the
modem or network connections are intact and working. Be sure, if using a modem
that the phone line is connected. Be sure that this phone number can make long
distance calls. The best way to check the phone line is to connect a standard phone
to the line going to the modem and make a long distance call.
The problem can also be caused by the carrier or THIN not being able to accept files
because of a system problem on there side. However, any file not sent on a given day
will be held and sent again the next day with any other new files to send. If the
problem persists for more than one day call IMS.
Users Failing to Log Off
This is a multi-valued listing of all users that have not logged off the system at the time
of file integrity checking. This checking is generally done during early morning hours,
before 6 AM. Users generally should not be logged on at these times. Being logged
on during this time may prevent file tuning. The administrator will also get a separate
mail message regarding this problem. You should check with these users to ask why
they haven't logged off, or why they were on the system at these hours.
This problem may also rarely exist with a hung process that was not terminated
properly, such as turning off a PC on the network that was in an open document.
The system is set to kick off all idle users after a clinic-determined amount of time.
Therefore, all persistently logged on users should be investigated. Call your system
administrator or IMS.
152
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
CHAPTER 4 MANAGE PATIENT CARE
PATIENT SIGN-IN
When a patient arrives at the clinic, you must first sign that patient in. To do so, select menu item
#2, “Patient Sign-in”, from the clinic front office screen (Family & Patient File Maint.). You will be
taken to the screen shown in Figure 181 below.
Prompt #1, “Visit Number:”, will have the next visit number defaulted for you. You must except this
number by hitting <enter> to continue.
Figure 181
Patient Sign-In.
Prompt #2, “Patient Number (or partial Pt. Name):”, enter the patient number, or at least three
letters of the first or last name. You can narrow the search by giving more letters of the name, or
giving at least two additional letters of another name.
Prompt #3, “Check Family File? (y/n):”, if you want to review the Family file. i.e. check address,
phone numbers, etc., hit <enter>, or enter <Y>. To avoid seeing this information ( because you are
sure it is current), enter <N>. If you hit <enter> or <y>, you will be taken immediately to this
patient's family file and the “FAMILY FILE MAINTENANCE” screen. Here you will be in the inquire
mode, so that you do not accidentally make changes to that file. If you find the information is
incorrect, then you can correct it by hitting the <F4> key for the QuickMenu. Then then go to the
Family file in the change mode.
Prompt #4, “Provider initials:”, enter the providers initials or at least three letters of the provider
name for a selection list.
Prompt #5, “Symptom or Reason still the same?”. Ask the patient if the reason for the visit is the
same as initially scheduled, as indicated next to the heading “Symptom or Reason for
153
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Appointment:”. If it is, then answer <y>es. If the current problem the patient wants evaluated is
different, then answer <n>o.
Prompt #6, “Symptom or Reason at time of Visit:”. If you entered “yes” at prompt #5, then this
will be defaulted to the initial “Symptom or Reason for Appointment”. If you answered “no”, then
enter the symptom or at least three letters of the symptom to get a cross-reference lookup to select
from.
Prompt #7, “Is this a Work Comp. illness or injury?”, enter <y> if worker comp. related.
Otherwise, accept the default of “N”.
Prompt #8, “Is this ill. or inj. due to an auto accident?”, if this illness or injury was due to an auto
accident enter <y>. Otherwise, accept the default of “N”.
Prompt #9, “Is this ill. or inj. due to OTHER accident?”, enter <y>. Otherwise, accept the default
of “N”.
Prompt #10, “Ins. doc. to bill is #:”. When you get to this prompt, the insurance selection screen
will pop open automatically, as shown in Figure 182 below.
Figure 182
View Insurance Policies Available for this Patient.
You are initially placed at the change prompt “Look at Ins. Doc”, for the top half of the screen. The
multi-valued prompt here shows all the patients possible insurances, starting with the individual
insurances, followed by any HOH insurances. To see more information on any of these, enter the
line number at the prompt and hit enter. The insurance document screen for this document will be
presented. Once you are ready to go on an select one of these for billing, hit the <enter> key to
bring you to the second half of the screen and prompt #1, “Doc.”. This prompt automatically opens
up the insurance selection screen, as seen in Figure 183.
154
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 183
COPYRIGHT 2004
Choose Insurance to Bill.
Use the up and down arrows or enter the line number of the insurance document that will be used
for this visit and hit <enter>. In this case we chose the first one and now our screen appears as
shown in Figure 184.
Figure 184
Insurance Policy for Billing Selected.
You will then be at the “change prompt”. If you need to change the insurance policy enter <1> or
<a>, to get back to the selection screen, otherwise hit <enter>. You will then be returned to the
primary Sign-in screen with the selected insurance document number and insurance company
showing to the right of prompt #10, as shown in Figure 185..
At this time, if the insurance company selected requires prior authorizations for any procedures, a
warning message will be shown flashing at the bottom of the screen with the message “Please
check for need of Prior Authorization”. You can check the insurance carrier file to see what prior
155
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 185
COPYRIGHT 2004
Sign-in screen with Insurance Selected.
authorizations are required by this carrier by using the QuickMenu <F4> key. Then, the Insurance
Carrier File prompt to check out the carrier requirements. Otherwise, if this message is not shown,
or you feel this type of visit ( i.e. A cough evaluation.) would not need a prior authorization, then go
on to the next prompt.
Prompt #11, “Does the patient feel this visit is URGENT?”. Ask the patient if he/she feels this
problem to be evaluated or treated is URGENT. If the answer is “yes”, then enter <y>es. If not,
enter <n>o. If you place a “y” at this prompt, a flashing URGENT sign will start flashing on your
screen. You will also be asked to notify the nurse that the patient thinks this visit is urgent. This
flashing sign will also be on the nurse's screen and the provider's screen. If the answer was “n”,
then a steady message stating, “Notify the Nurse: the patient is here.”, will be shown.
Next a pop-up window, as shown in Figure 186, will show information from the insurance carrier file
regarding: Percent Paid by Patient, Deductible for Year, Basic Co-Pay per Visit, and any special
payment requirements for this carrier. Also, presented below this will be additional patient and
family specific payment information from the patient and family file that your office requested to be
shown on Sign-In & Billing screens.
Also now displayed is the balance due that is the patient's responsibility , the insurance carrier's
responsibility, and the combined amount.
The <F7> key, “PriorAuth”. This key allows you to bring up the patient's prior authorization screen
from the Patient file, if you would like to see if any prior authorizations exist.
The <F8> key, “Exit/No-Save”. This key will allow you to cancel everything you did up to this point
on this screen.
156
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 186
COPYRIGHT 2004
Window Showing Payment Information.
ENCOUNTER NOTES AND USER CLASSES
Any contact, communication, comment, note, message, or action taken regarding a patient is
documented via an encounter note. There are three types of encounters: “Non-Visit Encounter”,
“Provider Visit”, and “Non-Scheduled Provider Visit”. The “Non-Visit Encounter” type can be made
by one of three classes of users: Clerical ( or Administrative), Nursing, and Prescribing Providers (or
Doctors). The “Provider Visit”, and “Non-Scheduled Provider Visit” types can only be made by
Nursing, and Prescribing Providers. Depending on the user class, different functions are allowed on
the same screens. In addition, certain functions may not show up as an options to choose
depending on the provider class. For example, in the “Non-Visit Encounter”, the “Clerical” class will
not be presented with the opportunity to refill medications or the review the chart. The Nurse class
will be able to refill prescriptions approved by the doctor, but is otherwise unable to refill or write
prescriptions. The Nurse, however, may review the chart. The Prescribing Provider class has full
privileges.
The sign-out is also different depending on user class. For the clerical user, they just indicate that
they want to exit the note. The system will track the users actions. However, for the nursing and
prescribing provider classes, once they indicate they want to exit, they will be presented with a signout screen. To sign-out they must use their sign-out password. This acts as a signature stamp to
authenticate the note and actions taken.
NON-VISIT ENCOUNTER, CLERICAL USER
From the main front office screen (Family & Patient File Maint.), select menu item #5, “Non-Visit
Encounter”. This selection allows the clerical staff to enter Non-Visit encounter information, such
157
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
as a patient phone call, or notes for the chart. These communication's can be filed in the chart, or
forwarded on to the nurse or provider. For nursing and prescribing providers, the above information
can be entered, as well as to access the regular provider parts of the chart. Examples of use by
these classes of providers will be shown later in the Nursing and Provider sections of this manual.
On selecting this menu item, the screen shown in Figure 187 will be presented.
Figure 187
Non-Visit Encounter screen.
Prompt #1, “Contact Number:”, hit the “New Note”-<F9> key to get the next patient encounter
number. This is a system provided number that cannot be changed.
Prompt #2, “Patient Number:”, enter at least 3 characters of the patient's name for a crossreference search, or the patient's number. You will next be presented with a pop-up window asking
“Is this the correct PATIENT? (<ret>=Yes/n=No)”. If you answer <n>, then you will be kicked out
of this note and presented with a new “Non-Visit Encounter” screen. If you answer <y>, the pop-up
window will change to that shown in Figure 188, with the additional question of “Is this the correct
Address and Phone number?”. If you answer <n>, then you will be taken to the family
maintenance sub-menu screen for this family, to change the family address information. Upon
return you can proceed with the non-visit encounter note as shown below. If you answer yes, you
will proceed directly with the note as indicated below, see Figure 189 below..
You will note the patient's information is placed at the top of the screen. You will now be taken
through a set of pop-up selection screens to help you document the following information about the
contact with the patient: “Type of Contact”, “Person Making Contact”, and “Reason for Contact”.
These selections will fill in prompts 3, 4, and 5 for you. The selection options presented can be
changed for your clinic. If you would like these changed, have your clinic manager contact IMS.
These selection lists are in the TERMS file with the following three corresponding records:
”CONTACT-TYPE”, “CONTACT-INDIV”, “CONTACT-REASON”.
158
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 188
Figure 189
COPYRIGHT 2004
Verify Correct Patient and Address window.
Non-Visit window for Type of Contact.
Prompt #6, “Refer to:”, if you hit the <enter> key here, the system will default “Note for File”. You
should only use “Note for File” if you want to document something that needs no further attention,
for example, to document that you called the patient to remind her of a blood test she needs to
repeat in the AM. This note will not be referred on to anyone else. Any note that needs to be
referred on to the nurse or doctor should be sent specifically to that person. You can enter either
the providers initials, part of the providers name (for a provider cross-reference look up), or hit the
<F10> key-”PLst” to bring up the provider selection window shown in Figure 190.
159
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 190
COPYRIGHT 2004
Provider Selection window.
160
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
To summarize, your options are:
1. Press <return> for a note directed to the Patient's file.
2. Press F10 for a complete list of Providers.
3. Enter a partial name for a cross-reference search.
If this search fails, then the Provider list will be displayed from which you can choose.
The following screen ( Figure 191) shows the result of selecting the provider, and then entering the
optional call back phone number and time to call back.
Figure 191
Completed Non-Visit Note Information.
Now hit the <F9> key to enter the “Message” as seen in Figure 192.
161
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 192
COPYRIGHT 2004
Non-Visit Note Message screen.
If you are finished, hit the <F1> key to return to the prior screen. You can return here any time
before you exit this contact note by hitting the <F9> key again. Once complete, from the contact
note screen, hit <F1> to end and exit the note. You will then be presented with the exit screen as
seen in Figure 193.
Figure 193
Exit of Non-Visit Encounter Note.
162
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
You will be presented with each question above sequentially. Hitting <enter> or <y> will get you to
the next prompt regarding printing of this note. Answer appropriately.
The note will then be sent either to the chart or to the provider, depending on what you indicated in
prompt #6 (Refer to:).
PAST MEDICAL HISTORY
From the front office menu screen ( Family & Patient File Maint.), menu item #6, “Past Medical
History”, will allow clerical entry of the patient's past medical history. This screen can be used by
all user classes. However, it requires a specific user password given only to those authorized to
enter and see this type of data. Upon selecting this menu option, the screen seen in Figure 194 will
be presented.
Figure 194
Figure 195
Initial Past Medical History screen for Front Office.
Past Medical History screen.
163
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Picking selection #1, “Add to Past Medical History”, will then bring you to the screen shown in
Figure 195.
Prompt #1, “Enter Patient Number:”, enter the patient's number or at least three letters of the
patient's name for a cross-reference lookup. The patient information will then be populated. Once
you are sure you have the correct patient, you can proceed to enter the Past Medical History using
the screen shown in Figure 196. If this is not the correct patient, then hit the <F8> key-”NoSave”, to
exit without saving any changes to the record.
Figure 196
Past Medical History screen with Patient Selected.
At the change Prompt, enter the number of the corresponding area you want to work on, or hit <a>
( for ALL) to be taken through each area sequentially. ALL changes to ADD screens for all Past
Medical History section below are done by adding. This includes deleting an entry. How to delete
an entry will be shown later.
PROMPT #2, “ADD PAST MEDICAL & SOCIAL PROBS.(Y/N)”, enter <y> + <enter> to add or
review past medical problems. The screen shown in Figure 197 will be presented.
You will be at the change prompt of the multi-valued prompt to add past diagnoses for this patient.
Hit <a> to add a diagnosis to the past medical history.
After hitting the <a> for add, you will be placed in the first field of this multi-valued prompt. Here you
should enter part of the description of the diagnosis you want. It is best to find the the diagnosis
code by the cross-reference method rather than entering a diagnosis code number. This is
because, as codes get changed, deleted, or modified by the organizations responsible for them.
The old code numbers may no longer be correct. By looking the code up with the cross-reference
system, you will be presented with all the current codes. See the System's file section of this
manual for methods to speed up cross-reference searches. As an example, if we entered “htn” for
hypertension, the selection list pop-up window shown in Figure 198 is seen.
164
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 197
Figure 198
COPYRIGHT 2004
Adding to Past Medical Problems.
Diagnosis Selection List.
In this case, we selected code 401.1. A short cut to this specific code could have been defined as
“htnb”, for “Hypertension Benign”, which would have resulted in a direct “hit”. Again, see the
systems file discussion later in this manual. In the screen shown in Figure 199 below, the results of
this selection and a second cross-reference lookup using “ref es” for “reflux esophagitis”, is
presented.
The system checks for appropriateness of the diagnosis for sex and age. If the sex is not possible,
you will be blocked from accepting it and will get the following warning:
This Dx not possible for pt. Sex, return to continue
165
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 199
COPYRIGHT 2004
Past Medical Problems with Diagnoses Added.
If the age is not appropriate for the date you gave ( the original date the diagnosis was established),
then you will be blocked from accepting it and will get the following warning:
Onset not possible for this pt's age on that date, return to continue
When you are finished adding diagnoses, hit the <F1> to “end” input. If you get stuck in the last
field, because you cannot specify a good date, then you can always enter <top> to top out of a
record without saving. This is equivalent to the <F8> key on most screens.
ADDING A DATE
In adding date information to the patient's file, if the exact date is not know, the use the following
method to enter the approximate date: If the month is not known, use 01/01 for the month and day.
Otherwise use the approximate day and year. In the above example, the dates of “01/01/97” and
“01/01/98”, would most likely represent the approximate, rather than the actual date. In the
example given below for past surgeries, the date is the actual date of the procedure.
DELETING A CODE
The method to delete in this section, can also be applied to the following sections, and the system
in general. To delete a clinical entry, ADD a “DELETE” in the add field ( or in the case of
appointments, a “CANCEL”).
Upon entering delete in the first add field, you will be placed in the “Del #” field ( skipped normally
with regular adding). Here, you enter the Number of the line containing the diagnosis you want to
cancel. The resulting screen is shown in Figure 200.
However, after leaving this screen and coming back to it again, it refreshes with all current the
information. Please note the changes in line #2, in the refreshed screen seen in Figure 201 below,
in comparison to the prior screen shown in Figure 200.
166
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 200
Past Medical Problems screen with Deleted Code.
Figure 201
Past Medical History screen with Updated Information.
In this way, information entered in the past is never lost. This information will always stay in the add
screens. However, in the review screens that will be seen below, the deleted information will not be
shown to avoid confusion and clutter.
167
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
If you would like to see who entered the information previously, go on to prompt #3, “See Security
screen(Y/N)?”, and enter <y>. The security screen seen in Figure 202 will be presented, showing
the user, date, and time of entry for each line added:
Figure 202
Past Medical history Security screen.
You can now tell who added each code, and who deleted any code, if any were deleted.
PROMPT #3, “ADD PAST SURGERIES & PROCEDURES (Y/N)”, enter <y> + <enter> to add or
review past Procedures ( Surgeries). In the following example ( Figure 203), a surgical procedure
has already been added, in the same manner as in the diagnosis screen above:
Figure 203
Past Surgeries screen.
PROMPT #4, “Add Allergies (Y/N)”, enter <y> + <enter> to add or see past Allergies. In the
168
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
following example, seen in Figure 204, an allergy has already been added in the same manner as
done in the “ADD PAST MEDICAL & SOCIAL PROBS” discussed above.
Figure 204
Adding Allergies to Past Medical History.
Allergic reactions in the SmartDoctor® system are defined as two distinct types: Minor and Major.
“MINOR” means: Nausea with little or no vomiting, or local swelling, or rash, all without fever.
“MAJOR” means: Systemic, or severe, or anaphylactic, or with shortness of breath, or with Cardiac
problems.
To enter an allergic reaction, enter the product or substance producing a problem. Often the
product the patient has a reaction to may be a combination of two or more substances. The system
will only look at the first compound of any given product as the compound class causing the
reaction. So you must check with the doctor before, to be sure you know which is the correct
compound to list as the allergy. For example, if a patient takes Tylenol with codeine product and
develops severe constipation, the most likely cause is the codeine and not the Tylenol
( acetaminophen) component. In the example below, we entered “tyl cod” in the Substance field.
We are then presented with the cross-reference selection window seen in Figure 205.
Upon selecting line # 2 in Figure 205, the allergy screen is populated as shown in Figure 206. At
this point you can see listed under the “Compound Class” field, the partial list of compounds the
product contains. In this case, “OPIOIDS ACETAMINOPHE”. Only the first compound listed will be
stored in the system. This can be seen on exiting and then coming back to this screen ( screen
refresh), as seen in Figure 207. Only Opioids is listed under Compound Class.
Once you select a substance you must pick a reaction type as discussed above. However, if at this
time you realize that this is not the substance or the compound class you want, you will not be able
to backup or up arrow. If you try, you will get the following message:
“You cannot go back at this point. <Return> to continue.”
169
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 205
Selecting Substance Causing Allergy.
Figure 206
Selecting Reaction Type.
The choices you have here are to hit the <F8> key to exit or enter <top> to top out ( exit) or except
this entry, and then add a “delete” following this to delete the entry as in “ ADD PAST MEDICAL &
SOCIAL PROBS” above.
If your doctor tells you that the allergy was due to the acetaminophen component, them you would
need to add Tylenol or acetaminophen by itself, and not Tylenol with codeine as the substance.
PROMPT #5, “Add Immunizations (Y/N)”, enter <y> + <enter> to add or see “Immunizations”. In
the following example (Figure 208), an allergy has already been added, in the same manner as in
the “ADD PAST MEDICAL & SOCIAL PROBS” screen above.
170
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 207
Allergy screen After Refresh.
Figure 208
Adding Immunizations.
Hit the <enter> key as indicated to see a list of possible immunizations. This list is defined in the
TERMS file in the “ADM-IMMUNE” record. Talk to your system administrator to make changes to
this list. An example of the pop-up selection window is shown in Figure 209.
The immunization followed by “*REFUSED” is to be used to indicate that the patient was asked to
get the immunization as recommended, however, the patient refused. This avoids having the
provider being asked about the patient's failure to have this immunization documented in the chart
during cyclic time periods for this immunization. For example, if we choose “Flu” from this pop-up
171
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 209
COPYRIGHT 2004
Immunization Selection.
window, then the the provider will not be prompted again during this period if today's date is
indicated. This would also be the case if we picked “Flu*REFUSED”. To see other immunization
that are available to select by using the “page up” or “page down” keys, in addition to the up and
down arrow keys. The example of picking “Flu” and entering a date (or accepting the default of
today's date) results in the screen shown in Figure 210.
Figure 210
Immunization Added.
When finished entering immunizations, hit the <F1> key to “end” or exit.
PROMPT #6, “Add Reproductive History (Y/N)”, enter <y> + <enter> to add or see the patient's
reproductive history. You will only be allowed into this screen for female patients. In the example
seen in Figure 211, the prior reproductive history can be seen. On attempting to add an updated
reproductive history, the system will force you to delete the prior multi-value line that is still active,
since it would be illogical to have two reproductive histories on the same patient. You will be given
a warning as seen on the bottom of the following screen if this is attempted.
172
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 211
COPYRIGHT 2004
Reproductive History, Adding.
The following screen shows the result of the proper way to update this information:
Figure 212
Reproductive History Completed.
If the selection of Gravida, Para, and Ab, appear to be illogical, you will get the following message:
Value of G,P,or Ab may be incorrect -delete if needed, return to continue
Make any needed corrections and continue.
PROMPT #7, “Add Family History (Y/N)”, enter <y> + <enter> to add or see Family History . In the
following example ( Figure 213), an Family History has already been added, in the same manner as
in the “ADD PAST MEDICAL & SOCIAL PROBS” screen above.
173
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 213
COPYRIGHT 2004
Family History.
In the “Rel” field, you can hit <F2> help key to see the list of possible relationships used by the
system. Of course, these only have meanings for blood relatives. The system list of blood relatives
is as follows:
Rel. Abbr.
PGF
PGM
MGF
MGM
F
M
B
S
PU
PA
MU
MA
SON
D
Relationship
Paternal Grand Father
Paternal Grand Mother
Maternal Grand Father
Maternal Grand Mother
Father
Mother
Brother
Sister
Paternal Uncle
Paternal Aunt
Maternal Uncle
Maternal Aunt
Son
Daughter
In the “Onset Age” field, enter the appropriate age that this condition developed in the patients
blood relative.
PROMPT #8, “Add Hospitalizations (Y/N)”, enter <y> + <enter> to add or see the patient's
hospitalization history . In the following example ( Figure 214), an Hospitalization History has
already been added, in the same manner as in the “ADD PAST MEDICAL & SOCIAL PROBS”
screen above.
174
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 214
COPYRIGHT 2004
Past Hospitalizations.
Correct errors by use of the “DELETE” diagnosis method discussed in the section on “DELETING A
CODE” earlier in this section.
Even admissions for surgical procedures that are listed under the “Past Surgeries & Procedures”
section have an associated diagnosis for admission. As in this example, the procedure was
appendectomy ( documented in the Surgeries section of the past medical history) for the diagnosis,
of “appendicitis”.
In the days field, indicate the approximate number of days the patient was hospitalized for tis
diagnosis. This often indicates how serious a condition was, as well as possible complications that
might still arise from this condition. For example, in the case of appendicitis above, it was probably
a pretty standard case. However, if the hospitalization was for 30 days, then you know there were
complications, and the probability for adhesions, and late complications from this hospitalization are
much higher.
Special F-keys
To allow selected front office personal to enter images into the patient's record, the add images and
review images screens are presented via the F6 and F7 keys.
The <F6> key, “Add Images”
Hitting the <F6> will open the add images screen seen in Figure 215. After entering <a> at the
multi-value change prompt, the “Image Types” window will pop-up as seen in this figure. Select the
image type you want to enter. Then at the “Description” field, enter a description of the image you
are adding. Next enter the date and time of the image (not the current time and date) as seen
below.
You will then be asked; Is this a new Image?
Upon answering <y>, you will get the pop-up window seen in Figure 216. After saving the image to
the name and path given, answer <y> to prompt #2.
175
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 215
Figure 216
COPYRIGHT 2004
Add Images screen.
Image Path and Name to Store.
You should the check that the image you saved actually was stored properly, and that the system is
working correctly. You will get next be presented with the reminder screen shown in Figure 217.
Figure 217
Reminder to Check Image window.
The completed add images screen can be seen in Figure 218 below.
176
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 218
COPYRIGHT 2004
Complete Add Images screen.
The <F7> key, “Rvw Images”
The review images screen will identical to that of the add images screen seen in Figure 218, with
the exception being that the change prompt only allows for selection of an image to view ( no ability
to add). Upon selecting the line number of the image you want displayed, the image will be
presented to you.
ORDERS INCOMPLETE & PENDING
From the front office menu screen ( Family & Patient File Maint.), menu item #7, “Orders
Incomplete & Pending”, will allow the user to check on Incomplete or Pending Orders. This sub
menu screen can be used by all user classes, however, it is generally used by the front office staff
that generally interact with patients regarding scheduling appointments. It is also used by lab, XRay, and nursing, to process pending orders. The sub menu as seen in Figure 219, will allow you
to go to the specific type of pending order you want to process or review.
Figure 219
Incomplete and Pending Orders Sub Menu.
177
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selecting Menu item #1, “Lab Orders - View Pending & Ordered by Patient.”, choose this item to
View Status of Lab Orders, by patient. This selection is used most often to answer a patients
questions as to whether a lab result has come back. It is also useful to reprint outside lab
requisitions. Upon selecting this item the following Lab Order Maintenance screen, as seen in
Figure 220, is presented:
Figure 220
Lab Order Maintenance screen.
Upon selecting item #1, “Lookup Lab work Done or Reprint Req.”, the “Patient Lab Results
Status” screen will be shown as seen in Figure 221. At prompt #1, “Patient Number:”,enter part of
the patient's name ( for cross-reference lookup) or enter the patient's number. After selecting the
patient, the following screen will be seen, with any lab pending. If your are immediately returned to
prompt #1, with the name field now blank, then there are no labs pending for that patient.
Figure 221
Patient Lab Results Status screen.
There are three possible lab types, all of which are shown above. 1) Standard External Labs, 2)
INHOUSE Labs, and 3) Interfaced Outside Labs. Below is discussion of each the three types of
lab, and how to use the screens associated with each.
178
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
External labs that are not interfaced with the SmartDoctor® system ( not automated), for other than
ordering, printing the requisition slips, and tracking. In line #1 above, this is a lab test that was sent
out by giving the patient a printed lab requisition for a non-interfaced lab. The patient may go to
another site ( lab) to have the lab drawn, or may have the lab this drawn at your clinic, but in either
case, there is no direct interface between the SmartDoctor® system and the lab. The requisition is
in a paper form, and the result come back in a paper form. In this case the values in the result field
will say “LabOut” or “LabIn”.
Once the lab test comes back, you may indicate this by selecting this line item, and then answering
<y> to the prompt: “Indicate this lab is IN, Y/N:”, at the bottom of the screen as shown below in
Figure 222.
Figure 222
Selecting External Lab to Indicate Returned.
The results of answering “yes”, changes the value in the results field to “LabIn” as is seen in Figure
223 below.
f you have another non-interfaced lab to indicate has returned, then enter that line number at the
prompt shown above. However, if you enter 1,2, or 3, at this time in the above screen, you will get
no response ( other than to return you to that selection prompt above). The reason for this is that,
Line #1 has already been indicated as “LabIn”, and nothing else can be done with that line. Line #2
is an INHOUSE lab. This must be process through the nursing screen, menu item #3, “Nurse
Intake & Med. Refill”, off the main front office menu. The results field will change as a result of
actions taken on processing that lab. The results field will then be populated with an indication of
this being normal or abnormal. Line #3 is an interfaced lab that will indicate “NORMAL”,
ABNORMAL, or “--” once processed and results are pending.
179
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 223
COPYRIGHT 2004
External Lab Indicated as IN.
INHOUSE labs. In line #2, this is an example of an “INHOUSE” lab that is pending completion. In
this case it is a Urinalysis. The “INHOUSE” indicates that this has not been processed yet. Had it
been processed, it would be indicated as “Normal” or “Abnormal”. This must be process through
the nursing screen, menu item #3, “Nurse Intake & Med. Refill”, off the main front office menu.
Then in that sub menu, selecting menu item #5, “Collect/Process Doctor Ordered Labwork”.
Interfaced lab results. In line #3, is an example of an interfaced lab order that is pending
processing. The double dash ( --) indicates that the test have been ordered, but no results are
available yet.
The <F9> key, “Reprint Pending”
The “F9” key is to reprint pending labs that are not “INHOUSE labs”, or “Interfaced labs”. Upon
hitting the <F9> key the screen seen in Figure 224 will be presented for this patient's labs.
The first two labs listed are to be processed as an Interfaced Lab, and as an INHOUSE lab,
respectively. Therefore there is no requisition to be reprinted. You are just made aware that these
test have been ordered and are still pending. How overdue they are can be seen by comparing the
“When” date, to the current date. Upon hitting the <F9> key, “Print Pt. Info”, on this screen, you will
be presented with the multiple select list shown in Figure 225:
In this multiple selection screen, you can arrow up and down to highlight a line you want to select.
Then while on that line, hit the <enter> ( or <return>) key to select an item. Hitting the <enter> key
again on that same line will un-select it. To indicate that a line is selected, an asterisk ( *) will be
placed at the beginning of the line. Once you have selected the requisitions that you want printed
again, hit the <F1> key ( end), to accept your selection(s). Upon hitting the <F1> key, the
requisition seen in Figure 226 is reprinted for this outside lab.
180
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 224
Figure 225
COPYRIGHT 2004
Request Lab Requisition Reprint.
Multiple Select for Requisition Reprints.
Had you also selected the INHOUSE and Interfaced labs that are indicated that are overdue, the
additional page would be printed for this patient as seen in Figure 227. This might be necessary in
the case that the patient left the clinic before having the tests done. You could mail this to the
patient and have them come back for the needed labwork.
Upon selecting item #2, “View LabCorp Daily Manifest” from the Lab Maintenance Screen submenu, you will be presented with the screen seen in Figure 228. The manifest is the listing of lab
tests sent to the interfaced lab and billing status by date.
In prompt #1, enter the date of the manifest for labs sent on that date. Be aware, that putting in
181
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 226
Figure 227
COPYRIGHT 2004
Requisition Reprint for External Lab.
Reprint Reminder for INHOUSE and Interfaced Labs.
182
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 228
COPYRIGHT 2004
Interfaced Lab Manifest by Date.
todays date may result in a blank screen as above since this manifest is only generated at the time
a batch of test are sent electronically by the SmartDoctor® system to the interfaced lab system. In
most clinics the is done at the end of the day after lab pickup. However, at large clinics with
multiple pickups per day, all the test sent that day will be listed. This report is used most often on a
later date to check correlation of tests your clinic is being billed for from the lab. And to check that
they were billed.
In this example, Dirty Harry, had two CBC's drawn and processed the same day. ( Probably
checking serially for blood loss after a gun fight.) To print the manifest hit the <F9> key “Print
Report”, to print a report similar to the that seen in Figure 229.
Figure 229
Interfaced Lab Manifest Report.
183
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Other interfaced labs such as Quest, could also be listed here. This depends on the number of labs
with bidirectional interfaces that your clinic uses.
Upon selecting menu item #3, “Remove Outgoing LabCorp Order”, ( or other labs that your site
uses), the screen seen in Figure 230 is presented. Here we have already selected the patient for
prompt #1 below, with the standard cross-reference lookup method.
Figure 230
Removing Interfaced Lab Order.
Upon selecting line #1, the pop-up window seen in Figure 231 is presented.
Figure 231
Verify Cancel of Interfaced Lab.
If you enter <y> here, the request will be deleted from the batched requests pending transmission to
the lab. Be sure to delete the sample and any printed requisitions the are associated with this
cancellation from the labs daily shipment.
Upon selecting menu item #4, “Reprint a LabCorp Requisition”, the following screen ( Figure 232)
will be presented. Again, we have entered the patient's name in prompt #1 already.
184
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 232
COPYRIGHT 2004
Reprinting Interfaced Lab Requisition.
Upon selecting line #1, the requisition seen in Figure 233 is reprinted:
BACK TO: Incomplete & Pending Orders Menu
Selecting Menu item #2, “Lab Orders - View Pending for All Patients.”, choose this menu item to
find all labs ordered but not in yet. The screen shown will be similar to that of Figure 234, but
without any data except for the patient number in prompt #1, “Patient Number:”. This number is
defaulted from the list of patients with orders still pending completion. Just hit the <enter> key to
accept this patient number, and you will be taken to the populated screen seen in Figure 234.
The <F9> key, “Reprint Pending”
The “F9” key is to reprint pending labs that are not “INHOUSE labs”, or “Interfaced labs”. This
functions exactly the same as screen FP160114 as shown above under “Lookup Lab work Done or
Reprint Req.”, described previously.
Upon hitting the <enter> key or the <F1> key to end, you will be taken to the next patient found to
have lab orders pending. Once you are presented a screen with no patient number defaulted in
prompt #1, “Patient Number:”, then the list of patients with pending labs has been exhausted. At
this point hit the <F1> key to “end” input.
Selecting menu item #3, “INHOUSE X-RAY Processing”, choose this menu item to perform or
review INHOUSE X-RAY Processing. You will then be presented with the following sub menu
shown in Figure 235 for INHOUSE X-RAY Processing, Review, and Readings. This menu item is
for x-ray techs., radiologists, or physicians reading or reviewing patient x-rays.
Selecting sub menu item #1, “Process pending INHOUSE X-RAY requests”,will take you to the
shown in Figure 236. This screen is for use by the X-Ray technician.
185
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 233
COPYRIGHT 2004
Reprint of Interfaced lab requisition.
Here the terminal you are logged in on is displayed in prompt #1. Just hit the <enter> key as you
are instructed in this prompt to accept this and proceed. All this means is that the system will pull
the information needed and present it to you in this screen, on this terminal. If there are no X-Rays
to process you will get the following message at the bottom of the screen: “This record is not on
file "FP-XRAY_TMP". When there are X-Rays to be processed a screen similar to the that shown
in Figure 236 will be displayed:
186
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 234
Outstanding Lab Review.
Figure 235
Menu for INHOUSE XRAY Processing.
In this screen the X-Ray tech. can see the x-rays ordered, in double multi-valued lines. On the
header line are descriptors of what is below. The descriptor followed by a forward slash ( “/”), is
what is on the first line in that field, and after the forward slash is descriptor of what will be on the
second line of that field. Therefore in line item #1 ( In Figure 236), you can see the following
information: the underlined order number, the underlined patient name, the patients date of birth,
sex, and scheduled date. On the second half of multi-value line #1 is: the CPT or other charge
code for the procedure, the procedure name, the diagnosis for which the test is being performed,
the ordering provider, and finally the priority of the test. In this case it is showing “ROUT” for
routine.
If line #1 is selected ( by entering <1> and hitting <enter>), you will be presented with the screen
seen in Figure 237.
187
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 236
Figure 237
COPYRIGHT 2004
XRAY Technician Order Takeoff screen.
XRAY Processing screen.
The top section of the screen shows the patient identification, the priority, and a warning about
possible pregnancy if the patient is female, and is between the ages of 11 to 59 years old.
188
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
At the change prompt hit <a> for all, which will take you through prompts #2 & 3.
Prompt #2, “Shielding used(y/n)?”, Answer <y> or <n>.
Prompt #3, “Type:”, this is a free text field to enter the specific type of shielding used, if any. This
field will be skipped if you answered “N” to prompt #2.
You will now be at the multi-value change prompt at the bottom of the screen as follows:
Exposure - A)dd, C)hange, I)nsert, D)elete, L)ist
Enter <a> to add an exposure record.
The system will take you to the first multi-value line for exposures, and automatically pop open a
window as shown in Figure 238 below to select the film to be used. This may list one or more film
types, including digital exposures.
Figure 238
Select Film Type and Size to be Used.
In this case only one film type is shown. The film types that pop-up comes from the the procedure
file. As will be discussed in the Procedure file section, each procedure may have X-Ray film or
digital exposures placed in it's Inventory information section. The choices that are allowed there are
defined in the TERMS file under in the “ADM-INVENTORY” record.
Field #2, “kVp”, Kilo volts potential. Enter the voltage used here.
Field #3, “mA”, Mili amps. Enter the current used here.
Field #4, “Sec”, seconds. Enter the time used here.
Field #5, “Comments”. Enter any comments here.
Field #6, “Image#”, image number for digital x-rays. You will ONLY be taken to this field if the clinic
file has the prompt #8, “Store digital X-Rays?”, is set to “Y”. If it is set to “N”, then this field will be
skipped. However, if it is set to “Y”, then the following screen ( Figure 239) will pop-up upon
reaching this last field on the multi-value line for Exposures.
189
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 239
COPYRIGHT 2004
Path and Image Number to Store Digital XRAY.
At this point, you need to cut and past the “PATH” shown between the arrows on the screen. In this
case this would be “\\imstx\u\ImagesP\1003X101.jpg”. The first part of this path is setup in your
systems file for you when your clinic is first set up. The extension for the executable program to call
up this image is set in the TERMS file under in the “ADM-IMAGE-TYPES" record. This will be set
up by your system administrator.
Once you have saved the image, you will be at prompt #2 on this screen. Answer “Y” once the
image is saved. Next you will be presented with the following reminder pop-up window ( Figure
240)
:
Figure 240
Reminder to Check Stored XRAY Image.
The sample screen shown in Figure 241 will now show the X-Ray image numbers assigned.
If there are no further exposures to record, just hit the <enter> key or <F1> key. You will then be
asked “Exit this X-Ray procedure (<return>=y/n=no)?”. Enter <enter>, or <y> to exit and save.
You will then be asked to “Enter your Signature PW:”. Upon successfully doing this, the system
will indicate this X-Ray order to have been process. It's status will be changed to “TAKEN”.
Selecting sub menu item #2, “Report of Processed X-RAYS.”, from the sub-menu screen for
“Perform or Review INHOUSE XRAYs”, will present you with a selection screen asking for the first
and last processing date that you want to review.
A sample Report of Processed X-Rays is shown in Figure 242.
Selecting sub menu item #3, “Preliminary & Final X-RAY Reading.”, from the “Perform or Review
INHOUSE XRAYs” menu screen, is for used by the Radiologist or the primary clinic doctor to do
preliminary and/or final X-ray readings that are pending. On selecting this item, the screen shown in
Figure 243 will be presented showing the pending reading list.
190
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 241
Figure 242
COPYRIGHT 2004
Completed XRAY Processing screen.
Sample Printout of XRAY Processing Report.
The clinic doctor can also reach this screen from the doctor main menu via menu item #6,
“Preliminary & Final InHouse X-RAY Reading.” The selection screen for processing is similar to
that of processing the X-Ray orders above. The top of the screen seen in Figure 243 below.
191
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 243
COPYRIGHT 2004
Pending XRAY Reading List.
Simply select the item to process, and the screen seen in Figure 244 will be presented for the line
selected.
Figure 244
XRAY Selected for Reading.
The doctor would review the information and then hit the <F9> key for “Reading”. The doctor would
then enter their preliminary or final reading as seen Figure 245. In this example, the preliminary and
final readings are the same and there is no disagreement. If the final reading is abnormal and the
readings are indicated as not agreeing, or the readings are incomplete, then on return to the
selections screen the a message window will pop-up as shown in Figure 246.
BACK TO: Incomplete & Pending Orders Menu for Prompts #4 through #11
Here we will discuss prompts #4 through #11 on this sub-menu screen ( Figure 219). These specific
orders can only be placed during a “Provider Visit”, or a “Non-Scheduled Provider Visit”. These menu
items are only populated after the bill has been processed. Prompts #4, #6, and #8 through #11 will
only contain orders that were not taken-off at the time of billing, or were incompletely taken off. These
prompts will be presented for incomplete orders, in the same manner as described in the billing
sections “automatic exit screens”.
192
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 245
Figure 246
COPYRIGHT 2004
Physician Entering Final XRAY Reading.
Warning of Incomplete XRAY Reading.
Prompts #5 and #7 are to allow nursing to see what Dx Service and Referrals were ordered for a
doctor's patients for a future date. The nurse would generally check one day before for all scheduled
Dx Services and Referrals, to be sure the reports are in before the doctor sees the patient.
On selecting either one of these prompts, a screen similar the selection screen seen in Figure 247 will
pop-up.
In prompt #1, “Enter Date of Appointment:”, enter the date in the future of the doctor's schedule you
want to check.
In Prompt #2, “Prov. Initials:”, enter the initials of the provider, or part of the doctors name for a crossreference lookup.
193
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 247
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection screen for Diagnostic Services Scheduled.
In Prompt #3,. “Patient Num:”, accept the default of “ALL” to see all patients with orders that should
be back for that doctor on that date, or enter the patient number or part of the patient name for a
cross-reference lookup.
In Prompt #4. “Proceed to Check (y/n):”, enter <y> when you are ready to start reviewing the patients
with orders due. Again, these prompts will be presented for orders, in the same manner as described
in the billing sections “automatic exit screens”. The only difference is that you see a defaulted
encounter number of the order when it was placed. Simply hit the <enter> key and you will be
presented with the order. A typical screen is shown in Figure 248 below.
194
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 248
COPYRIGHT 2004
Viewing a Schedule Diagnostic Service.
195
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
CHAPTER 5 COMMUNICATION LOOPS
The SmartDoctor® system has a special mechanism for office and clinical staff to communicate
information regarding specific patients. We refer to this as “Communication Loops”.
Most offices that are not automated, exchange information about a patient by moving charts
around. At hospital, this problem is even worse because of the many different departments that
need to have access to the records, the added administrative documentation, and the physical size
for the facility. At least in a doctors office, the area to search for a chart is only as large as the
office itself. In a typical doctor's office, the doctor's desk will have three stacks of charts on it:
1. Charts with questions or information from the patient, nurse, front office personnel, other doctors,
or yourself, regarding that patient's care for your review.
2. Charts with refill requests that need your approval.
3. Charts with prescriptions that have been refilled ( previously indicated OK to fill), for your review.
In the SmartDoctor® system, we eliminate the need to move charts around, and provide a much
more efficient way of handling the tasks indicated above. This is done by way of “communication
loops”, using the Non-Visit encounter note, or the Refill note, as the starting point of the
communication
The chart representation of these “communication loops” is shown below:
Starting with:
Who
To whom
Next Action or Process
1.
Non-Visit Encounter note.
Clerical
Note for file
File.
2.
Non-Visit Encounter note.
Clerical
Nurse
Place in nurse queue.
3.
Non-Visit Encounter note.
Clerical
Provider
Place in doctor queue.
4.
Refill Request of
Pre-approved
medication.
Nurse
Provider
Queued for review,
by doctor.
5.
Refill Request of
Non-approved
medication or
Controlled Substance
Nurse
Provider
Queued for Approval,
by doctor.
6.
Non-Visit Encounter note.
Nurse
Note for file.
File.
7.
Non-Visit Encounter note.
Nurse
Nurse
Place in nurse queue.
8.
Non-Visit Encounter note.
Nurse
Provider
Place in doctor queue.
9.
Non-Visit Encounter note.
Doctor
Note for file
File.
10.
Non-Visit Encounter note.
Doctor
Nurse
Place in nurse queue.
11.
Non-Visit Encounter note.
Doctor
Doctor
Place in doctor queue.
196
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
12.
Doctor queued
Non-Visit note
Doctor
Nurse
automatic
Place in nurse queue.
13.
Doctor queued
prescription approval,
or action to take.
Doctor
Nurse
automatic
Place in nurse queue.
14.
Doctor queued
refill review.
Doctor
File
Review refills, file.
15.
Nurse queued
Non-Visit note, or
one time refill approval.
Nurse
File
One time medication refill,
take action,
and file.
Please note, anytime a Non-Visit encounter note is directed to a doctor ( # 12 above), whether it be
from a clerk, a nurse, another doctor, or the doctor, the note will always be placed in the nurse
queue ( # 15 above) for review and any final action.
To see the general description of the Non-Visit encounter notes, see the Patient Processing section
of this manual, where you will see the clerical use of this encounter type. To see the nursing and
doctor use of these “communication loops”, look in those respective sections of this manual.
Warning: Be sure to have included in your office policy manual a written list of who in your office is
authorized to refill regular prescriptions and prescriptions for controlled substances. State laws vary
regarding on how you must do this. In Texas, the Texas Controlled Substances Act (Texas Health
and Safety Code, Title 6, Section 481.073) says you must keep a written designation in your
medical office of each person that you’ve approved to phone in controlled substance prescriptions
to pharmacies. In the SmartDoctor® system, only users designated as RX or higher, may refill a
prescription ( a user type is designated in prompt #7, “Degree:” in the provider record.). All
controlled substance refills must also be pre-approved each time by a doctor prior, to the system
allowing an RX user to refill a controlled substance.
197
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
CHAPTER 6 NURSING
Nursing personnel logging on to the system will be placed in either the “Family & Patient File
Maintenance” menu ( Front office menu), or in the “Doctor Main Menu”. Typical nursing personnel
are given the designation as “RN” for those who are registered nurses and “RX” for those doing
nursing work or medical assistant ( work such as doing patient intake, vitals signs, and refilling
prescriptions with the doctors approval). The decision as to which starting menu screen is used is
made by the clinic administrator. Nursing personnel that do procedures ( ex. suture removal, EKGs,
etc.), specific patient teaching or do doctor directed treatments, may be more appropriately placed
in the “Doctor Main Menu” as the starting screen. Since they will be listed as providers, they may
have their own appointment schedules for the functions described above ( or even to schedule lab
draws and immunizations). Nursing personnel that mainly take vital signs, do doctor approved
refills, make appointments, and do other front office functions would be better placed in the “Family
& Patient File Maintenance” menu.
From the “Family & Patient File Maintenance” menu, select menu item #3, “Nurse Intake & Med.
Refill”. From the “Doctor Main Menu”, select menu item #12, “Nurse Intake”. You will then be
taken to the screen shown in Figure 249 below.
Figure 249
Nursing Sub Menu screen.
MENU ITEM #1, “ENTER TODAY'S NURSING INFORMATION.”, should be selected to enter
information on a patient about to be seen by the doctor. Generally a nurse works with one or two
doctors. Each doctor would be using two or more rooms to see and treat patients. When a nurse
knows a doctor is ready to see patients, and a room is open, the nurse would open the doctors
schedule for that day to see which patients have signed in and are ready for intake, as seen in
Figure 250 below.
198
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 250
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selecting Patient for Nursing Intake.
On this screen, the nurse can quickly see by looking at the “OV” that the Bonners have arrived in
the clinic, 9.30 and 9.45 are open, and that Cooper is scheduled but not here yet. The letters
possible in the “OV” column and their meanings are as follows:
O
X
H
N
P
C
B
Open appointment slots.
Booked appointment slots.
The patient is Here, has signed in and is ready to be seen.
The Nurse has done the intake and the patient is ready for the doctor.
The Provider is seeing the patient.
The provider has Completed seeing the patient, and the patient is ready
for checkout and billing.
The patient has been checked out and been Billed.
This makes it extremely easy to see the patient's progress through the clinic.
You do not have to select patients in the given order. For example if the Bonners want the husband
seen first, just arrow down to that line number ( or enter that line number), and hit <enter>. Upon
selecting the second patient, the screen in Figure 251 is presented.
You are shown the patients demographics, his photo ( public domain photo of senator Rockefeller),
and are asked if this is the correct patient at the bottom of the screen. No image will be shown if
there is no photo ID in this patient's images file. The program displaying the image can be the
viewing program provided with your digital camera, or a a common available one like the MS Paint
viewer shown above. You should close this image after you compare it to the patient ( in the
standard Windows manner-- click on “X” or hit <ALT + F4>.
Next, answer the question. “Is this the correct Patient?” If you answer <n>, then you are
199
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 251
COPYRIGHT 2004
Nurse Intake, Verify Patient ID.
exited to the prior menu to select again. If you answer <y>, then you are presented with the next
pop-up window as seen in Figure 252.
Figure 252
Nurse Intake, Checking Allergies.
You are shown a list of allergies in a multi-value prompt that can only be listed or scrolled. Scroll up
and down until all are seen. In this case, there are only two allergies listed. Just hit <enter> here to
go on to the next prompt.
Prompt #2, “Is this Allergy History Correct(y/n)?”, answer <y> if this is correct. If you answer <n>,
you will be taken to the general “Past Medical History” screen ( Figure 196), discussed in the
Manage Patient Care chapter of this manual. In in the “Past Medical History” screen, select prompt
#4, “Add Allergies (Y/N):”. Enter <y>, and proceed to enter the additional allergies ( Figure 204).
200
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Upon returning to the prior screen, answer <y> to prompt #2.
BACK TO THE INTAKE SCREEN.
You will next be presented with the screen shown in Figure 253. In this example screen, we already
entered all the information in all the prompts up to the final sign out prompt.
Figure 253
Nurse Intake screen.
Prompt #2, “LMP:”, if the patient is a female and over the age of 9 years old, then you will be taken
through this prompt. You can skip the prompt or enter the date of the LMP, but you cannot put a
date in the future.
A WORD ABOUT ABNORMAL FLAGS.
Abnormal flags consist of one or two flashing, red asterisks, following the abnormal value. Rather
than talking about standard deviations, or other abnormal parameters, IMS has established the
following criteria: If the abnormal flag has one asterisk “*”, then this is not normal and you should
be aware of this and take appropriate action. If there is a double, flashing, red asterisk “**”, then
this is significantly abnormal. In this case, we suggest you or the doctor make note of this in the
documentation, and indicate what action was taken in the plan, if it is not self evident in the note.
All vital sign parameter flags are set by age and sex. For example, a heart rate of 140 would be
normal in a three day old baby, and therefore no flags. It would cause two asterisks to be displayed
in this patient.
Prompts #3 through #13. Enter the information indicated below, hit <enter> to skip a prompt, or hit
<F1> ( “end” input) to skip the rest of the prompts
Prompt #3, “Temp.F:”, enter the patient temperature in degrees Fahrenheit. This field is expecting
a decimal point, with a maximum of four characters. If you enter 101 without a decimal point or a
zero as a fourth character, then you will get the following error message:
201
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
“The acceptable range is 800 to 1139. Press <return> to continue.”
This looks funny, but actually means 80.0 to 113.9, since a single decimal point is assumed. So to
enter 101 degrees, enter <101.>, or <101.0>, or <1010>. A temperature of 98.0 degrees should be
entered as <98.>, or <98.6>, or <986>.
Prompt #4, “Heart rate:”, enter the heart rate in beats per minute.
Prompt #5, “Respiration:”, enter in breaths per minute.
Prompt #6, “Systolic BP:”, enter in mm Hg.
Prompt #7, “Diastolic BP:”, enter in mm Hg. If these two values of blood pressure are reversed,
the system will prompt you to make a correction.
Prompt #8, “Head Cir cm:”, this generally used in pediatrics only, and used for proper growth
checks.
Prompt #9, “Weight lbs:”, enter weight in lbs.
Prompt #10, “oz:”, enter the weight in ounces over the full pound in prompt #9. For example, if the
weight was 235 and one-half pounds, you would place 235 in prompt #9 and 8 in prompt #10 ( for 8
ounces).
Prompt #11, “Height:”, enter the height in inches. The system is expecting a single decimal point
as in prompt #3 above. So 70 inches could be entered as <70.>, or <70.0>, or <700>.
The “Ht/Wt Ratio:” and the “BMI:”, will be displayed once the height and weight data is entered.
Prompts #12 and #13, are to enter free text data. This information is generally the patient complaint
or reason for visit. Sometimes this is called the nurse intake note.
Prior to signing out, the nurse has the ability to branch to the “Sub.” <F5> ( take subjective history),
“PMHxRv” <F9> ( Past Medical History), “PtSch” <F10> ( Patient waiting time in clinic), and “ChtRv”
<F11> ( the ability to do a complete chart review if needed).
Prompt # 14, “Signature Password:”, all provider notes require a signature password prior to exit.
This password should be different form your sign-in password. The signature password acts as
your signature and should be treated as such. Once you enter a valid signature password, the
bottom of the screens appearance will change to the format shown in Figure 254.
Figure 254
Nurse Intake, Signature Block Completed.
The signature will be indicated by replacing your sign-out password with your title block, and the
time and date of signature will be noted.
202
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
MENU ITEM #2, “GIVE MEDICATION OR IMMUNIZATION.”, choose this selection to administer
medications or immunizations ordered by the doctor. Generally in the clinic situation described
above, the nurse is working closely with the doctor. The doctor will generally just let the nurse know
as the doctor leaves the room that the patient needs an injection. The nurse would then select this
menu item to see what injections were ordered. The nurse would be presented with the screen
shown in Figure 255.
Figure 255
Substance Administration, Selecting Patient.
Upon indicating the doctor the nurse is working with, the nurse will get a listing of that doctor's clinic
schedule, as seen in Figure 256. You will see the patient the physician currently is seeing indicated
in the “OV” column as “P” for provider. If the provider has finished seeing the patient, then this will
be a “C” for completed visit. If the bill has been generated, this will be changed to a “B” for billed.
Upon selecting the appropriate patient, you will see the screen filled out as shown in Figure 257.
At the change prompt, enter <a> for all, which will then take you through prompts #2 and #3.
Prompt #2, “Is this the correct Pt.?”, enter <y> if this is the correct patient. If this is not the correct
patient, answer yes anyway. This will get you to the next screen where you can exit using the <F8>
key, “Exit/NoSave”, to exit without saving. However, you will then need to sign-out as usual.
After answering <y> above, you will be taken to the “Therapeutic Injection or Immun.” screen as
seen in Figure 258. Here, you will see listed the medications and/or immunizations the doctor has
requested you to perform.
Enter the line number of the medication or immunization you are about to give. You will then see
the “Medication Book” screen as seen in Figure 259.
203
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 256
Figure 257
COPYRIGHT 2004
Select Patient for Substance Administration.
Substance Administration screen.
204
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 258
Figure 259
COPYRIGHT 2004
Theraputic Medication, Injection, Immunization screen.
Medication Administration Book.
On this screen, hit the <F6> key, “AdminNote”, to document administration of the medication or
immunization. An administration window will pop-up on the right hand side of the screen as seen in
Figure 260. At the change prompt, enter <a>, to be taken through each prompt. Then, select the
205
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
multi-valued Administration note to document any additional information you wish.
Figure 260
Substance Administration Note.
Administration Pop-Up window.
Prompt #1, “Manufacturer”, enter part of the manufacturer's name. The system will locate the
name from all manufacturers listed in the system with the standard cross-reference look-up. In this
case, we entered “skf”. The system found “SMITH KLINE & FRENCH”, and entered it for us.
Prompt #2, “Lot Number”, enter the lot number located on the medication packaging.
Prompt # 3, “Admin. Site”, you will get a pop-up selection list as seen Figure 261.
Figure 261 Administration Site Selection List.
You can page up and down through this list. Select the appropriate route of administration. The
terms presented in the pop-up window come from the TERMS file record of “SUB-SITE”. You can
have your system administrator make changes to the selectable descriptions to make it more
appropriate for your practice.
Prompt # 4, “Reaction?”, if there was a significant reaction such as rapid local swelling, hives,
itching, or worse, indicate <y> for yes. Then, make the appropriate entries in the patient's allergy
file in the past medical history. If there was no reaction, enter <n> for no.
206
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Prompt #5, “Admin. By”, enter your user ID.
Prompt #6, “Time”, the time will be automatically placed for you by the system.
“Notes”, multi-valued prompt, enter any notes you wish to make regarding this medication
administration. You can type as many free text lines as you wish.
The note will appear in the record as shown in the example seen in Figure 262, which is taken from
a portion of the chart review function of the system.
Figure 262
Medication Chart Note Review.
If the medication is to be given to a pediatric patient ( defined in this system as anyone under 17
years old) and a weight has not been entered, then you will be presented with a new screen to enter
the child's weight.
MENU ITEM #3, “MEDICATION REFILL, PHARMACY REQUEST.”, choose this selection to refill
Figure 263
Pharmacy Refill Request.
207
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
medications. This selection is specific for pharmacy requests for refills. Generally, a pharmacy will
call the doctor's office for a prescription refill. This call will be passed to the nursing staff approved
to do refills. The nurse will then go to the nursing screen and select this menu item. Upon choosing
this menu item, the screen in Figure 263 will be seen
To start this refill request, hit the <F9> key for “New Note”. The next contact number ( visit number)
will be placed for you in prompt #1. Hit the <enter> key to accept this value
Prompt #2, “Patient Number:”, enter either the Patient Number, or, for a cross-reference search, at
least 3 characters of the patient's name.
Once selected, you will be asked to verify this is the correct patient, and correct family address.
Once you have verified that this information is correct, you will automatically be placed at prompt
#6. Prompts #3, #4, and #5, will be defaulted with the values seen in Figure 264.
Prompt #6, “Refill and/or Dr Referral:”, will be defaulted with “Note for File”. Generally you would
just hit the <enter> key to accept this. However, if you want this to be placed in the doctor queue
for review, then indicate the doctor. You may hit the <F10> key “Plst” to get a list of providers, and
then select the appropriate doctor.
Prompt #7, “Phone Book L/U for Pharm:”, hit <enter> to take the cross-reference lookup value of
“Pharm”. This will give you a listing of all pharmacies in your phone book file. Once the pharmacy
is selected, the pharmacy name and phone number will be displayed in the next two automatic fill
prompts, as seen in Figure 264 below.
Figure 264
Prescription Refill screen.
At this point, you would normally hit the <F6> key, “NewRx or Refill”, to refill the prescription. Only a
doctor type provider may enter a new prescription, You can only due refills as a nurse. Further, the
208
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
only refills you can do are those that are flagged as “Y” in the “Nurs Rfls” column. If a nurse
attempts to refill a medication indicated as “N” in the “Nurs Rfls” column, you will be presented with
the pop-up window seen in Figure 265.
Figure 265
Refill Error Message.
After you hit the <enter> key to continue, you will be presented with the pop-up window seen in
Figure 266.
Figure 266
Post to Controlled Substance Refill Request.
Hit the <enter> key to post this to the doctor prescription approval screens. That the doctor will
access this through the “Approve Refills Not Allowed by Nursing” selection from the doctor's main
menu. This is part of the “Communication Loops” system discussed in that section. If you do not
want to post this for the doctor, simply enter <n>.
NEWRX OR REFILL <F6> SCREEN
Upon hitting the <F6> key, the screen shown in Figure 267 will be presented. This is the standard
prescription writing screen, however, nursing staff will only be permitted to refill prescriptions preapproved by the doctor.
Prompt #2, “Drug Name:”, is defaulted with “Only Refills allowed”. Just hit the <enter> key to
continue to do a refill. This is the equivalent of hitting the <F9> key for “Refill Rx”. You will be
automatically placed in the insurance selection screen to identify the patient's insurance carrier.
Select the carrier as shown in the billing section of this manual. This is done because many
insurance companies have formulary restrictions. Having the insurance carrier formulary ( provided
directly from the carrier, or from information provided to you from the carrier) will allow the system to
check for formulary restrictions.
Upon hitting <enter> on the highlighted multi-value line #1, the window in Figure 268 will pop-up.
Hit the <enter> key to answer “y”, and proceed with the selected substance.
If the patient is female, in a reproductive age range, and the drug is a class “C”, “D”, or “X” drug,
then the window in Figure 269 will pop-up. If the patient is not present or not the one that called in,
you could have the pharmacist ask the question, or you could call the patient. You may also just
want to refer this to the doctor instead. If you answer “n” by hitting <enter>, then you will proceed to
the next check screen.
209
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 267
COPYRIGHT 2004
Refill screen for Nursing.
Figure 268
Verify Correct Brand Name.
Figure 269
Pregnancy Precaution for this Substance.
If the patient is female, in a reproductive age range, and the drug is “Allowed with caution” or “Not
Allowed” with breast feeding, then the window seen in Figure 270 will pop-up:
Figure 270
Breast Feeding Precaution for this Substance.
210
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
If the patient is not present or not the one that called in, you could have the pharmacist ask the
question, or you could call the patient. You may also just want to refer this to the doctor instead. If
you answer “n” by hitting <enter>, then you will be returned to the prescription screen with the
selected substance for refill. You will be stopped at prompt number six.
Prompt #6, “Dispense:”, hit enter to accept the defaulted amount that was on the last prescription.
Or you may enter a different amount.
Prompt #7, “Refills:”, hit enter to accept the defaulted number of refills that was on the last
prescription. Or you may enter a different number of refills.
Prompt #8, “Until:”, hit enter to accept the defaulted value dependent on the provider's preferences,
or enter a different date.
The screen seen in Figure 271 will then be displayed.
Figure 271
Completed Nursing Refill screen.
The remaining information was defaulted from the original prescription.
On return to the primary “Pharmacy Refill Request.” screen and hitting the <F9> key, “Msg”, to see
the message screen, the first eight lines of the “Message” multi-value were placed by the system.
Lines 9 and 10 were added to give you an example of adding a note to the message screen. This
screen is seen Figure 272 below.
Upon exiting, once the note is complete and you agree to accept all liability of using the system,
enter your signature password which indicates your electronic signature. Once you enter your
signature password, the screen will show your name, the date, and time of refill, as seen in Figure
273 below.
211
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 272
Figure 273
COPYRIGHT 2004
Pharmacy Refill Request Message screen.
Completed Nurse Signature screen.
MENU ITEM #4, “CHECK DOCTOR'S RESPONSE TO REFILL QUESTION AND/OR NON-VISIT
ENCOUNTER QUESTION.”, choose this selection to see the doctor's response to a nursing
question regarding a refill sent to the doctor, to see a one time OK for restricted refill, for a Non-Visit
Encounter referred to a nurse or yourself, or to see a Non-visit Encounter that was referred to a
doctor for action that may now require some action on your part. This is part of the “Communication
Loops” of the SmartDoctor® system described fully in the “Communication Loops” section of this
manual.
Upon choosing this selection, the “Review of Doctor's response” screen will come up as seen in
Figure 274. Indicate which provider's Non-Visit Encounter notes need to be processed, including
any specifically to you. In a large clinic, you should indicated the providers for which you are
responsible or your own initials. For a small clinic, or a single doctor office, you can accept the
default of “ALL”.
212
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 274
COPYRIGHT 2004
Select Provider Responses to Review.
Example #1, response from doctor regarding a controlled substance refill that you had forwarded on
to the doctor for approval.
In the example seen in Figure 275 below, the default value was accepted, and prompt#1 was
automatically filled with the next Non-Visit encounter in the queue ( in this case # 129).
Figure 275
Doctors Response to Controlled Substance Refill request.
Here you see that the reason for contact was for a prescription refill to the Prescription Shop of
Alpine. Upon hitting the <F9> “Msg” key, you see the doctors authorization for a one time refill:
Figure 276
Doctor Response in Message screen.
213
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
You can see that the doctor has given you permission for a one time refill for this controlled
substance. Upon hitting the <F6> key, you are allowed through the refill screen one time, to refill
this prescription.
If you exit the message screen and then return so that it is refreshed, you will see that the refilled
prescription information has been recorded here, as seen in Figure 277 below.
Figure 277
Completed Message screen after Refill.
You now can add any information you need, or exit the Non-Visit encounter in the standard manner
as discussed previously in this section.
Example #2, response from the doctor regarding a Non-Visit encounter sent to the doctor by either
the clerical or nursing staff.
As part of the “Communication Loops” system, any Non-visit encounter note forwarded on to the
doctor for action or attention is always placed back in the nurse queue for the nurse to review. The
doctor may ask the nurse to have the patient come in, take an action, or simply be aware of the
interaction and exit the note. In the following example, the doctor received a message via the
queued Non-Visit encounter from the doctor's menu. After the doctor responded, this was queued
for the nurse. Upon the nurse selecting this, as in the prior example, the nurse gets a screen similar
to that shown in Figure 278 below.
Upon hitting the <F9> “Msg” key, the message screen seen in Figure 279 is seen.
The nurse can now call the patient, schedule the appointment, and schedule any needed tests.
On completion, the nurse exits the note as shown previously.
If you were to review this note after the nurse signed out, the message area would appear as shown
in Figure 280 below. Here you can see the entire exchange with both the doctor signature indicator
and then the nursing note followed by the nursing signature indicator.
MENU ITEM #5, “COLLECT/PROCESS DOCTOR ORDERED LABWORK.”, choose this selection
to process ordered, Interfaced lab and InHouse tests requested from providers. If you choose this
menu item and there are no test pending, as seen in figure 208a below, then you are all caught up
for the day. Otherwise, you will see a screen similar to that shown in Figure 280b.
214
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 278
COPYRIGHT 2004
Doctor's Response on Refills.
Figure 279
Message screen for Doctor's Refill Response.
Figure 280
Completed Message Note in Response to Doctor.
215
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 280a
COPYRIGHT 2004
Lab Order Takeoff screen with No Orders Pending.
Examples of Interfaced lab processing.
Figure 280b
Lab Takeoff screen with Pending Orders.
This is a multiple select screen. In this screen, by hitting <enter>, an asterisk is placed in front of
the selected items. Once selected ( or unselected by hitting <enter> again), hit <F1> to accept the
216
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
selections. In this case, we intentionally mixed patients in the selection, which is incorrect. If you
do this, then you will get the error message on the bottom of the screen as follows:
You have selected work on more than one patient!!, return to continue
Upon hitting <enter>, you will be return to the selection screen to choose again.
Since these are all Interfaced labs ( not InHouse), then you only want to select labs for the same
patient to place on the requisition form at this time. If you select these individually, then a separate
requisition will be generated for each. Generally, CBC's and various chemistry tests are placed on
a single requisition for a single patient. However, you may want to place certain tests such as PAP
smears on separate requisitions, as instructed by your interfaced lab provider.
Upon selecting the first two line items shown in Figure 280b above, you will be taken through the
individual lab order screen for each test. Below ( Figure 280c) is an example for going through the
first selected line item, the CBC/Platelets lab test for John Bonner.
Figure 280c
Performing Specimen Collection.
Prompt #2, “See Detailed Specimen Requirements:”, enter <y> here if you wish to see any
detailed specimen requirements specified by your interfaced lab provider. If you go to this screen
and no details are listed, then none were given by your interfaced lab provider.
Prompt #3, “Fasting(y/n):”, enter <y> or <n> as is appropriate.
Prompt #4, “Diabetic(y/n):”, enter <y> or <n> as is appropriate.
Prompt #5, “Comments:”, upon arriving at this prompt, you may be taken automatically to required
information screens determined by your interfaced lab. For example, certain labs have specific
217
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
information they want completed for PAP smears, blood lead levels in children, Alpha Fetal Protein
levels, etc. Other labs may not require any special information for the same tests.
Prompt #6, “Urine Vol:”, this prompt will be skipped unless the test requested is a urine specimen
with a required urine volume as specified by the interfaced lab.
Prompt #7, “Billing:”, this prompt will automatically pop-up a window as shown in Figure 280d
below.
Figure 280d
Party.
Selecting “CLINIC” will result in adding a charge to the patient's bill for the clinic. Selecting
“PATIENT” will inform the lab to bill the patient. No charge to the patient by the clinic will be made.
The patient's billing information will then be provided to the lab on the requisition. Selecting “THIRD
PARTY” will inform the lab to bill the patient's insurance carrier. No charge to the patient by the
clinic will be made. The patient's insurance carrier information will then be provided to the lab on
the requisition.
Prompt #8, “Action:”, this prompt will automatically pop-up a window as shown in Figure 280e
below.
Figure 280e
Select Lab Action.
Prompt #9, “Signature PW:”, enter your signature password here to sign off the order. The
completed screen is shown in Figure 280f below.
Examples of InHouse lab processing.
Below is a screen ( Figure 280g) showing the selection of an InHouse lab test to be processed. The
provider can order a number of InHouse lab tests to be done by the lab or nursing staff. All of these
tests, except a Complete U/A, can be fully completed and placed in the patient's file for review by
the provider. However, the Complete U/A gets completed in two parts when performed by nursing.
First nursing will do the dip stick ( chemistry) part of the test. Following this, the test results are
queued for the doctor to complete the microscopic portion of the test.
218
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 280f
Figure 280g
COPYRIGHT 2004
Completed Lab Order Takeoff screen.
InHouse Lab Takeoff.
Upon selecting an InHouse lab test, you will be taken to the specific InHouse lab processing screen.
Figure 280h below shows the completion of the nursing/lab component of the InHouse Complete
U/A.
219
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 280h
COPYRIGHT 2004
Completed Nursing Component of U/A.
Once the nurse or lab technician completes the chemistry part of the U/A, they enter their signature
password to sign the report. This will then get queued for the doctor to complete the microscopic
portion of the test.
Other InHouse lab tests can be completed fully by the nursing/lab personnel, and placed in a queue
for the doctors review.
MENU ITEM #6, “REVIEW OR ADD TO NURSING INFO.”, choose this selection to add to, inquire,
or correct a previously entered nursing note for today. Upon selecting this menu item, a selection
sub menu will be presented as seen in Figure 281.
Selection #1, “Add Addendum to Nursing Intake Info.”, will allow you to add or change
information to the prior intake. You will only be allowed to select notes in which an initial nursing
note was done, and only before the doctor has seen the patient. Once the doctor has seen the
patient, you will not be allowed to make any modification to the note. In the example shown in
Figure 282, you will see that this nursing note has been assigned an addendum letter to distinguish
it from the original. The original is never destroyed or changed.
In the example above, once you answer <y> to prompt #2, you can keep the prior values entered
simply by hitting the <enter> key as you go through each field, or you can enter different information
where needed. In this note, you will see at the top of the screen this is addendum “C”, and in
prompt #13 a note was added.
Selection #2, “Inquire about Nursing Intake Info.”, allows you to see the most recent nursing note
by selecting as was done above. However, no modifications are allowed.
220
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 281
Selection Sub Menu for Nursing Notes.
Figure 282
Nursing Note Addendum.
221
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection #3, “Corrected note Review”, allows you to see any of the nursing notes or any of the
addendum's. When the doctor sees the patient, only the last addendum of the nursing note is
shown. In this way, the doctor gets to see the correct information, but allows for audit of all the
nursing notes and any changes made.
Selection #4, “Return to Main Menu”, returns you to the main menu. If you hit the <F1> key
instead, it will return you to the prior nursing menu.
222
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
CHAPTER 7 PROVIDER
All physician providers and physician-like providers ( DCs, NPs, PAs, etc.) will generally be placed
in the “Doctor Main Menu” screen upon logging into the system. Nursing personnel are generally
started in the “Family & Patient File Maint.” screen, but may also be started in this screen at the
discretion of the clinic. Some nursing staff that primarily do procedures or counseling may be more
logically started in this screen. As providers, they can have appointment schedules just like
physicians, and document there treatments and procedures in a similar manner. This is especially
true in the case of billable encounters such as diabetic counseling, suture removal, physical
therapies, etc.
The doctor main menu screen is shown in Figure 283 below.
Figure 283
Doctor ( Provider) Main Menu.
For the <F4> “Quick Menu” screen, please see the “Basic” section of this manual for a full
description of the functions available from the doctor screen.
MENU ITEM #1, “PROVIDER VISIT”, should be selected to see your current appointment schedule
for the day. You can also see the appointment schedule of other providers, in the case where you
may be asked to cover for other providers that are behind in their schedule, or are unavailable to
see their scheduled patients. Upon selecting this menu item, you will be placed in the screen
shown in Figure 284 below.
Prompt #1, “Scheduled Provider:”, your initials will be defaulted for the scheduled provider. Just
hit the <enter> key to see your current appointment schedule for the day. Also, as mentioned
previously, you may enter the initials of another provider for whom you have been asked to see his
or her patients because they are not available. Regardless of who's scheduled is picked, your
223
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 284
COPYRIGHT 2004
Initial Provider Visit screen.
initials ( log-in name) will be associated with this encounter, and not that of the original scheduled
provider. Once the initials of the “scheduled” provider's clinic have been entered, the schedule for
that provider will be shown as in Figure 285.
Figure 285
Patient Selection screen.
224
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
On this screen, the provider can quickly see by looking at the “OV” that John Bonner has arrived,
been seen by the nurse, and is in room #6. The 9.15, 10.30, and 11.30 slots are open, and Emma
Foster is here and in room # 5. Further, you can see that Mary Cooper has a double slot
appointment at 9.45, Jane Cooper has a single slot appointment at 10.15. John Jackson has a
triple slot appointment for a complete physical. The letters possible in the “OV” column and their
meanings are as follows:
O
X
H
N
P
C
B
Open appointment slots.
Booked appointment slots.
The patient is Here, has signed in and is ready to be seen.
The Nurse has done the intake and the patient is ready for the doctor.
The Provider is seeing the patient.
The provider has Completed seeing the patient, and the patient is ready
for checkout and billing.
The patient has been checked out and been Billed.
This makes it extremely easy to see the patient's progress through the clinic. Since the
appointment schedule like the rest of the system, is designed as a “real-time system”. Every time
you enter this screen your clinic schedule will be current. No more problems of having a paper list
of your appointments for the day, that is incorrect every time a new appointment is made or
canceled. Further, you know what the patient's progress through the clinic is, as well as what room
they are in.
You do not have to select patients in the given order. The only requirement is that you select a
patient that is indicated to have been seen by the nurse in th “OV” column with an “N”. If you want
to see a patient before a nurse has done the nurse intake, you may do this yourself by choosing
menu item # 12, “Nurse Intake“, from the “Doctor Main Menu”.
Figure 286
Verify Correct Patient Selected.
225
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Upon hitting the <enter> key on the highlighted multi-value line of the appointment schedule, you
will be placed in the screen shown in Figure 286 above. In this screen you can see the patient's
name, DOB, age in years, and an ID photo if available. ( The system can store photo IDs as well as
other photos and images with appropriate equipment.)
Once you are certain that this is the correct patient, close the image window by clicking on the “X”
box in the upper right hand corner of the image screen, or hit the <ALT + F4> key combination to
close this window. You will then see the full “Provider Visit” orientation screen as seen in Figure
287 below.
Figure 287
Provider Visit Orientation screen.
In this screen, you can see all the patient demographics, the reason for appointment, and final
reason for this visit at the time of signing in. The reason for visit can change. For example, the
patient may have made an appointment for a screening exam, but on arrival, wants to be evaluated
instead for a new acute problem.
You will also see if this was a referral and by who, the patient opinion on sign-in as to whether the
patient felt this problem or visit is an emergency. In this case the patient indicated that the visit was
“not urgent”. If the patient had indicated at time of sign-in that this was an urgent problem, then the
sign-in clerk would have the following message appear: “Notify Nurse and Provider: patient feels
visit is“, followed by a red, flashing “URGENT”. On this provider visit screen you would see a red,
flashing “URGENT”.
Next, you would review the patient's vital signs. Abnormal flags consist of one or two asterisks, “*”,
in flashing red following the abnormal value. Rather than talking about standard deviations, or other
abnormal parameters, IMS has established the following criteria: 1.) If the abnormal flag has one
asterisk “*”, then this is not normal and you should be aware of this and take appropriate action. 2.)
If there is a double flashing red asterisk “**”, then this is significantly abnormal. The provider should
226
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
make note of this in the documentation, and indicate what action was taken in the plan, if it is not
self evident in the note. All vital sign parameter flags are set by age and sex. For example, a heart
rate of 140 would be normal in a three day old baby, and therefore no flags.. It would cause two
asterisks to be displayed in this patient.
Then, answer the prompt at the bottom of the screen, “Is this the correct Patient?”. If you answer
“N”, then the screen will be cleared and you will be returned to the first “Provider Visit” screen. If
you answer “Y”, you will then be taken through a number of screens to orient you to the patient
recent and past medical history. The first review screen is “Review of last Visit's Plans”, as seen in
Figure 288 below:
Figure 288
Review of Last Visit's Plans.
This gives you the opportunity to show the patient that you are up on their most recent care. It also
allows you to see if the last problem was resolved, and if the patient followed your plan. You would
page or arrow down on this screen to see the remainder of the back plan. The end of the plan is
always indicated by the last line containing the following statement: “*** End of above Dx Related
Plan ***”.
The next automatic review screen is the patient's “Active Medical Problems”, as seen in Figure 289
below. Here, you will see all medical problems that have ever been entered in this system as an
active problem. The SmartDoctor® system specifically does not use the concept of acute and
chronic, or major and minor problems, since these definitions are arbitrary and frequently change.
For example, a urinary tract infection may be considered minor or chronic. However, if a patient
comes in 10 times in one year for the problem, then this is a significant problem and you should be
aware of it. The SmartDoctor® system logic handles this by placing the most recent problem at the
top of the listing, and list the remaining problems in reverse chronological order, based on last date
recored. Further, the system displays the first time the patient was seen for this problem, the
number of times seen for this problem, and the last time seen for this problem. Therefore, a visit for
227
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 289
COPYRIGHT 2004
Active Medical Problem List.
strep throat ten years ago will be at the bottom of the list. You will note that the screen is in the
inquire mode, so no changes can be made here. This is just information to quickly reorient you to
this patient. Hit the <enter> key to go on to the next screen.
The next review screen is all the patient's chronic medications, and all medications indicated at time
of writing to be an acute medication for the last year. This is also presented as an inquire screen
that you can scroll through, or page up and down through, as is seen Figure 290 below.
Figure 290
Chronic and Acute Medications of the Past Year.
228
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Just hit <enter> when finished reviewing.
The next automatic review screen ( see Figure 291) is for past medical history, including allergies
and immunizations, as follows:
Past Medical Problems: shows the diagnosis code, followed by the text description of the
diagnosis, followed by the date of onset.
Past Surgeries and Procedures: shows the procedure code, followed by the text
description, followed by the date of the procedure.
Allergy History: lists the substance the patient reacted to, as well as the compound class in
this substance the patient reacted to.
Immunization History: listing of the immunization type followed by the date of immunization.
Family History: listing of the medical diagnosis code, followed by a text description, age of
onset, and blood relationship.
Hospitalizations: listing of all hospitalizations by discharge diagnosis, text description of the
diagnosis, the number of days in the hospital, and the date of admission. Knowing the number of
days in a hospital adds significant information since it gives you an idea of the severity of a specific
condition. For example, a hospital stay of 3 days for appendicitis would probably indicate a normal
course. However, if the hospital stay was 30 days, then you would expect something like a ruptured
appendix with peritonitis. This would significantly increase the chance of future problems. It would
stimulate you to ask more questions about that hospitalization, like, “were you on a ventilator?”, etc.
To understand date approximations used in this system when a patient only knows an approximate
date, see the “Past Medical History” section of patient information processing of this manual, under
the heading of “Adding a Date”.
You are then brought back to the provider “Orientation Screen” and asked if you want to “Preload
with a Scenario?”. This screen is shown in Figure 292 below.
SCENARIOS
Normally at this point, you may want to discuss the other areas just reviewed with the patient. You
would review the current problem with the patient, and do the appropriate physical exam. Following
this, you should have a good idea of the type of problem you are dealing with. In a medical
practice, 90% or more of the problems seen have been seen before. To enable you to document
these recurrent conditions, the SmartDoctor® system uses a documentation shortcut called
“Scenarios”. A “scenario” contains the subjective, objective, assessment and plan for a given
problem. The only things a “scenario” doesn't contain are the review of systems, social history, and
prescription for this condition. As should be apparent, these last items are unique to an individual,
and are not appropriate for a generalized “scenario”. Please see the “Scenarios” section of the
“Systems Files” division of this manual for more information on how to make, copy, or modify a
“scenario” for your own use. The “Scenarios” feature should help you more easily enter clinical
information and can reduce the time of full visit documentation down to as little as 35 seconds. Try
beating that with dictation!
When you select a “scenario”, you can later, prior to exiting the note, modify any component of the
229
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 291
COPYRIGHT 2004
Patient's Past Medical History.
scenario through the normal documentation functions to be described below.
In the following example ( Figure 292), we will answer “Y” to this last prompt, “Preload with a
Scenario?”, and get a pop-up window as seen in Figure 293.
Here, we entered “acu br” for acute bronchitis, which is what was felt to be the most appropriate
diagnosis after the review, additional history, and physical exam. You could also hit the <F9> key,
“List Scenarios”, to get a sorted list of scenarios from which you can choose. However, in this case,
after entering the partial description above, we get the pop-up selection window seen in Figure 294.
230
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 292
Figure 293
COPYRIGHT 2004
Preload with Scenario Question.
Selecting a Scenario.
Upon selecting line #1, we get the confirmation screen seen in Figure 295.
Please note the information on the lower half of the screen shown in Figure 295. Since the system
allows the nurse to take the subjective information for the doctor as part of the nursing notes ( for
clinics that normally operate that way), it would be inappropriate to overwrite any subjective
information input by the nurse, with that from a generalized scenario. Therefore, if the nurse has
taken any part of the subjective history, then the subjective history of the “scenario” will not be
copied into the current record. Please note that the subjective history is separate and distinct from
the nurse intake note, which is the equivalent to the patient's presenting complaint.
231
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 294
Figure 295
COPYRIGHT 2004
Scenario Cross-reference Selection screen.
Scenario Selection Confirmation screen.
Once selected, you will immediately taken through a “Visit Review” ( similar to the example shown in
Figure 296) to show you what the note would look like if you exited at this time.
Upon completing review and hitting <enter>, you are returned to the provider “Orientation Screen”
from which you can now branch to any part of the note or chart. The F-Keys at the bottom of the
screen will quickly take you to the areas you want to go with one keystroke. The central F-Keys, F5,
F6, F7, and F8 are for your “SOAP” note access, as can be seen on the sample “Orientation
Screen” seen below in Figure 297.
QUICK OVERVIEW OF THE F-KEY FUNCTIONS ON THIS SCREEN.
You will note that the “Provider Visit” screens do not have the F1 key to “End ( input)” or “Exit”. This
was done to avoid exiting the note by accident, when returning from other screens, by using the F1
key once too many times. To exit, you must do this explicitly by hitting the <F12>, “SgnOut”, to
signout.
F2,”Help”, will bring up a screen with a brief description of all the F-Keys on this screen.
232
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
233
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 296
Visit Review.
Figure 297
Provider Orientation screen.
234
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
F3, “Scen”, will allow you to overlay additional scenarios over the current note without overwriting
anything previously entered.
F4, “QM”, will bring up the Quick Menu screen as discussed in the “Basics” division of the manual.
F5, “S”, will bring you to the “Subjective” screens.
F6, “O”, will bring you to the “Objective” screens.
F7, “A”, will bring you to the “Assessment” screen.
F8, “P”, will bring you to the “Plan” screens.
F9, “VS”, will take you to the additional Vital Signs screen.
F10, “PtScd”, will take you first to the patient's insurance selection screens to change or see the
insurance carrier to be billed. Hitting the F10 key again will show you the patient waiting times for
this visit.
F11, “ChtRv”, will allow you to see any part of the patient chart including lab and images.
F12, “SgnOut”, will allow you to exit this note, taking you through a note review, immunization
reminders, and assisted charge documentation.
We will now proceed to describe each of these branches with the exception of the simple F2 help
screen, which is self explanatory, and the F4 key which is discussed in the “Basics” division of this
manual.
Scenarios: <F3> “Scen” Screen.
You can hit the <F3> key to add the first or additional scenarios on top of the first scenario, or the
documentation you have already done. Upon hilting the <F3> key, the window shown in Figure 298
Figure 298
Additional Scenario window.
235
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
will be presented.
In this case we are entering a partial description of back pain. Here we are simulating that during
the subsequent history and exam we noted a back pain complaint. After selecting the “Back Pain”
“scenario” from the subsequent pop-up selection list, we see the window shown in Figure 299.
Please read over the explanatory note on the bottom half of the screen.
Figure 299
Verifing Additional Scenario Selection.
Subjective: <F5> “S” Screen.
Upon hitting the <F5> key, the “Subjective” screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 300.
Figure 300
Subjective Notes screen.
236
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Prompt #2, “Dictate (Y/N)?”, select either “N” or “Y” from the pop-up selection box. Hitting the
<enter> key will give you the default of “N”. No dictation is the preferred way to used the system. In
general it is less accurate and more expensive to dictate. The time it takes to dictate and then
review the note is significantly longer than using the “Scenarios” method. However, in rare
instances, it may be appropriate to dictate a note ( as might be the case for psychiatric notes). In
this case, dictate the visit number and all the demographics from the “orientation” screen. You can
use the “SOAP” F-keys as an outline for the notes structure. Once dictated, the note can be added
to the patient's file via the document images screens via a Visit encounter note or a Non-Visit
encounter note.
Prompt #3, “F/U or New Problem (F/N)?”, select either “New” or “F/U” from the pop-up selection
box. The default will be “New” if you hit the <enter> on the first selection listed, which is set to
“New”. “New” should be only used for new onset or acute problems. “F/U” should be used for
conditions that have been treated by you or an equivalent member of the doctor staff ( i.e., not a
consultant in your group). Setting this flag will affect billing charges recommended, so it is important
to be correct.
Prompt #4, “F/U Status:”, will be skipped if prompt #3 is set to “New”. If prompt #3 is set to “F/U”,
then you will be presented with a choice of “Improved”, “Baseline”, or “Worse”. Pick the appropriate
response.
Prompt #5, “Date of Onset:”, if you wish to enter a date, do so in form mm/dd/yy or mmddyy.
Prompt #6, “Hours:”, enter the number of hours since onset of symptoms. If greater than 72 hrs.
use the next field to enter in days.
Prompt #7, “Days:”, enter the number of days since onset of symptoms.
Problem Number Multi-value: In the third section of this screen are the problems identified with this
visit. In the above example, we see two problems. The “Partial Description of Problem” is taken
from the first line of the subjective detail information screen. Each problem number has it's own
associated detailed subjective screen. To add a problem, simply enter <a> at the multi-value
prompt for “Prob. #”. You could also enter the number of the existing problem number to review,
add, or modify. Since in this example we have used the “acute bronchitis” scenario, we will enter a
<1>, and look at the detailed subjective screen.
Problem Specific Subjective Record
Figure 301 shows the starting screen of the problem specific subjective note. The specific sections
list items used by Medicare to audit and evaluate your E/M coding. All such audited screen prompts
on all screens in the provider visits with an asterisk ( “*”) following the title are Medicare specific
areas used in E/M coding. Other prompt headings without an asterisk were added by IMS for
completeness.
In this screen a pop-up window displays the subjective types available to select from. This selection
list comes from the TERMS file record “SUB-NOTES”.
Discussion of Subjective Types:
You have a choice of subject pop-ups to choose from, as well as the ability to add more of
your own choosing. When you first go into the subjective screen you will have a pop-up
giving you a choice of subjective term set to use. You can change the set of subjective terms
237
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
used at any time by hitting the F6 key and picking another set to use. The "DEFAULT" type
of subjective information is obtained from the following TERMS file records HX-QUALITY,
HX-BODY_AREA, HX-CONTEXT, HX-MODIFY, HX-LASTS, HX-TIMING, HX-SEVERE, HXASSOC. These can all be modified by the clinic administrator with IMS assistance. The
default selection contain the largest number of subjective terms. The system has the ability
to add as many more disease specific terms as you want. This is done via the TERMS file
using the SUB-NOTES record. This contains additional symptom specific partial keys which
need to be appended to any of the following terms to make a new unique key to be used in
place of the DEFAULT keys above: “QUALITY-”, “AREASYS-”, “CONTEXT-”, “MODIFY-”,
“LASTS-”, “TIMING-”, “SEVERE-”, and “ASSOC-”. The SUB-NOTES key should always have
the first term of the Terms Description equal to "DEFAULT", and the second term equal
to"FREE_TEXT". Following this you may add any other symptom partial keys you wish.
As an example, we have added HTN as the third term description. The length of the
appended term is restricted to a maximum of 12 characters. For each new symptom specific
subjective set you wish to make, you must make up a corresponding symptom specific full
key. For HTN, this should be: QUALITY-HTN, AREASYS-HTN, CONTEXT-HTN, MODIFYHTN,LASTS-HTN, TIMING-HTN, SEVERE-HTN, and ASSOC-HTN. You do not need to add
all eight subjective areas, since any omitted will use the default settings. See QUALITY-HTN
as an example.
Figure 301
Selecting Subjective type for Problem.
Upon hitting <enter>, the “DEFAULT” of subjective terms will be used. You can also select another
type listed here. Hitting <F1> to “end” selection will leave the prior subject type setting.
In this case, we just wanted to see what was documented before so we hit the <F1> key to “end”
selection. The screen shown in Figure 302 shows the “scenario” information placed earlier.
238
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 302
COPYRIGHT 2004
Problem screen Populated with Scenario Information.
As an example of using this system, we will add a statement that the patient had no chest pain
associated with these Quality symptoms. Since the symptom is bronchitis, we changed the
“Subjective Type” to “BRONCHITIS”, by hitting the <F6>, “Sub.Type” key, an selecting
Figure 303
Entering Symptom Terms Using Bronchitis List.
239
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
“BRONCHITIS”. Next, at the “Symptom/Quality” change prompt, enter <a> to add. The screen now
appears as shown in Figure 303.
You should notice several things on this screen. First, the multi-value prompt,
“SYMPTOM/QUALITY/REASON”, has been scrolled down to open line #5. If you see all the lines
filled between the prompts, you should scroll down in these prompts to be sure you have seen all
the information. Second, the number of lines you can have in each multi-valued prompt on this
screen is unlimited. Third, the pop-up selection box is now specific to bronchitis terms. Here we
have highlighted “Neg for”. This is a multi-select prompt that has more than the 15 terms
presented. You can tell this by looking above the bottom bar where you will see the message
“There is more. Press <return> to select or <end> to accept”. Upon pressing <enter> ( or
<return>), an asterisk will be placed next to each choice. To un-select, highlight that line again and
hit <enter> again. The asterisk will be removed, indicating the line is unselected. Once you are
through selecting the terms you wish, hit the <F1> key to “end” selection. The system will then take
the selected terms from the top of the list down and construct a pseudo sentence. Then, if finished,
hit <F1> without selecting when the next line opens and the pop-up multi-selection box is presented.
The screen shown in Figure 304 shows the result of selecting “Neg. for” and “chest pain” for line #5:
Figure 304
Result of Adding Selected Terms.
The remaining Multi-value prompts on this screen act in the same manner.
The final single value prompts #10 through #13 are slightly different. Upon selecting to go into each
of these prompts, you first hit <enter> as indicated just above these prompts. You will then be
presented with a multi-select pop-up as on the upper half of the screen. However, the number of
items selected must be done logically. We are trying to save you typing time and get consistency of
terminology by presenting these pop-ups. In prompts #11 & #12, only select one term. Selecting
more for these two prompts would be illogical since they are mutually exclusive terms. Prompt #13
can have multiple selections as can #10.
240
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Upon completing this screen, you will be returned to the main subjective screen.
At the bottom of the subjective screen is the “Subjective Notes” multi-value prompt ( see Figure
300). This is to be used to enter any information to difficult to enter into the standard subjective
screens. This is completely “free text” and unlimited in the number of lines you can enter. This may
be a place to document that you had a prolonged discussion related to this patient's anxious
depression after losing his wife. Note the discussion lasted 45 minutes. Should you be audited,
you can show the amount of time you spent in counseling this patient. The standard E/M evaluator
and this system cannot analyze this type of information to come up with a suggested E/M code. So,
just document your work here.
Review of Systems <F6> “ROS” screen from main Subjective
screen.
Upon hitting this F-key, the screen seen in Figure305 is presented.
Figure 305
Review of Systems screen.
Every time you enter this screen, you will have the option to set all these ROS terms to normal. The
default response of <enter> is “No”. Hitting <F1> at this point will also result in not setting these
prompts to “N” for normal. If you enter <y>, them all prompts will be set to “N” for normal. Once
past this, you will see the following change prompt:
“Change prompt (1 - 15), A)ll, F)ill”
This works in the standard manner as described in the “Basics” section of this manual. As you are
going through these, follow the instructions just above these prompt items to “Enter <n> for
Negative, <a> for Abnormal, or hit <Enter> if not reviewed.” Also, if a value has been set in one of
these prompts to “n” or “a”, you can either over type it with the opposite letter, or enter a space
241
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
followed by <enter> to clear it completely. The prompt logic works the same for each of these
prompts. Entering an “n” will cause this to show up on chart review as “Normal”. It will not show up
at all if blank.
Upon entering “a” for abnormal in prompt #7, “Respiratory”, you will be placed in the screen shown
in Figure 306.
Figure 306
Selecting Respiratory ROS Terms.
In this multi-valued prompt, as each line is added the pop-up single selection box will be presented
to select from. Again, do this in a logical way. If you happen to select an item twice in the list,
delete the unneeded line number. After selecting this last item on the list, we hit the <F1> to “end”
input. You will then be at the change prompt on this screen to “A)dd, I)nsert, D)elete, L)ist”. Once
complete, hit the <F1> to “end” input and return to the prior screen.
The terms that are presented in these pop-up selection screens can be changed by the clinic, with
assistance from IMS. The record keys for these terms all start with “ROS-”, with the appropriate
ROS area attached such as, “ROS-RESPIRATORY”.
If we did a “Chart Review” now, and selected “Review Current Visit”, we would see the following
information in the ROS section:
Social History <F7> “SocialHx” screen from main Subjective screen.
Upon hitting this F-key, the screen shown in Figure 307 is presented.
242
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 307
COPYRIGHT 2004
Provider Only, Social History screen.
This screen can only be seen by providers, and only on-line. This information is never printed on
any reports or chart printouts. Further to view these screens a visit must be scheduled, or you must
be a provider that is allowed to use the “Doctor Main Menu” and use the the “Non-Scheduled
Provider Visit”.
Prompts #1 through #5 are common to the patient's “Patient File” record. Changing data in either
screen will affect the other, and will be seen on a screen refresh. Prompts #1through #10 are all
single value prompts. Each of these are associated with single selection pop-up screens. The
three multi-valued prompts on the lower half of the screen “Occupation type”, “Habits”, and “Sexual
History”, also have the same type of association to the single selection pop-up screens. The terms
presented in these single selection pop-up screens are maintained in the TERMS file with record
keys starting with “HX-”. Appended to these are terms taken from the prompts above. For
example, the “Habits” record key is “HX-HABITS”. These can be changed by the clinic
administrator with assistance from IMS.
The logic to be used for the order of items listed in the multi-valued prompts on this screen
( “Occupation type”, “Habits”, and “Sexual History”) should be the most recent at the top, or line #1.
Therefore, under “Occupation”, this patient was first in the military, then in construction, then
farming, and now is working as a mechanic. His habits are all those listed. His sexual history
shows only “Heterosex. >1 part”. If the sexual history changes, it would be appropriate to leave the
older information and to insert the new information into prompt #1. For example, the patient's wife
died, and he is no longer sexually active.
From the “Orientation Screen” again.
Objective: <F6> “O” Screen.
Upon hitting the <F6>, “O” key, you will be taken to the screen seen in Figure 308 below.
243
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 308
COPYRIGHT 2004
Objective screen.
Every time you go into this screen you will be presented with the following screen prompt:
“Set to Default NORMALS template? (<Enter>=No/y=Yes)”
If you didn't indicate a scenario earlier, you are doing a fresh documentation, and most of the exam
you have done is normal, you may want to enter <y> here. If you do so, the selection pop-up
window seen in Figure 309 below will appear.
Figure 309
Select Default
These choices and their meanings are defined in the TERMS file under the record key of “ADM-NLMAIN”. These can be changed by the clinic administrator with the assistance of IMS. In this
example, two doctors have different things they examine during a physical exam and, therefore,
would like to set those items they examine to normal. Also, only certain items my be checked and
found to be normal for disease specific exams. Having selected one of these will set the items you
244
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
specified to normal. However, from the change prompt you can go back and modify any of these if
they are not normal.
In the following screen ( Figure 210) is seen the current example. We hit <enter> ( or <F1>) so as
not to change what was set by the two scenarios we chose earlier.
Figure 310
Objective screen with Normals & Abnormals Set.
This screen is similar to the subjective screen. On the top portion, you can go to specific prompts
for assisted documentation, and the last multi-valued prompt for “Objective Notes” is unlimited free
text. The “Objective Notes” should be reserved for documentation that is too difficult to document
with the templated information provided.
The general flags set in these prompts determine if a sub-screen is open for more detailed
information. As indicated just above the prompts, “Enter <n> for Normal, <a> for abnormal, <p> for
partial exam or to print detail, and leave blank (just Enter) if not examined” In some cases, a carrier
may request to see all the actual components of an exam rather than accepting that the entire
organ system was examined and found to be normal. Also, sometimes only part of an organ
system is examined. These are the cases when you should use the “P” indicator for a partial exam
or to list out ( and print if the record is printed) what was examined. For example, for osteopathic
manipulation, it is necessary to document each spinal level examined, as well as major joints, for
reimbursement.
Prompts 2 through #21 work in generally the same way. One of the major differences is that there
is no free text option. Free text is only available in the “Objective note” discussed above. However,
there are two general types. First, is a series of multi-valued prompts similar to the “Subjective
Problem Record” discussed above. The second is similar, but has a multiple column input. Both
will be discussed below.
245
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
First is an example of the multi-valued screen prompt that has only one field that is derived from a
multi-select pop-up list. For this example, we will use the prompt #8 ,“*Lungs
(Ausc,Percus,Palp,Effort):”. Upon selecting this item from the change prompt and entering <a>,
the screen seen in Figure 311 will open.
Figure 311
Lung Examination screen.
The default “NORMALS” option is similar to the ROS option discussed earlier. If <y> is entered,
then all multi-values are set to “Normal”. To add to one of these multi-valued prompts after the first
is set to “Normal” requires you to first delete the “Normal” line.
In this example, we will hit <enter> ( for “No”) to preserve what was defaulted into all these prompts
as a result of the “scenarios” chosen. The screen then will appear as seen in Figure 312 below.
We will hit <enter> to skip to the second multi-value prompt “AUSCULTATION OF LUNGS*”. Again
as mention in the subjective notes section, the prompts with an asterisk are evaluated for E/M
coding. Those not so flagged were added for completeness.
Notice that “LINE” ( in Figure 312) of the second multi-valued prompt is highlighted and in capital
letters, and, at the bottom of the screen ( above the bottom bar), the multi-valued change prompt
indicates “Auscultation Lungs” which corresponds to the highlighted line. Here, we will add an
additional note as seen Figure 313 below.
Here ( Figure 313), we have done a multi-select on “Bilat.” and “wheezes”. Hitting <F1> once to
end the selection and once to end multi-value input for this prompt. We then see the resulting
screen shown in Figure 314 below, with a new pseudo sentence indicating “Bilat., wheezes.”.
To exit this screen without entering any further information, simply <F1> through the remaining
prompts.
246
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 312
Figure 313
COPYRIGHT 2004
Lung Exam with Scenario Settings.
Selecting Lung Sounds.
247
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 314
COPYRIGHT 2004
Lung Sounds Completed.
The second example is that of a multi-valued screen prompt that has multiple column input. The
input for each column is derived from a multi-select pop-up list. For this example, we will use
prompt #12, “*Heart, VJD, & Ped. Edema:”. Upon selecting this item from the change prompt and
entering <p> for a partial exam, the screen seen in Figure 315 will open.
Figure 315
Heart Exam screen.
248
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
In this partial exam, only the Heart Rhythm and Heart sound were were done. Here we will add a
murmur to “Heart Sounds*”. You will see as each field is entered a single selection window popsup, the “Heart Sounds” selection first, as seen in Figure 316.
Figure 316
Heart Sounds Selection.
Heart sounds intensity selection is next as seen in Figure 317 below.
Figure 317
Heart Sounds, Intensity.
Location of heart sounds selection is next as seen in Figure 318.
Resulting screen after the changes made above can be seen in Figure 319.
Hit the <F1> key repeatedly to skip remaining prompts, and return to main “Objective” screen.
Objective Copy <F7>, “Copy” screen. Hit <F7> “Copy” to copy an objective exam from a prior visit.
This may be extremely useful for a patient with a complicated and abnormal physical exam. Rather
249
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 318
Heart Sounds, Location.
Figure 319
Heart Sounds Revised.
Figure 320
Copy Objective Exam window.
250
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
than re-document the entire exam, you can copy it in from a prior visit note. Then modify the exam
for the current changes. Upon hitting the <F7> “Copy” key, you open the pop-up window shown in
Figure 320.
At the change prompt on this screen, enter <1> to go to prompt #1. Here, enter <y> to start the
objective note copy. Review the note on the bottom half of the window shown above ( Figure 320).
Having read this note, it should be apparent that you cannot copy over existing information. So,
unless you have not done any documentation on the “Objective” screens, you must be sure that
objective area you want to copy into from a prior note is blank. For example, if you wanted to copy
a detailed back exam from a prior visit, before hitting the <F7>--Copy key, you should go to prompt
#19, “*Musculoskel.(& detail spine):”, and enter a <space> key to blank the field and get rid of the
“A” currently there ( as seen in Figure 310). Of course, you can go back and do this now if you
forgot. The next screen presented ( Figure 321) will let you select the prior visit encounter you want
to copy the objective data from.
Figure 321
Selecting Prior Visit Note to Copy Objective Exam.
Line #1 on the above screen is the current visit. So, you would enter the line number other visits to
copy. You can page down through this list to find the appropriate visit objective data to copy. Once
copied, you will see the following message come up just above the bottom bar on the screen:
“Data copied, F1 back to Objective screen, return to continue”
Hit <F1> as indicated. You can copy from as many prior visits as you want. Just remember, only
those prompts that are blank on the main objective screen will have prior visit data copied in.
From the “Orientation Screen” again.
Assessment: <F7> “A” Screen.
Upon hitting the <F7> ”A” key the screen shown in Figure 322 will come up.
You see listed here the two assessments from the selected two scenarios. The first was selected
after the initial chart review, and the second later. You can now add, insert, delete, and list ( page
through) diagnoses. There are several important points to make regarding assessments that
251
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 322
COPYRIGHT 2004
Assessment screen.
will significantly affect the validity of your billing:
1. Always list the most significant and medically complex reason for the visit first.
2. Only the first four diagnoses can be used for billing. Listing more will allow the system to
document these other problems in the problem list. They will not show on a printed billing
form since there is only room for four diagnoses.
3. If you are going to do a procedure, list the diagnosis on this screen before going to the
procedure screen. The procedure screen only allows you to select a diagnosis from
assessments already noted on this screen, to be sure the procedure charge will not be
rejected because the proper diagnosis was not listed in the assessment list.
4. In the add mode ( as will be shown below in Figure 324), always try to select from a
previous diagnosis entered for this patient in the past. This will help to keep the patient's
active problem list more concise. For example, if you previously used a more precise
diagnosis to describe a problem such as “530.81 ESOPHAGEAL REFLUX”, it would be
better to select this from the patient's active problem list rather than to enter “heartburn” and
end up selecting “787.1 HEARTBURN”. In addition, it will save you time.
Upon hitting <a>, you will be placed in the add mode as seen below in Figure 323. Please note the
new F-Key to “Select from Active Medical Problems”. Hitting <F9> here results in the pop-up
window seen in Figure 324 to select from.
Upon selecting line #5 ( in Figure 324) and then hitting the <F1> key to end adding diagnoses, we
get the assessment screen shown in Figure 325.
252
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 323
Adding to Assessment screen.
Figure 324
Figure 325
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selecting from Active Medical Problems.
Final Assessment screen.
253
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
From the “Orientation Screen” again.
Plan: <F8> “P” Screen.
Upon hitting the <F8> ”P” key the screen shown in Figure 326 will come up.
Figure 326
Provider Plan Menu.
For completeness in this manual, we will now go through each of these menu selections. At least
one example of each menu item will be shown. However, it is extremely unlikely that you would
ever use all of these menu selections in any one visit.
Menu selection #1, “Provider Performed Lab”.
Upon selecting this menu item, you will be placed in the following screen:
Figure 327
IN House Lab Menu.
254
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Here, we highlighted and selected item #10. We get the following input screen.
Figure 328
Starting Hematocrit screen.
On these type of screens for inhouse labs performed by the provider, you will hit <F9> to get a new
lab number and start documentation. Once documentation is complete, the screen appears as
below ( Figure 329) with the standard warning flags as discussed previously:
Figure 329
Completed Hematocrit Data Entry.
To void the above lab test, you would type “VOID” or hit the <F8> ”VOID” key, while in prompt #4.
The provider could have also ordered this inhouse lab to be done by the nursing staff via the “Lab
Order” screen. In this case, the inhouse Hematocrit would have been placed in the nurse's queue
to perform. ( The “Collect/Process Doctor Ordered Labwork.” menu selection on the nursing
screen.)
255
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Menu selection #2, “Order Lab”.
To order lab tests to be done, either “InHouse” or outside lab, you would select this menu item.
Upon selecting this item, you will get a screen similar to that shown in Figure 330 below.
Figure 330
Lab Test Order screen.
On this screen, you will see the historical record of all lab tests ordered on this patient in
chronological order. Any new test ordered will be placed at the bottom of the list. This will allow
you to see any recent tests ordered and help avoid making the mistake of ordering a lab test that
was done recently and not necessary to repeat again at this time.
As seen above, the most recent Hematocrit that was done InHouse by the doctor is seen. Also note
that an InHouse lab was ordered via this screen on line #2. In the case of the first InHouse lab, you
can see in the “St” ( status) column the first item is “COM” ( Completed), and the second item is still
in the “ORD” ( Ordered) status. This second order has been queued for nursing staff to do. This in
turn will be queued for the provider to do the microscopic portion of this test.
The third test has been queued for an outside lab. If this is an automated test that will be draw
inhouse, then this will be queued for nursing staff to draw, and a requisition will be produced. The
automated lab result will then be automatically posted to the chart for your review. If there is an
outside lab that is not automated and will will be drawn elsewhere, just an outside requisition slip will
be produced on patient exit.
Menu selection #3, “Order X-RAY, INHOUSE”.
To order an InHouse X-Ray, you would select this menu item. Upon selection you will see the
following screen ( Figure 331). We already entered “chest” in line #1 and got the pop-up window to
confirm the order as shown below:
256
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 331
COPYRIGHT 2004
InHouse X-Ray Order screen.
Hit <enter> if this is correct. Next, you will get a pop-up that shows different selections for when to
have the x-ray done. Subsequently, you'll get a pop-up to pick a diagnosis from the assessment list
you had previously input. When done, the screen will appear as shown in Figure 332 below.
Figure 332
InHouse X-Ray Order Added.
This inhouse x-ray will then be queued for the x-ray technician to perform. Once performed, the
provider can either do the pulmonary or final reading from the chart review screen during this visit
note, or from the “Preliminary & Final InHouse X-RAY Reading” option from the doctor main menu.
Menu selection #4, “Order Other Diagnostic Services, incl. X-RAY”.
Upon selecting this menu selection, you'll get the diagnostic services screen ( Figure 333). In
prompt #1, the encounter number will be defaulted for you. Hit <enter> to accept. In the multi-value
change prompt at the bottom of the screen, enter <a> to add. You'll will then see the following
screen presented with a pop-up window indicating the diagnostic services that you can order. This
pop-up window is defined in the terms file in the “LAB-DIAGNOSTIC” record. Your clinic
administrator can modify this list as necessary with the assistance of IMS.
Once you have selected the diagnostic test, you will get another pop-up window for you to select
when the test is to be done. Following this, you'll get a final pop-up to indicate which diagnosis from
the assessment list to associative with this test. The resulting screen will appear as shown in Figure
334.
257
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 333
Select Diagnostic Test to Order.
Figure 334
Completed Diagnostic Test Order Line.
Menu selection #5, “Order Therapeutic Medicine, Inj., or Immun.”
Upon choosing this item, the screen shown in Figure 335 will be presented. Hit <enter> and accept
the defaulted encounter number.
On the multi-value prompt under medication book #, hit <enter> to accept the next defaulted
medication book number. Doing this will take you to the next medication administration screen, as
seen Figure 336.
In prompts #2, enter a partial description of the substances you want to administer. For this
example, ”roc” was entered. Following this you'll get the next pop-up window (Figure 337) to pick
the appropriate substance.
We will pick line item No. 2 for an injectable form of “ROCEPHIN”. Next, a window will pop open
has seen in Figure 338 for the dosage form and cost information.
Upon selecting the dosage form ( with some medications there can be a number of selections here),
you'll be placed in the window seen in Figure 339 to indicate the amount.
258
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 335
Order Medication Administration.
Figure 336
Entering Medication to Administer.
259
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 337
Figure 338
Figure 339
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selecting Substance to Administer.
Selecting Dosage Form.
Selecting Amount of Medication.
After selecting the amount, the final administration screen will be seen as shown in Figure 340.
At this point, the provider can notify the nurse that administration of a medication is needed. The
nurse can then check for of the queued medications to be given from the nurses screen, menu item
#2 “Give Medication or Immunization”. Please see the nursing section of this manual for
administration of medications and immunizations ordered by the provider. The provider on
returning to the screen after administration can see the administration information. Also, the
provider can hit <F6> ”AdminNote” to administer the medication and document this, as explained in
the nursing section of this manual.
Upon returning from this screen by hitting <F1> to “end”, the provider is returned to the “Therapeutic
Injection or Immun.” screen seen in Figure 341. Here, you can see the effect of the medication
order.
260
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 340
Figure 341
COPYRIGHT 2004
Final Medication Administration Order screen.
Completed Medication Order.
You will note the drug given, the amount given, and the time of the order. The time given column
will be filled in when the drug has been administered by the nurse. In this way, the doctor can easily
checked to see if the medication has been given and when.
261
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Menu selection #6, “Do Procedures”.
Upon selecting this menu item and accepting the default encounter number, we get the following
screen ( Figure 342) with a defaulted procedure number. If you wish to proceed, just hit <enter> to
accept this procedure number.
Figure 342
Starting Procedure Note.
After accepting the above procedure number, you'll be presented with the following screen ( Figure
343).
Figure 343
Selectiong the Type of Procedure Note.
There are currently two types of procedure notes that can be done. The first type is called a
standard procedure note, from the original form of procedure notes, when the system was initially
developed. This is still used today, but is not the preferred method. The preferred method of doing
a procedure note would be the defined procedure note. The defined procedure note is described in
the systems section of this manual. There, you can define the elements of the procedure note, the
note itself, as well as the variables allowed in each defined field.
Below ( Figure 344) is an example of the standard procedure note in which the key to the note is
defined in the Terms file record, “PROC-NOTES”. This record lists the keys which are terms file
records. These records contain the narrative notes to be associated with these keys. All the
variable fields are defined for the pop-up screens in the TERMS file. The keys for these variable
lists in the TERMS file are as follows: “PROC-AGENT” for Types of Agent, “PROC-ANES” for Types
262
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
of anesthesia, “PROC-CLOSURE” for Type of closure material, “PROC-CONDITION” for Patient
condition after proc., and “PROC-TRAYSIZE” for Surgical tray size. The remaining variables are
free text.
Figure 344
Standard Procedure Note.
Initially, you're presented with the pop-up screen containing the assessments you already assigned
to this visit from the <F7> Assessments screen. Therefore, it will save you time if you list the
diagnosis or indication for this procedure before documenting a procedure. After the diagnosis has
been selected, you will be required to enter a cross-reference for an appropriate CPT to bill. In this
example, we will put “inhal” in the cross-reference to find an appropriate CPT code for inducing a
sputum. This is shown on the following screen ( Figure 345).
Figure 345
Selecting Procedure Code.
In the example above, we picked a procedure that would fit with one of our diagnoses from the
assessment screen. In this case, there wasn't a pre-defined note for induction of sputum, so we
selected “Free-Text” from the pop-up window in prompt #16 ( see Figure 346). We next put in the
narrative part of the note at the top of the screen. This is all free text. This free text note could
have easily been placed in the terms file with a key of induced sputum ( “INDUCEDSPUTUM”, 13 or
less characters and no spaces required) and selected as the note type in prompt #16. Upon
selection, this note would have populated the narrative field. You could have then modified the
263
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
narrative note as
Figure 346
Completed Standard Procedure Note.
needed via the change prompt. The other prompts in the screen that had pop-ups associate with
them were skipped by pressing F1 to skip without selection. In prompt #4 for area, the “LUNGS”
term was a cross-reference lookup from the glossary file. This file contains cross-references for
anatomical terms ( discussed in the Systems section of this manual). In this case, we typed “lun”
for the cross-reference lookup, and selected “LUNGS” as seen above.
The advantage of using the “Standard Procedure” note is that it is already set up, and is well
designed for typical minor surgical procedures. The pop-up screens are easily modifiable with the
assistance of IMS. The disadvantage is that you have to go through all the prompts whether you
need them or not. Further, you cannot add additional prompts if you need them. Also, there is no
ability to crosscheck whether the note picked is appropriate for the procedure code indicated, nor is
checking for sex or age contraindications done. To remedy this problem, the “Defined Procedure”
note was developed, as discussed in the systems files section of this manual. The screen works in
a similar fashion, with the exception that as the procedure code is selected, editing for age and sex
appropriateness is done, and a specific note is tied to that procedure code. In addition, the number
of variable prompts can be specified from 1 to 14, and the types of pop-ups and variables can be
defined for each individual variable prompt.
On exiting the procedure note, you'll be brought back to the initial Procedure Book screen ( Figure
342) where all the procedures for this visit are listed. If you are to do another procedure, simply hit
<enter> on the next line to accept the new procedure book number. The process will start over
again. If there are no further procedures to enter, use <F1> repeatedly to end out of the add mode
and exit to the prior Plan screen.
264
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Menu selection #7, “Immed. Write Prescriptions (individual Rx's)”. & Menu selection #8,
“Delay Write Prescriptions (as a group)”
The function of these two menu selections are identical, with the exception of how the prescription
is presented. The difference being the “Immediate Write” single prescriptions, versus the delayed
Grouped prescriptions, produced at the end of the visit note.
Use <F7> to write an individual prescription. (This can be printed, faxed, or electronically sent to
the pharmacy if they are set up to accept it in this way.). This selection is most appropriate when a
prescription should be written, and signed individually. A good example of this would be a class 3
controlled substance such as Tylenol with ½ grain of codeine. Pharmacists do not want to see this
mixed with Legend drugs such as Lasix, etc.
The example below is for a single prescription for immediate output. However, other than as
discussed above, the Grouped prescription writing system logic is identical.
Doing a prescription refill has already been documented in the nursing section of this manual. The
only difference here is that if the provider is classified as a doctor ( that is, MD, DO, ND, DC, NP,
PA –the last 3 with limitations depending on state laws), a new prescription may be written.
Therefore, in the example below we will only show how to write a new prescription. Upon selecting
to write a new prescription, the following screen will be presented to you. Hit <F9>, as indicated on
the bottom bar of the screen, to start a new prescription.
Figure 347
Initial Prescription Writer screen.
After hitting <F9> the screen will be represented. However, this time the patient information will be
presented, and the bottom bar will have changed as shown in Figure 348 below.
You will note in the bottom bar that the F-Keys have changed. There is an <F3> ”Dx/Rx” key to
look up what other physicians have used for a specific diagnosis, an <F8> “VOID” to void a
265
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
prescription anywhere during writing a prescription prior to finalizing it, and <F9> ”Refill Rx” to
indicate refill in prompt #2 in place of a drug name cross-reference.
The <F8> key is self-explanatory. When you enter <F8> in a field which it is accepted, you
Figure 348
New Prescription Started.
will be given a pop-up window to ask if you want to void this prescription. If you indicate “yes” to
void this prescription, you will then be asked to hit <F1> to complete the void process. The <F9>
refill key works identically to that discuss in the nursing section of this manual, with the exception
that doctors, as defined above, have the ability to refill controlled substances.
Following ( Figure 349) will be a demonstration of using the <F3> ”Dx/Rx” key to look up drugs used
for acute bronchitis by other providers. We will then attempt to use this in prompt #2 to show you
an absolute drug contra-indication. We have set up this example with a drug that has subsequently
been pulled from the market because of the bad interaction it can cause with certain other drugs. In
this case, even though the drug had been recalled, we want to leave it in the patient's medication
list until we talk to the patient to be sure they have discarded the drug. Once the patient confirms
that they have discarded the drug, then, and only then, should you delete the drug from the patient's
medication list. Patients have a tendency when they have developed an illness or recurrence of
illness, that they will pull old medicines out of the medicine cabinet and start using them again. If
you are not aware of this potential problem, a lethal drug interaction could occur, as is the potential
with the two drugs we will see here.
Upon hitting the <F3> key above, the screen shown in Figure 349 will be presented. In prompt #1,
we entered “acu br” for acute bronchitis. A cross-reference pop-up box presented, and we selected
acute bronchitis as indicated.
From this screen, it appears that by “BIAXIN” would be a good choice. Therefore we will enter part
of the drug name, ”bia” in prompt #2 for a cross-reference lookup, and we get the cross-reference
266
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
pop-up box as seen Figure 350 below.
Figure 349
Drug Prescription Experience screen.
Figure 350
Drug Selection screen.
Upon selecting the highlighted line,we are shown the generic drug name in prompt #2, and shown
the brand-name in the pop-up box, where we are asked to confirm that we want to proceed with this
substance. Hitting <enter> key to proceed, we get the following “ABSOLUTE compound contraindication” pop-up as shown in Figure 351.
In this example, it is found that “BIAXIN”, a “MACROLIDE” antibiotic, has an “ABSOLUTE
compound contra-indication” with “CISAPRIDE”, brand name “Propulsid”, a gastrointestinal mobility
drug. Patients could develop extremely rapid, and even fatal, cardiac arrhythmias. Warnings were
put out for a long time, however these interactions continued. Therefore “Propulsid” was pulled
from the market.
If for some reason the physician is absolutely sure that they want to prescribe a drug that has
absolute contraindications, they can do so in a pseudo manual way. You can entered the drug
name in prompt #2 followed by “-*”. The system will then not be able to find this drug and will ask
you if you want to prescribe it with limited assistance. You will be informed that no drug interactions
will be performed.
We will now proceed to show you an acceptable prescription, using the antibiotic “Keflex”.
267
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 351
COPYRIGHT 2004
Absolute Compound Contra-Indication.
Figure 352
Selecting Dosage Form.
In the above pop-up window ( Figure 352) after Keflex has been selected, you'll see the available
dosages forms, followed by the brand, and generic costs for a typical days dosage. The dosing
order is based on clinical judgment. The dosage most likely to be used will be listed first, followed
by all other dosages. For example, had this been “Premarin” the 0.625 mg dosage would be listed
first, with all other dosages ( both above and below this amount) listed subsequently. The purpose
here is to make it easy for a doctor to fill a typical prescription by just hitting <enter> as each box
pops-up.
Pop-up selection boxes will be presented for you as you go through each of the prompt items. The
order of selection is set as indicated above to reduce your need to scroll up and down. However, at
the bottom of each selection box, other than the dosage box, you will see an ”as below” listed last.
If you select this in any of the prompts, then the system will automatically stop you at prompts #3 &
#4. This gives you two lines to fill in any specific directions on how to take medication. When you
get to prompt #5, you will see a pop-up box asking you if this prescription is chronic, acute, or a
sample prescription. If it is a chronic medication, the system will look at the provider file to find the
number days the provider wants defaulted for a a chronic prescription. Also, it will look at the
268
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
default number of times per year the chronic prescription can be refilled. Based on that information
the system will calculate the quantity required to dispense and indicate the number of refills. If this
information is not in the provider file, then these responses will have to be filled manually. You can
always over write these defaulted values. If you indicated a sample, then you will be taken to a new
screen to document the information needed as well as the “Sig”, number dispensed, lot number,
etc.
Next you'll be stopped at prompt #9 for nurse refill allowed. This is generally defaulted as “yes”.
This will automatically be changed to “no” for controlled substances. If it is a controlled substance,
the number will be shown in text format next to dispense number. At the indication box, you will be
prompted to pick from one of the assessments you had entered earlier in this note. Therefore, it is
important to list all the problems you are evaluating including refills in the assessment. Prompts
10 and 11 are generally defaulted by the system with the generic warnings that are felt to be
clinically appropriate. You can override these defaulted instructions by going into the prompt and
entering a space followed by the <enter> key. This will delete the line. Finally you'll be presented
with the choice of generic or brand drug. The default is for generic. After completing this typical
prescription the screen appears as seen in Figure 353 below.
Figure 353
Completed Prescription screen.
If you selected Prompt # 7, “Immed. Write Prescriptions (individual Rx's)” to write this
prescription, then you will get the following prompt in a small pop-up window:
Print Prescription Now? (<enter>=yes/n=no)
If you hit <enter> for “yes” and your clinic has more than one prescription printer, then you will get a
pop-up screen to select the prescription printer to use. If your site is set up for faxing to the
pharmacy or electronic transfer to the pharmacy, then you will be prompted appropriately.
269
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
If instead, you selected Prompt # 8, “Delay Write Prescriptions (as a group)” to write this
prescription, then you will get the following prompt in a small pop-up window:
Add Prescriptions to Print? (<enter>=yes/n=no)
If you hit <enter> for “yes”, then the prescription will be placed in a queue for later printing or
transmission with other “delayed print” prescriptions. You will be asked on exiting this note if you
want to print (or transmit) the group of prescriptions that have been queued.
Menu selection #9, “Give Instructions”.
Use this menu item to document information materials that had been handed out by the provider to
the patient, or are to be handed out when the patient exits. Upon selecting this menu item, hit
<enter> in prompt #1 to accept the default “Encounter Number”. The following screen will be
presented ( Figure 354):
Figure 354
Orders for Patient Instructions.
In the multi-value line for “Doc. #(Xref)”, enter part of the description of the document or materials
you want to give to the patient. The standard cross-reference lookup will then be used to find the
title in the information file. The selected document will be listed with its title in the second field,
“Document to give to patient.” Next, a pop-up screen will be presented to indicate whether this is to
270
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 355
COPYRIGHT 2004
Give by.
be given to the patient by the provider, the clerk on exit, or that it is out of stock and queue it for
later delivery to the patient, as seen in Figure 355.
Once indicated to be handed out by the provider or by the clerk on exit, you will be placed on the
next line to specify additional information to hand out. If no more handouts are desired, hit the
<F1> key to “end” input. The screen showing the selection and method of handouts is seen in
Figure 356 below.
Figure 356
Final Orders for Patient Instructions.
Items contained in the information file are defined in the systems section of this manual under
prompt #12. “Pt. Information File”, from the “Systems Information File” screen.
Menu selection #10, “Make Referrals”.
Select this menu item to make referrals. In prompt #1 of this new screen, hit the <enter> key to
accept the defaulted “Encounter Number”. The following referral screen seen in Figure 357 below.
Upon opening this screen and accepting the default encounter number, you will be placed in line #1
of the multi-value for the provider to whom you want to refer this patient. You can enter part of the
provider's name, and/or city, and/or specialty, for a cross-reference lookup in the referring provider
271
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
file. Or, you can use the “F9” key on this screen to select from a list of providers,
Provider List <F9> key, will bring up a list of referring providers in the system from which you can
select. Alternatively you can do a cross-reference search by entering in the “Provider” field part of
the providers name. The selection screen is shown in Figure 358 for the name “smith”, entered on
the first multi-valued prompt line of Figure 357.
Next you will get to select when to have the referral as seen in Figure 359 below.
Figure 357
Figure 358
Ordering Referrals
Cross-Reference Lookup for Referral.
272
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 359
Selecting When.
You can page down through this screen for additional choices. The pop-up is defined in the
TERMS file record “LAB-WHEN”, and can be changed by the system administrator with the
assistance of IMS.
In “Reason (ICD-9 Code)” field, enter the ICD-9 code using the standard cross-reference lookup for
assessments.
In the field labeled “A” for appointment type, enter as follows:
R for Regular Appt.:
M Mandatory Appt.:
N No Appt. Req'd:
Routine visit, minor illness, S/R, etc.
Abnormal test, serious prob, neoplasm, etc.
Screening PE, school PE, etc.; no med prob.
The second line of the multi-value is for your comments to the referral provider. This is a free-text
entry. These comments will be printed on the referral sheet.
The resulting screen is seen in Figure 360 below:
273
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 360
COPYRIGHT 2004
Completed Referral Order Line.
If a second referral is to be done, repeat in the same manner as on line #1, otherwise hit the <F1>
key to “end” input.
Menu selection #11, “Schedule Procedures”.
Select this menu item to schedule one or more procedures. In prompt #1 of this new screen, hit
<enter> to accept the defaulted “Encounter Number”. The following “Schedule Procedures” screen
will be seen ( Figure 361):
274
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 361
COPYRIGHT 2004
Initial Schedule Procedures screen.
In the multi-value line for scheduling procedures, indicate in the “CPT Code” field a partial
description of the procedure for a cross-reference lookup, or enter the actual CPT code. The
description of the procedure will be shown in the “Description” field automatically.
Next you will get the pop-up shown in Figure 362 where you will select when you want this
procedure scheduled.
Figure 362
Procedure When.
You can page down through this screen for additional choices. The pop-up is defined in the
TERMS file record “PLAN-SCHED_PRO”, and can be changed by the system administrator with the
assistance of IMS.
275
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
The resulting screen is seen in Figure 363 below.
Figure 363
Completed Procedure Schedule Line.
In this example, a Flexible Sigmoidoscopy is to be scheduled in two weeks. If another procedure is
to be scheduled, just continue in the same manner on line #2. Otherwise, hit the <F1> key to “end”
input. Procedures indicated for scheduling on this screen will be queued for the patient exiting
process.
Menu selection #12, “Schedule Single Follow-Up Appt. & Disability”
Select this menu item to schedule a single follow-up appointment and disability note. In prompt #1
of this new screen, hit <enter> to accept the defaulted “Encounter Number”. The Follow-Up
Appointment screen can be seen in Figure 364 below.
Prompt#2, “F/U with:”, will bring up a pop-up selection window for the person in the clinic to make
an appointment with. Selecting “Me” will result in indicating an appointment for yourself. This popup selection list is maintained in the TERMS file record “PLAN-WHO”. All the selections, other than
the first, can be changed by the clinic administrator with the help of IMS.
Prompt #3, “When:”, will bring up the pop-up seen in Figure 365 below. This pop-up selection list is
maintained in the TERMS file record “PLAN-SCHED_APPT”. All the selections, other than the first,
can be change by the clinic administrator with the help of IMS.
You can page down ( or scroll down) to see additional choices in Figure 365.
Prompt #4, “Appointment Type:”, will be skipped unless the entry in prompt#2 is set to “Me”. If
prompt #2 “F/U with:” was set to “Me”, then your appointment schedule will be shown. You can then
select the appointment type and length you desire. Your specific appointment types will appear
similar to that shown in Figure 366 below:
276
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 364
COPYRIGHT 2004
Schedule F/U/ Appointment.
Figure 365
Select When
These appointment types are set in the Clinic Provider File as discussed in the basics section of this
manual.
Prompt #5, “Reason for F/U:”, is for a symptom or reason for visit. This works exactly the same as
in the appointment scheduling section of this manual. It is a cross-reference lookup of the symptom
file.
Prompt #6, “F/U Importance:”, is to indicate the significance of the appointment to be made. The
“?” mark is defaulted. By hitting <enter>, the “?” is entered and triggers the standard help screen to
pop-up for this prompt. ( You can do the same by hitting <F2> which is the equivalent of the “?” or
help key in this system.). The help key will display the following:
277
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
R
M
N
-Regular F/U:
-Mandatory F/U:
-No F/U Req'd:
COPYRIGHT 2004
Routine visit, Minor illness, S/R, etc.
Abnormal test, serious prob, neoplasm, etc.
Screening PE, School PE, etc.; No med. Prob.
Figure 366
Appt. Type.
The purpose of indicating the “F/U Importance”, is so that you can lookup all appointments due of
this specific type that have not been made. A report of this nature can be made from selection #8,
“Patient Appointments Due”, off the reports screen. These appointments that have been queued
but not made yet can also be found in the “Incomplete and Pending Orders” screen off the main
office menu.
Prompt #7, “Disability Note?”, enter <y> if the patient needs a “Disability Note” from the provider.
The defaulted value is “n”. Hit the <enter> key to accept this if you wish. If this prompt is set to “N”,
then prompts #8 and #9 will be skipped.
Prompt #8, “From:”, if prompt #7 is set to “Y”, then you will be placed in this prompt. Enter the
appropriate date.
Prompt #9, “To:”, if prompt #7 is set to “Y”, then you will be placed in this prompt. Enter the
appropriate date.
Prompt #10, “Special Instructions:”, enter any special instructions or comments.
Work Comp <F6> screen. Hit the <F6> key to indicate this as a workmen's compensation case.
Upon doing so, you will be presented with the following question in a pop-up box:
Do you wish to place this visit under Work. Comp.?
<return>=Yes/n=No
Entering <n> will bring you back to the original screen. Hitting <enter> or entering <y> will cause
the “Workmen's Compensation” disability screen shown in Figure ** to pop-up.
Workmen's Compensation disability screen, Figure 367.
278
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 367
COPYRIGHT 2004
Disability screen.
Prompt #1, “Onset of Illness:”, enter the date of onset of the patient's condition, or accident date.
Prompt #2, “Return to work on:”, enter the date on which the patient is allowed to return to work.
Prompt #3, “Full or Part time? (f/p):”, enter as follows:
F
P
Full Time:
Part Time:
Patient can return to work full-time
Patient is able to work only part-time
Prompt #4, “Number of hours/day:”, this prompt is skipped if prompt #3 is set to “F”. If prompt #3
is set to “P”, then you should enter in this field the maximum number of hours/day the patient is
allowed to work.
Prompt #5, “Full or Limited Capability? (f/l):”, enter as follows:
F
L
Full:
Limited:
the patient is allowed to work at full capability
the patient has limits on his/her work capability
“Limitations” multi-value line. This prompt is skipped if prompt #5 is set to “F”. If prompt #5 is set
to “L” and you enter <a> at the”Limitations” change prompt, then you will be presented with a popup selection window to help you select the appropriate terms for each line added. The typical
selection window for this prompt is seen in Figure 368 below.
You can page up and down ( scroll) to see additional choices.
This pop-up selection list is maintained in the TERMS file record “LIM-WORKCOMP”. All the
selections can be changed by the clinic administrator with the help of IMS.
A resulting, typical Workmen's Compensation” disability screen will appear as seen in Figure 369
below.
The final Follow-Up Appointment and Disability screen appears as in Figure 370 below.
Had this visit originally been indicated as a workman's compensation visit, then the system would
prompt the provider to fill out the screen for disability and follow-up appointments, had the
279
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 368
Figure 369
Figure 370
COPYRIGHT 2004
Limitations Selection.
Completed limitation screen.
Completed F/U Appointment Order.
280
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
provider not done so by the time of exiting.
Menu selection #13, “Schedule Multiple Follow-Up Appointments”.
Selecting this menu item allows the provider to schedule multiple follow-up appointments. In
prompt #1 of this new screen, hit <enter> to accept the defaulted “Encounter Number”. The
Schedule Multiple Follow-Up Appointments screen screen can be seen in Figure 371 below.
Figure 371
Order Multiple F/U Appointments.
On entry, you will be placed in multi-value line #1. Here, hit <enter> to accept the default in the
“Appt.” number field. This functions in an identical manner to the single appointment screen
described in menu selection #12, “Schedule Single Follow-Up Appt. & Disability” above, with the
exception that the “F6” key for a workman's compensation disability note does not function. (You
must use menu selection #12 as discussed above for the disability note.) Upon returning to the
primary screen, you can accept the default on the second line to make additional appointments as
needed. In this example, in the final screen prior to exit, Figure 372 below, you will see that we
have made two appointments. To review these appointments in detail, select that appointment
number at the “Appt. #” change prompt.
Menu selection #14, “Other Diagnosis Related Plans”
Select this menu item to indicate plans related to a specific diagnosis indicated on the “F7”
assessment screen from the providers orientation screen. In prompt #1 of this new screen, hit
<enter> to accept the defaulted “Encounter Number”. The “Other Diagnosis Related Plans” screen
can be seen in Figure 373 below.
If you want to modify or see one of the existing plans, just enter the line number to select it. You will
be placed in that plan screen to review or modify the plan. At the “Plan for DX” change prompt, you
could enter <a> to add an additional plan. Upon doing so you will be placed on the next multi-value
281
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 372
Figure 373
COPYRIGHT 2004
Mutiple Appointment Orders.
Diagnosis Related Plans.
line with “Press <ent>...” defaulted for you. Hit <enter> to get a pop-up that shows the diagnoses
entered on the assessment screen prior to this point as seen in Figure 374 for this example.
282
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 374
COPYRIGHT 2004
Select Plan Diagnosis.
If you select one of the diagnoses already showing on the plan screen, you will be told that the
record is already on file. If you select a diagnosis that has not yet been listed in the diagnostic
related plans menu screen, then, upon selecting this diagnosis, you will be brought into a new
screen which will give you the “Plan Narrative” multi-value prompt as seen in Figure 375.
Figure 375
Diagnosis Related Plan.
In this example, we added a plan for “ESOPHAGEAL REFLUX”. You can enter as many lines of
text as you wish. Upon completing your text entry, hit <F1> to exit back to the prior screens. The
resulting “Diagnosis Related Plans” screen is seen in Figure 376.
Chart Review <F11>, “ChtRv” screen.
From the provider visit orientation screen, you can select to review as well as add information to any
part of the chart ( other than existing notes). Upon hitting <F11>, the “Chart Review” screen will be
seen as shown in Figure 377, and Figure 378, upon paging down.
283
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 376
COPYRIGHT 2004
Revised Diagnosis Related Plans screen.
Figure 377
Chart Review Selection.
284
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 378
COPYRIGHT 2004
Chart Review Selection, Cont.
Review Active Medical Problems selection.
Upon selecting this item, you will be placed in the “Review Active Medical Problems” screen. This is
the same screen presented in the automatic review screens at the beginning of the provider
encounter note as is seen in Figure 289 above. It is fully discussed in that section.
Add to Active Medical Problems selection.
Upon selecting this item, you will be placed in the “Active Problem List” screen. The Active Medical
Problems are added to automatically every time the provider exits the “Provider Visit” or “NonScheduled Provider Visit” encounter note. The format is different from the review screen, since
each time a problem is added it gets it's own multi-value line. The line shows the diagnosis code,
description, and indication if this came from a provider visit as indicated with a “P”, or blank if this
was added by way of a non-visit encounter. The last two columns indicate the date of onset and the
date recorded, respectively. An example of this screen is shown in Figure 379.
Figure 379
Adding to Active Problem List.
In this example, you can see that each diagnosis is entered on a separate line. If in the diagnosis
field you added heartburn again, it would be a separate line with its own date of onset and date
recorded. This is a different than the review screen, in that in the review screen we want to see a
285
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
cleaned up list of active medical problems. We do not want to see the detail of each time it was
recorded, nor those that were deleted because they were in error. In the example shown in Figure
379, a diagnosis of hypertension ( ICD code number 401.1) had been added. Upon the provider's
realization that this was an error, the provider can delete this by entering the word "delete" in the
“Dx Code” field. You will then be stopped in the “Del #” field to enter the line number that you want
to delete. You'll note in the example shown that once deleted there's a capital “D” placed in front of
the code number. The original code that was entered previously is not destroyed, as well as the
detail of which line deleted this specific diagnosis code. Upon bringing up the security screen from
prompt #3, you can see who entered each diagnosis and who deleted each diagnosis by checking
the corresponding line number on the security screen, has seen in Figure 380.
Figure 380
Add Problem Security screen.
On the “Security” screen you can see who and when each entry was made on the primary screen.
Review Medication List selection.
Upon selecting this item, you will be placed in the “CHRONIC MEDICATIONS & ACUTE MED'S of
PAST YR.” screen. This is the same as the screen presented in the automatic review screens, at
the beginning of the provider encounter note, Figure 290 above.
Add to Medication List selection.
This screen appears similar to the review screen with the exception that now the “per”, “Disp”, and
“Nurs Rfls” columns are missing. Also, “Del No.”, “TYP”, and “Dltd by Line” columns have been
286
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 381
added. See Figure 381.
COPYRIGHT 2004
Medication Add screen.
Deleting a medication from the list is done in a manner similar that in the “Active Medical Problem
List” section above, in that you add a “DELETE” in the first field ( “Substance”). Then, you enter the
line number you wish to delete. In Figure 381 you can see an example of a deleted drug. In the
example on line #1, you will see a “D*”, in front of the original substance name. You will also note in
the “Dltd by Line” column the line number of the line that deleted this substance. In this case, this
was line #7. You can review the security screen as in the example of the “Active Medical Problem
List” above. On the security screen, you'll be able to see who deleted the substance and when.
In line #2 of this example you can see the drug FUROSEMIDE (Lasix) indicated as having one refill
in the “No. of Rfl” column. The “TYP” column is indicated as chronic. The type column can have
three descriptors, “Ac” for acute, “Ch” for chronic, and “Sa” for sample.
To see details on this prescription and refills at the “Substance” change prompt, enter the line
number to select. An example of the resulting screen can be seen in Figure 382.
287
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 382
COPYRIGHT 2004
Medication List Review.
In this screen, you can see the detail of who and when the prescription was filled and refilled. If the
medication was written by a doctor, then the “OK'd by” column does not get populated. If refilled by
a nurse, the the “OK'd by” field will be filled in when the doctor indicates approval.
Adding an “historical” substance brings up the screen shown in Figure 382 above in the “Add” mode
rather than the “Inquire” mode shown in that Figure. ( The Figure will not be shown again to save
space.) As you go through the add screen for each of the prompts shown above, pop-up selection
windows appear which are the same used in the prescription writer. However, at the top of this
screen it states “This is for historical data only. _NO DATA BASE CHECKING WILL BE
PERFORMED”. Since these may be substances provided by outside doctors, they would not have
had the benefits of the SmartDoctor® prescription writer and this patients database files for
contraindication problems. All we are doing here is adding this historical data to the prescription
writer system. However, on using the standard prescription writer from the provider screens, these
substances will be checked for contraindications with newly prescribed or refilled substances.
Review Past Medical History selection.
Upon selecting this item, you will be placed in the “Review PMHx” screen. This is the same as the
screen presented in the automatic review screens at the beginning of the provider encounter note
as is seen in Figure 291 above. It is fully discussed in that section.
Add to Past Medical History selection.
Adding or deleting information in the patients “Past Medical History” screen is fully described in the
Patient Processing section of this manual under the title “Past Medical History”.
Review Current Visit selection.
Upon selecting this item, you will be placed in the “Visit Review” screen. This is the same as the
screen presented in the automatic review screens at the beginning of the provider encounter note
288
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
as is seen in Figure 296 above. It is fully discussed in that section. However, as the visit
progresses the information displayed will change. If at anytime during the documentation of the
current visit you want to review the current note, this is the way to do it. It avoids having to go back
to each subsection of the note with the “SOAP” keys. Everything documented up untill selecting
this option will be shown.
Review Past Visits/Contacts selection.
Selecting this option will allow you to look at all prior “Provider Visit” notes, “Non-Visit Encounter”
notes, and “Non-Scheduled Provider Visit” notes. It is an extremely fast way to find and review prior
notes. In the screen presented in Figure 383 below you'll see listed all the patient's prior visit
Figure 383
contacts.
Select Past Encounter to Review.
At the “Encounters” change prompt, enter the line number of the visit you would like to review. Line
#1 is the current visit. You can tell this by the date, time, and the fact that there is no procedure
charge indicated. Upon selecting one of these lines, you'll be taken through the visit review just like
the beginning of this provider note, as described above.
Review Labwork History selection.
Upon selecting this menu item, you will be taken into the “Patient Lab History” screen. An example
of the screen is shown in Figure 384 below. At the “Indicate Reviewed” change prompt, enter the
line number of the lab test you would like to review. In this case, the first test, a Serum Glucose,
was indicated as abnormal. Upon selecting this test, you will be taken to that lab screen to show
you the blood glucose value. In this case, the reviewed column shows an “R” to indicate that this
was reviewed previously. Tests done by the provider, as in the case of an “In-House” test such as
this, will be indicated as reviewed, since the provider performed the test. Tests that have not been
reviewed by the provider will have a “-” symbol in the reviewed column. After reviewing a test, the
provider can indicate the test has been reviewed. In the case of the second lab test presented in
289
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
this example, this is an outside lab that has not returned yet. When the actual lab comes back, this
can be indicated as “In” and reviewed either from this screen or from the doctor main menu.
Please see the section on lab tests in the patient processing section of this manual for more
information on lab test processing. Also, see the information on ordering lab tests presented earlier
in this section of the manual.
Figure 384
Patient Lab History Review screen.
Review Procedures Done selection.
Upon selecting this menu item, you'll be placed in the “Review Procedures by Clinic” screen. The
screen seen in Figure 385 below shows the procedures that have been documented by this clinic.
290
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 385
COPYRIGHT 2004
Review Clinic Procedures.
All procedures indicated by the provider on the exit screen will be documented in this file. On this
inquire screen, you can see the initial procedure code, the description of the procedure, the day of
service first of the procedure, the number of procedures performed, and the date of service the last
time this procedure was performed.
Add to Clinic Procedures Done selection.
Select this menu item if you want to document procedures done in the past or that have not been
captured through the standard procedure charge mechanism, for example, if you have done a
complete physical on a female patient which included a pelvic exam. However, you just charged for
a complete medical exam, then you may want to indicate that this procedure had been done. This
would be useful when making reports of procedures that are overdue. If you are looking for the
specific procedure “Pap Smear” in female patients that do not have this procedure indicated in your
selection criteria, you would get the patient flagged in the overdue procedure report inappropriately.
Of course, if you are sending out the “Pap Smear” routinely with the lab portion, then this would not
be needed. However, tests done by other clinics could also be noted here for you to keep track of
health care maintenance procedures done. The “add procedure” screen is shown in Figure 386
below.
In in the multi-value change prompt "CPT code", enter <a> to add. You'll be placed in the multivalue line in the “CPT code“ field. Here, enter the partial description of the procedure that was
done, or the actual CPT code if known. In the “P” column, a “P” indicates this was documented
from the provider's exit billing screen. If “O”, this was documented in this add screen, and could
have been done in this clinic or another clinic. The security screen works in the same manner as
the “Add to Active Medical Problems”, described earlier in this manual.
See Selected Vital-Sign Trends selection.
Upon selecting this menu item, you will be placed in the “Review Vital Signs--Inquire” screen. Here,
you will be able to scroll up and down through the list of vital signs taken. An example of the screen
is shown in Figure 387.
291
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 386
Figure 387
COPYRIGHT 2004
Add Clinic Procedure Not Documented.
Review of Vital Signs.
All abnormals are flagged as indicated in the basics section of the manual. These are the initial vital
signs taken by the nurse at the onset of the visit. Intra-office visit vital signs are only documented
within the note itself and may be found by reviewing the specific note.
292
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Review Patient Images (EKG, etc) and Add to Patient Images (EKG, etc) selections.
Upon selecting one of these menu items, you would proceed as described in the “Manage Patient
Care” section of this manual, discussing adding and reviewing images. Images can be added by
the provider or may be delayed and entered by the nursing staff at a later time. These images can
be added though the Non-Visit encounter screen by a provider or by the clinic staff through the front
office screen, as discussed in the “Manage Patient Care” section.
In displaying images, it is important to note that you may have multiple images up at the same time
so that you can make comparisons. Any type of image can be stored and viewed, including photos,
EKGs, Faxes, X-ray, and Sonograms ( all standard formats including DICOM). Have your clinic
administrator set these capabilities up for you with assistance from IMS.
Review INHOUSE X-RAY Reports and Read INHOUSE X-RAYs Prelim/Final selections.
Upon selecting one of these menu items, you would proceed as described in the “Manage Patient
Care” section of this manual, discussing X-RAY images. The initial image would be added by the XRay technician as a result of an X-ray order queued by you or another provider. Once the X-Ray
has been taken, it can then be read by the doctor from the “Preliminary & Final InHouse X-RAY
Reading” menu item. The doctor can do the preliminary or final readings depending on how your
clinic functions. Images can be added by the provider or may be delayed and entered by the
nursing staff at a later time. These images can be added though the Non-Visit encounter screen by
a provider or by the clinic staff through the front office screen, as discussed in the “Manage Patient
Care” section.
The Non-Visit encounter Chart Review pop-up has three additional selections. They are “Order
Patient Labwork”, “In House Labwork”, and “Order INHOUSE X-RAY”. It does not have “Review
Current Visit”. The three additional choices allow the provider to order or do tests that are done in
the “Visit” encounter screens from the “Plan” menu. The missing “Review Current Visit”, does not
apply to a “Non-Visit” encounter.
Sign Out: <F12> “SgnOut” Screen.
When ready to sign out, hit the <F12> key. You will be presented with the following prompt:
Do you want to proceed with Sign-Out (y/n)?
Upon answering <y>, you will be taken through the an automatic review of the note to this point.
This will help prevent omissions and prepare you for the charges section of the sign-out screen.
You can page up & down, as well as arrow up & down to review the note. Once satisfied, either hit
<F1> or <enter> to move on to the sign-out screen.
On the way to the sign-out screen, the system will do an automatic check of the patient's
immunization status. Any needed immunizations will be presented to you. You can then decide if
you want to go back to your encounter note and take an action, or just proceed on to the sign-out
screen. An example of an “Immunization Due” note is shown in Figure 388.
Hit <enter> to pass these reminders, one at time. Once these are reviewed and cleared, you will be
in the sign-out screen, as seen in Figure 389. On entry to the sign-out screen, you will be placed in
the first line of the multi-value for “CPT codes”. Any procedures that have been done via the
“PROVIDER PLAN MENU” “Do Procedures” menu item will be placed here on the first pass to this
screen. However, it is important to note that this is only done on the first pass to the screen. If you
exit the sign-out screen without signing out and return to the provider's orientation screen, then on
293
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
subsequent returned to the sign-out screen, no additional population of the “CPT codes” multi-value
will be done automatically. This is done intentionally to prevent duplications and errors.
Figure 388
Figure 389
Immunization Due, Exit Pop-up window.
Provider Visit Sign-Out screen.
Being able to add procedure charges here allows the provider more control in being sure that
services provided are captured for billing. For example, if the provider knows that he/she gave the
patient a sling, cervical collar, or did a test that is not automatically billed by the system, this could
be documented here and the charge captured.
On entering a value in the CPT codes multi-value prompt, you can just add a partial description of
the procedure for the standard cross-reference lookup. You could also enter the actual procedure
code in this field. The description of the procedure will be listed in the next field. When adding or
changing a procedure, you will next be taken to the modifier field. You will notice that when you are
in this field, there is a “See and Select Modifiers”, <F9> key, present on the bottom bar. Upon
hitting <F9>, a pop-up screen as is shown in Figure 390 is presented.
294
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 390
COPYRIGHT 2004
Modifier Selection window.
You can page or arrow up & down through this list of 69 modifiers to select up to 4 modifiers. In this
case, we would just hit <enter> on line five to indicate a “Significant separate E/M code with the
same doctor, on the same day”. Then, hit <F1> to select this or up to 4 choices from this menu.
Next we will be stopped in the "X" field to indicate the number of times this was performed. In this
case you accept the default of 1. Upon getting to the last field on this line "DX code", you will see a
pop-up of the “Assessment” screen. Select one assessment to associative to this procedure.
Prompt #4, "Would you like assistance in selecting an E/M code? (y/n)", enter <y> if you would
like assistance in selecting an E/M code. Upon answering yes, you will see the E/M coding
assistance screen open, as seen in Figure 391.
Figure 391
Evaluation and Management Coding Assistance screen.
On this screen you can see all the elements that the SmartDoctor® program uses to come up with a
recommended E/M code. The first element evaluated is whether this is an established patient not.
In this case, it is an established patient. You can see we have done an extensive history in this
example. It includes many “HPI“( history of present illness) elements, a review of systems, and
family and social history items. The HPI elements come from counting the lines in the subjective
295
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
screen. The review of systems comes from counting the basic review on startup of the note, and
the added review of system elements. The Past Family and Social History (PFSH) comes from
looking at the social history screen and basic review on startup. Using Medicare's 1998 guidelines
for coding, this is a history level of 3, or a history code of “Detailed”. In the exam area, 44 of
Medicare's bullet items were examined, in a total of 6 body areas as defined by Medicare. This
resulted in a level 3 exam, or a code of “Detailed”. The “DxS” stands for the number of diagnoses
points given. In this case, a new problem with three problems total is a value of four.
You will automatically be placed at prompt #3, “DataS:”, for the number of data sources reviewed.
At this prompt, a “?” has been defaulted. By hitting <enter> here, you will open up a help screen as
shown in Figure 392.
Figure 392
Data Reviewed Score, Help window.
In this example, line #2 was picked since we reviewed 1 additional set of data.
You will next be placed at prompt #4, “Risk:”, for risk level. A “?” is defaulted here also, to facilitate
going to the help screen. By hitting <enter>, you will be taken to the help screen for information
from Medicare on deciding the risk value. This is presented in Figure 393.
Figure 393
Risk Level Score, Help window.
You'll note that writing a required prescription is a risk level of three. Writing a prescription of
Tylenol for a child on “Medicaid” would not be a “Required” prescription. This is merely
administrative. A “Required” prescription would be any substance that can only be dispensed by a
pharmacist with a prescription. These are called “Legend” and “Controlled” drugs. They involve
more risk than over-the-counter medications.
After using the system for a while, you will be able to enter the appropriate values in prompts #3 &
#4 without looking at the help screens. Simply enter the value you want, and hit <enter> at each
prompt.
After completing prompts #3 & #4, the system will come up with a recommended E/M code for you,
as shown in Figure 394.
296
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 394
COPYRIGHT 2004
Completed E/M Coding Assist screen.
Upon hitting <enter>, this “Visit Code” value will be returned to the prior screen in prompt
#5. The description of this code will be placed next to it. The sign-out screen will now appear as
seen in Figure 395.
Figure 395
Completed Provider Visit Sign-Out screen.
Finally, you will be placed at prompt #6 for your signature password, to indicate your
acknowledgment of the “Liability” notice, and sign-off on your chart notes and charges. Here, you
type in your secondary signature password. Once successfully entered, it will be replaced by your
name, degree, time, and date.
At this point, hitting <enter> or <F1> will return you to the starting “Provider Visit” screen. Here,
hitting <enter> would bring you into the provider schedule for another patient selection. Generally,
you would hit <F1> to “end” out and exit back to the doctors main menu.
297
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
MENU ITEM #2, “NON-VISIT ENCOUNTER”, is the same as discussed in the section on
“Manage Patient Care”. There are several differences based on user class. A doctor class user
can refill prescriptions, write new prescriptions, and access the chart review. The nursing class user
can refill prescriptions and access the chart review. Both the nursing class user and the doctor
class user are required to use their secondary password to sign-off on a chart before exiting. They
are also prompted on exiting whether they want to print the note. Printing of the note will depend on
how your clinic is operating.
MENU ITEM #3, “NON-SCHEDULED PROVIDER VISIT”, is identical to the “Provider
Visit” of menu item #1, with two significant exceptions. First, no appointment is required. This can
be a visit that was done in the office as a walk-in with no appointment scheduled, or could be a
nursing home visit, hospital visit, emergency room visit, etc. This requires, however, that the user
indicate the location on the intake screen, as well as take the initial vital signs, and answer the
question about the patient's perception of the “urgency of the visit”. The initial screen appears as
shown in Figure 396.
Figure 396
Initial Non-Scheduled Provider Visit screen.
In prompt #1, "PatName/Vis Number:", enter part of the patient's name for the standard crossreference lookup. Once selected, you will immediately be brought to the intake screen. This screen
is shown in Figure 397.
In this screen, you will fill in the needed information in the same manner as described for the
nursing intake screen. You will note that in prompts #4, #5, #6, #7, and #8 had been filled in for you
before in the “Provider Visit”. However, in the case of the “Non-Scheduled Provider Visit”, you
will need to fill these all in yourself. For prompt #4, “Place of Service:”, you will be given a pop-up
to select the place of service. Examples of these are office, home, inpatient hospital, outpatient
hospital, emergency room, skilled nursing facility, etc. In prompt #5, “Name of Facility:”, you will be
298
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 397
COPYRIGHT 2004
Non-Scheduled Provider Visit Intake screen.
given a pop-up to select the facility used, that your clinic has predefined. In prompt #6, “Date of
Service”, today's date will be defaulted for you. You can over type for a prior date if necessary. In
prompt #7, “Reason for Visit:”, the reason for visit given in the abbreviated form, as on
appointment scheduling ( comes from the symptom file). Examples of reasons to visit can be
cough, headache, follow-up of a problem, medical exam, etc.. Prompt #8, "Does the Patient feel
this visit is URGENT", is the patient's interpretation as to whether they feel is urgent, not yours.
Fill in the referral prompts if this patient was referred to you for this encounter. You will next be able
to do the standard nursing vital signs, and then proceed on to the standard provider note screens as
described previously in this section of the manual. You can return to this screen anytime during the
visit. You do this by hitting the <F2>, “ChgData” key from the provider's orientation screen.
Exiting the “Non-Scheduled Provider Visit” note is identical to exiting the standard provider a note,
discussed above, with the exception that the “Category of Service” is to be chosen from a pop-up
screen. The exit screen with pop-up presented for selecting the category of service type, is shown
in Figure 398.
Based on the “Category of Service”, the system will use the standard E/M algorithm's to pick the
appropriate E/M code.
The remainder of the doctor main menu items have been discussed previously in other sections of
this manual.
299
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 398
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection of Category of Service.
300
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
CHAPTER 8 MONTHLY REPORTS
From the front office menu, select menu item # 12 to go to the Monthly Reports screen. This
screen has three basic sections: Patient Statements, Patient Reports, and Financial Reports, as
shown below in Figure 399:
PATIENT STATEMENTS
This section has 5 reports. The primary report used for monthly billing to the HOH is menu selection
#2, “Bill w/DX & CPT w/Pt. Resp.>0”. All the other reports in this section are used to look at billing
information from the family ledger and charge item files in different, but useful ways.
Menu selection #1, “Summary Statements(w/o Zero bal)”, this Patient Statement contains only
those Charge Items which have a non-zero balance. The selection screen for this report is as follows:
301
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection prompt #1, “Report Cutoff Date:”, enter the cutoff date for this detailed report. All open
items before and on this date will be printed. Any invoices or checks after this date will not appear on
the report.
Selection prompt #2, “Beginning Family Name:”, enter the first family name in the range of patient
names that you wish to appear on this list. For example, start with an actual family name like “Bonner”
or more simply “B”. To get all the b's and c's, enter “B” for the starting and “D” for the ending. Now
you will get families that include Bonner and Cooper, the two families in our example files. This is
shown below in Figures 401 and 402.
Selection prompt #3, “Ending Family Name:”, see Selection prompt #2 above. Enter the last patient
name in the range of patient names that you wish to appear on this list.
Selection prompt #4, “Family Provider:”, enter the Provider's user name to select family records by.
Else, accept the default "ALL" to select all Providers' family records.
The standard report Selection prompt for report output will be presented. Below are screen shots of
the report for two sample families:
Figure 401
Non-Zero Balance Report, Page 1.
Menu selection #2, “Bill w/DX & CPT w/Pt. Resp.>0”, choose this selection to print Family bills with
Dx & CPT information. Only bills with patient responsibility and a balance not equal to 0 will be
printed. Balances not equal to 0 with responsibility set to insurance will not be shown in this report.
This report is the basic report used for monthly billings. This selection method avoids sending bills to
HOH when the only balance pending is from the insurance company. This saves employee time and
mailing costs.
The selection screen for this menu item is shown below in Figure 403.
302
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 402
Figure 403
COPYRIGHT 2004
Non-Zero Balance Report, Page 2.
Report Selection screen.
Selection prompt #1, “Report Cutoff Date:”, enter the cutoff date for this detailed report. All open
items before and on this date will be printed. Any invoices or checks after this date will not appear on
the report.
303
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection prompt #2, “Clinic Number:”, this number is defaulted to “0” if there is only one group
represented at this site. If more than one group is present then you enter the number of the group
( which correlates to the clinic number) for this billing. The TERMS file contains the record of the
groups allowed at this site in the record “ADM-SITE-CLINICS”. The first field in the Term Descriptions
gives the number of groups that can be billed at this site. The second and subsequent multi-value
fields ( which should agree in total number to the value of the first field, on the first line) indicate the
clinic number and group name. Only those clinic numbers listed here can be sent as group or clinic
specific bills. Only charges for the clinic number entered will be billed.
Selection prompt #3, “Family Provider:”, enter the Provider you wish to select family records by.
Else, accept the default "ALL" to select all Providers' families. For MultiGroup Clinics, "ALL" selects
only providers in the selected ( Selection prompt 2) clinic. Any providers selected in this prompt must
also belong to the selected clinic from prompt 2.
Selection prompt #4, “Beginning Family Name:”, enter the first family name in the range of patient
names that you wish to appear on this list. For example, start with an actual family name like “Bonner”
or more simply “B”. To get all the b's and c's, enter “B” for the starting and “D” for the ending. Now
you will get families that include Bonner and Cooper, the two families in our example files. A sample of
one such bill generated for this report option is shown in Figures 404 and 405, with a screen output
option rather than printed.
Selection prompt #5, “Ending Family Name:”, see Selection prompt #4 above. Enter the last patient
name in the range of patient names that you wish to appear on this list.
An of the selection screen output for our sample file is as follows:
This number is taken from the
Clinic file's “Billing” phone #.
Figure 404
Monthly Statement, screen 1.
304
This heading is taken from the
header information as indicated in
the Clinic file under the “F6-Bill#”
screen. Up to ten lines can be
added. Greetings, general
messages, and this even can be
used to get credit card numbers
and authorizations (signatures).
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
These dunning messages will be
placed in the bill automatically
for bills with patient responsibility
of over 30, 60, and 90 days
respectively. These three
message can be found in the
TERMS file with the cross
reference of “dunn”.
Time dated messages from the Family
Ledger will be placed here if the bill date falls
between the message start and end dates.
(See the patient example below.)
Figure 405
Monthly Statement, screen 2.
The next page is a Sample of a “Monthly Billing Explanation Sheet for Patients” ( you are welcome
to use or modify this example for your patients).
305
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
The following is an example of our standard monthly bill for amounts that are your personal
responsibility. All the charges are shown for days where you have one or more charges that have
been determined to be your responsibility. The insurance carrier, if any, has made any payments or
denied payments. Any charges on the same day that you have charges that are your responsibility
are shown so that you can see all the charges of a specific day. Those charges that are your
responsibility are indicated as:
“**************BALANCE DUE from PATIENT = “ followed by the amount.
Charges that are still the responsibility of the insurance carrier are indicated as:
“............BALANCE DUE from INSURANCE = ” followed by the amount.
You may have other charges that have been paid on other days or that are still pending response
from the insurance carrier from other days. If you need a statement showing all charges on your
account for all time periods, please ask the billing clerk. A sample Monthly Billing statement is
shown is attached.
306
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Sample Monthly Statement.
Date Bill
Sent
Clinic Name
and Address
Responsible Party
and Address
Area for any
General Clinic
Messages or
Announcements
From 0 to 10 lines.
Charge Item #
for each
Service Rendered.
Phone # for Billing Questions
Patient and Provider Names
Charge Code and Description.
Diagnosis Code & Description.
Date of Service & Place
There will be one
or more lines
following the first
four lines of each
charge item. Each
line will indicate the
Date, Action taken,
and Charges or
Payments.
The last line of the
Charge item will show
the balance due on
this item and from
who, either the Patient
or Insurance Company
This area will contain either no
message, or one of three messages,
depending on if the payment from you
is more than 30, 60, or 90 days
Overdue.
This area is for
messages from our
billing department
specific to your bills.
This area generally
is blank.
Payments pending from
Insurance Company.
Payments pending from
you. You need to make
payments or talk to our
billing department about
these amounts due. It is
especially important that
you deal with any amounts
over 30 days old.
Figure 406
Example of Monthly Family Statement.
307
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Menu selection #3, “All Transactions”, This selection provides a listing of all transactions on this
family account. The selection screen is the same as Menu selection #1 above. A sample of the
screen output for the default selections is as follows ( Figures 407 & 408):
Figure 407
Listing of All transactions, screen 1.
The second screen for this Family is:
Figure 408
End of example.
Listing of All Transaction, screen 2.
308
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Menu selection #4, “All Transaction with Pt. Resp.”, This selection shows all transactions on this
family account when there is at least one item that the patient is responsible to pay for. The selection
screen is the same as Menu selection #1 above. A sample of the screen output for the default
selections is as follows ( Figures 409 & 410):
Figure 409
All Transaction w/Pt. Resp., screen 1.
The second screen for this report is:
Figure 410
End of example.
All Transaction w/Pt. Resp., screen 2.
309
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Menu selection #5, “Bill by Patient & Prim. Ins.”, Choose this item to print a bill for a patient that
was billed to a specific insurance company. This insurance company must be the primary (or first)
insurance company that was billed. The first screen allows you to “Select Patient and Insurance
Company for Bill Print.” This report is generally used to bill Workmen's Compensation, when a
summary report of all charges is requested. As seen below in Figure 411:
Figure 411
Patient Bills by Insurance Carrier.
Selection prompt #1, “Patient Number:”, enter a patient number or at least three letters of the last
name and, optionally, two letters of other names separated by a space. To Exit without lookup, hit
<F1>.
Selection prompt #2, “Ins. Doc #:”, go into this change prompt by hitting <2> or <a> for all. A pop-up
of the insurance carrier information selection screen will be seen as in the billing screens. Select in the
same manner as in the billing screens.
Selection prompt #3, “Print Bill(<Enter> or y=yes/n=no):”, answer yes to print a monthly statement
for this patient (not the entire family) pertaining to this carrier only.
A sample screen output for this report is seen below in Figure 412, 413, and 414.
310
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Second screen shot:
Third Screen shot:
Figures 412, 413, and 414 are shown above. Together they make up one report.
311
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
PATIENT REPORTS
This section has eight reports. All these reports are patient centric, and are used to help manage care
of the patients.
Menu selection #6, “Patient by Procedure done (PW)”, choose this selection to print a report of
patients that had a specific procedure done. The selection screen for this menu item is as follows, with
all defaults selected ( Figure 415):
Figure 415
Selection for Pt. Procedures Report.
Selection prompt #1, “Start date:”, enter the starting date. Procedures done on that date, up to the
“Ending date” of Selection prompt #2 will be shown.
Selection prompt #2, “Ending date:”, enter the ending date. Procedures done from the “Starting date”
up to the “Ending date” will be shown.
Selection prompt #3, “Provider:”, enter the provider initials for a specific provider, or <all> for all
providers.
Selection prompt #4, “CPT Code:”, enter specific CPT Code. i.e. 10040, or <all> for all procedures.
A sample screen output for this report is seen below in Figure 416:
312
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 416
COPYRIGHT 2004
Patient Procedure Report.
Menu selection #7, “Patient by Dx”, Choose this selection to look up patient by a specific
diagnosis or range of diagnoses. The selection screen for this menu item is as follows, with all
defaults selected:
Figure 417
Patient Diagnosis Report Selection.
Selection prompt #1, “Starting Diagnosis Number:”, enter the starting diagnosis number you want in
the search. Diagnoses from that code number through that entered in “Ending Diagnosis Number:”,
Selection prompt #2, will be shown.
313
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection prompt #2, “Ending Diagnosis Number:”, enter the ending diagnosis number you want in
the search. Diagnoses in the range of Selection prompt #1 through Selection prompt #2 will be
searched for and shown. In the example selection screen above, all diagnoses for hypertension are
being searched.
Selection prompt #3, “Starting DOB:”, enter the starting DOB so as to give you a starting age range,
or accept the default of “FIRST”, for the oldest patient.
Selection prompt #4, “Ending DOB:”, enter ending DOB, or accept the default of “LAST” for the
youngest patient.
Selection prompt #5, “Sex:”, enter <m> for male, <f> for female, or accept the default of “ALL”.
A sample screen output for this report is seen below in Figure 418:
Figure 418
Report of Patients by Diagnosis.
In the above screen, the selection criteria is displayed in the first three lines after the heading. Next, all
patients will be shown who meet these criteria. In this example only one match was found. The right
hand three columns indicate where the diagnoses were found, i.e. in the “Active” problem list, in the
“PMHx” ( past medical history), or in the past “Hosp” records.
Menu selection #8, “Patient Appointments Due”, choose this selection to print a list of patients due
for a follow-up appointment by dates and categories. The selection screen for this menu item is as
shown in Figure 419 below.
Selection prompt #1, “Reason for F/U:”, accept the default of “ALL”, or enter a specific reason. Since
it is very possible to miss the specific reason indicated for the appointment ( can be thousands,
including misspellings), it is best to accept the default of “ALL”.
314
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 419
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection for Appointments due.
Selection prompt #2, “F/U Importance:”, hitting <enter> at the defaulted “?”, will give you a list of
acceptable choices as follows: R -Regular F/U: Routine visit, Minor illness, S/R, etc.; M -Mandatory
F/U: abnormal test, serious prob, neoplasm, etc.; N -No F/U Req'd: Screening PE, school PE, etc.;
No Med. Prob.; or ALL -All Reasons.
Selection prompt #3, “Starting Appt. day:”, the system will default a date one month in advance. You
can over type this with another date if you wish.
Selection prompt #4, “Ending Appt. day:”, the system will default a date two months in advance. You
can over type this with another date if you wish.
A sample screen output for this report is seen in Figure 420 below.
Menu selection #9, “Drugs Prescribed by Patient”, choose this selection to find patients using a
specific drug. The selection screen for this menu item is as shown in Figure 421.
Selection prompt #1, “Enter starting drug name:”, enter the starting part of the generic name or all of
the generic name. For example: amo, or amoxicillin, or amoxicillin cla. You must enter at least three
letters. In this example, we entered “cisapride” the generic name of “Propulsid” that was pulled off the
market several years ago.
Selection prompt #2, “Enter ending drug name:”, accept the default of the first selection with "Z"
appended, or enter an ending drug.
Selection prompt #3, “Enter starting DOB:”, enter starting date of birth to select patients, or accept
"FIRST" to start with oldest the patient.
315
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 420
Report of Patients with Appointments due.
Figure 421
Selection of Patients by Drug Prescribed.
Selection prompt #4, “Enter ending DOB:”, enter ending DOB or accept "LAST" to get from starting to
youngest patient.
Selection prompt #5, “Enter sex (m/f):”, enter "m" for all male patients, "f" for all female patients
316
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
or accept "ALL" for both sexes.
A sample screen output for this report is seen in Figure 422 below.
Figure 422
Report of Patients by Selected Drug.
Below the report header is listed the drug names searched, as well as DOB and sex selections.
Following this is the list of patients ( only one in this example) who were prescribed this drug, and the
date prescribed. It is important to remember that patients often do not finish all their medications as
indicated, and may still have old medications in their medicine cabinet. If a drug has been recalled,
you should send a letter to all patients telling them to stop this drug if they are taking it, and to call your
office for an alternative if needed. Also, tell them to discard any of this medication, if it was left over.
Menu selection #10, “Procedures Due”, choose this selection to print a list of patients that are due
for a procedure. The selection screen for this menu item is as seen in Figure 423 below.
Selection prompt #1, “Procedure since:”, enter the date that you want to start looking from, i.e., the
date after which the procedure should have been done. Or, take the default of one year ago.
Selection prompt #2, “Starting Pt. age in Years:”, the default is “0”, here we choose 65.
Selection prompt #3, “Ending Pt. age in Years:”, the default is “150”, or enter any ending age. Here,
we accepted the default of 150.
Selection prompt #4, “Patient Sex (m.f,b):”, the default is “B”. You can also specify <m> or <f>. Here,
we choose to enter “F”.
Selection prompt #5, “Starting CPT #:”, enter starting CPT number that has not been performed. This
can be a single CPT number or the start of a range of numbers.
317
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 423
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection for Past Due Procedures.
Selection prompt #6, “Ending CPT #:”, enter ending CPT number that has not been performed. This
can be the same as the starting number to select a single item. The ending CPT number must be
equal to or greater than the starting number.
Selection prompt #7, “Any procedure since:”, enter the date that this patient last had an office visit or
other procedure that was billed by the system, or indicated in the system. This helps eliminate
selecting patients that may have moved out of the area or are no longer being seen. The default is
two years. Therefore, if no procedures have been documented in two years, the patient will not be
considered active. Of course, you can change this to be a much longer time period if you wish. As
noted on the selection screen, only patients indicated as Active will be listed.
A sample screen output for this report is seen below in Figure 424.
In this example, we were looking for an active patient who is female, over 65, has had some procedure
done since 06/07/2002, and has not had the procedure G010 (a Medicare screening Pap smear)
done in the last year. In this example only one patient was found.
Menu selection #11, “Patient Appts by Sched Prov”, choose this selection to see appointment
types for a Scheduled Provider. Included are counts of appts. kept, missed, mandatory missed, etc.
The selection screen for this menu item is as shown in Figure 425.
Selection prompt #1, “Start Date:”, enter starting appointment date, or enter <FIRST> to see from
start of clinic.
Selection prompt #2, “End Date:”, enter last appointment date to check, or enter <LAST> to get most
recent appointment scheduled.
318
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 424
Figure 425
COPYRIGHT 2004
Report of Procedures Due by Patient.
Selection of Scheduled Patient Appointments.
Selection prompt #3, “Provider Initials”, enter provider initials or ALL to see all.
Selection prompt #4, “Status of Appt.:”, enter <p> for appointment pending or not kept., <k> for
appointment kept, <c> for appointment canceled, or <all> (the default).
319
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection prompt #5, “Type of Appt.:”, enter <r> for Regular appointment, <m> for Mandatory
appointment, <c> for Canceled appointment, <n> for Not a required appointment, or <all> (the
default).
Selection prompt #6, “Pt. Number:”, enter a patient number or enter ALL.
Selection prompt #7, “Fam. Number:”, enter a family number or enter ALL.
A sample screen output for this report is seen below in Figure 426.
Figure 426
Report of Scheduled Appointments by Type.
As can be seen in this last page for the example report, the appointments are output with month and
year breaks in addition to indicating the scheduled provider. This report is mainly run to find families
that are missing a lot of appointments so that you can counsel them on office policies regarding
cancellations, rescheduling, and failed appointments.
Menu selection #12, “Patient Appts by Appt. Type”, choose this selection to find patient
appointments by type of appointment scheduled. The selection screen for this menu item is as
shown in Figure 427.
Selection prompt #1, “Start Date:”, enter last appointment date to check, or enter <LAST> to get most
recent appointment scheduled.
Selection prompt #2, “End Date:”, enter last appointment date to check, or enter <LAST> to get most
recent appointment scheduled.
Selection prompt #3, “Provider Initials:”, enter provider initials or <ALL> to see all.
Selection prompt #4, “Status of Appt.:”, enter <p> for appointment pending or not kept, <k> for
appointment kept, <c> for appointment canceled, or <all> (the default).
Selection prompt #5, “Appt. Type”, enter appointment type as used in booking system. That is, to find
all appts made for a female PE, enter PE-----F, etc.
320
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 427
Figure 428
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection of Patients by Appointment Type
Report of Patients by Appointment Type.
Selection prompt #6, “Pt. Number:”, enter a patient number or enter <ALL>.
A sample screen output for this report is seen above in Figure 428.
This report is mainly run to see which patients are missing or have appointments of a specific type,
which may help relate how important it is to get hold of the patient for this problem or type of
appointment.
Menu selection #13, “Patient by Ins, Sex, Age”, choose this menu item to find patients by Insurance,
Age, and/or Sex. The selection screen for this menu item is as seen in Figure 429.
321
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 429
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection of Patients by Insurance Carrier.
Selection prompt #1, “Carrier ID number:”, accept or Enter <ALL> to select All carriers, or you may
choose 1 carrier to select with. The carrier cross-reference will help you if you remember part of the
name of the carrier.
Upon entering the second prompt, a pop-up a selection window appears as seen in Figure 430.
Figure 430
Payer Type Selection window.
322
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection prompt #2, “Insurance Plan Code:”, an automatic pop-up window, as shown in Figure 430,
will help you select an appropriate plan code, or use “ALL”.
Selection prompt #3, “Starting DOB:”, enter a starting DOB range or accept the default of “FIRST”.
Selection prompt #4, “Ending DOB:”, enter a ending DOB range or accept the default of “LAST”.
Selection prompt #5, “Sex:”, accept the default of “all”, or enter <m> for male or <f> for female.
A sample screen output for this report is seen in Figure 431.
Figure 431
Report of Patient by Insurance Carrier.
In the above sample report, the patient's name, number, DOB, and sex are followed by three
additional fields. The “F” and “P” columns indicate the insurance documents for these selection
criteria were found in the Family or Patient insurance files, respectively. The last column will indicate
the Insured ID Number if there is only one insurance document, or the number of insurance
documents found if there is more than one.
FINANCIAL REPORTS
This section has 16 reports. All these reports are financial centric, and are used to help office
manager and the billing manager keep track of income and accounts receivable.
Menu selection #14, “Monthly Financial Report”, this is a report of all charges, adjustments,
payments and balances for each day of the report period as well as totals of the above items for the
period. The selection screen for this menu item is as shown in Figure 432 below.
Selection prompt #1, “Posting Start Date:”, enter the start date of the report you want to see.
Generally, this would be the beginning of a given month. In this example, we will show the beginning
of June, 2004, through the 11th of the month. Normally, this would be the end of a month or time
period.
Selection prompt #2, “Posting End Date:”, enter the last date of the report, or accept the default of
“TODAY”, which will replaced with today's date. A sample screen output for this report is seen in
Figure 433 below.
323
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 432
Selection for monthly Financial Report.
Figure 433
Monthly Financial Report.
Other than the first day of setting up the clinic, the right hand column, “Acc Rcvbl” (accounts
receivable), should always have a non-zero number. If all of a sudden you see that the amount
drops to 0.00, then the automatic system posting and integrity check failed. You should call IMS
immediately. You are also notified of this failure in the “Daily Admin” report from the “Billing”
screen.
324
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Menu selection #15, “Collections by Provider”, This report lists the charges, adjustments, and
payments for each provider in the clinic. For the period selected, the sum of transactions for charges,
adjustments, and payments is shown for each provider. The selection screen for this menu item is as
seen in Figure 434 below.
Figure 434
Selection of Collections by Provider.
Selection prompt #1, “Posting Start Date:”, enter the start date of the report you want to see.
Generally, this would be the beginning of a given month. In this example, we will show the beginning
of June, 2004, through the 11th of the month. Normally this would be the end of a month or time
period.
Selection prompt #2, “Posting End Date:”, enter the last day of the report, or accept the default of
“TODAY”, which be replaced with today's date.
A sample screen output for this report is seen in Figure 435.
Figure 435
Report of Collections by Provider.
325
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Please note that these are the amounts billed, adjusted, and paid during the selection period. These
values are specified by the provider identified in the billing statements. These adjustments and
payments may not be related to the charges billed, but reflect the activity of all the accounts receivable.
Menu selection #16, “New Charges by Provider”, choose this selection to print new charges for the
dates of service ( DOS) selected. The listing includes the DOS, patient name, CPT code, base fee,
standard adjustments ( std. Adj.), charge applied and payments made to-date on each item. The
selection screen for this menu item is as shown in Figure 436 below.
Figure 436
Selection for New charges by provider.
Selection prompt #1, “Starting DOS:”, enter the starting date of service of the report you want to see.
Generally this would be the beginning of a given month. In this example, we will show the beginning of
June, 2004, through the 11th of the month. Normally this would be the end of a month or time period.
Selection prompt #2, “Ending DOS:”, enter the last day of service of the report, or accept the default
of “TODAY” which will be replaced this with today's date.
Selection prompt #3, “Provider:”, enter the provider initials for a specific provider or <all> for all
providers.
A sample screen output for this report is seen in Figure 437 below.
This report ( seen in Figure 437) below, reflects the charges by the provider, grouped by provider, for
the selected time period. The right 4 columns are related to these specific charges on those dates.
Other than the “Std. Adj” (standard adjustment or contracted adjustment), charges and payments may
vary in dates of action (such as bounced check fees, or payments made by the patient and insurance
carrier on different dates).
326
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 437
COPYRIGHT 2004
New Charges by Provider.
Menu selection #17, “Chg, Adj, Pay, by Provider”, choose this selection to print a report showing
Charges, adjustments, and form of payment by provider, for a given date range. The selection
screen for this menu item is as in Figure 438 below. Only the top half of the screen is show to save
space. The bottom half is typical of the prior screens.
Figure 438
Selection Charges by Provider.
Selection prompt #1, “Posting Start Date:”, enter the start date of the report you want to see.
Generally, this would be the beginning of a given month. In this example, we will show the beginning
of June, 2004, through the 11th of the month. Normally this would be the end of a month or time
period.
Selection prompt #2, “Posting End Date:”, enter the last day of the report, or accept the default of
“TODAY” which will replaced this with today's date.
A sample screen output for this report is seen in Figure 439 below.
327
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 439
COPYRIGHT 2004
Report of Payments by Provider.
The above report shows charges grouped by provider for the selected time period. This reflects the
amounts billed, adjusted, as well as method of payments for this time period. The adjustments,
charges and payments were made during the selected time period, but may have been posted to a
period prior to this. For example, if a charge or adjustment was placed today on a previous month's
charge, that would be reflected in this time period, because this is the time period in which the action
was taken.
To save space, the remaining screen shots for the reports section will only show the top part of the
screen, which contains information that has changed from previous screens. The bottom half of the
screens will be shown if the f-key selection changes.
Menu selection #18, “Collections by Procedure”, this report lists the billings, adjustments, and
payments associated with each procedure performed in the clinic. It is not a list of all procedures
performed during the report period, but rather a list of the financial transactions performed during the
report period. The selection screen for this menu item is as shown in Figure 440 below.
Figure 440
Selection of Collection by Procedure.
Selection prompt #1, “Report Start Date:”, enter the start date of the report you want to see.
Generally, this would be the beginning of a given month. In this example, we will show the beginning
of June, 2004, through the 11th of the month. Normally, this would the end of a month or time period.
Selection prompt #2, “Report End Date:”, enter the last day of the report, or accept the default of
“TODAY” which will be replaced with today's date.
328
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection prompt #3, “CPT Start Code:”, enter the first CPT or other code you would like to see listed
in the selection of CPT codes, or accept the default of “FIRST” by hitting <enter>.
Selection prompt #4, “CPT End Code:”, enter the last CPT or other code you would like to see listed in
the selection of CPT codes, or accept the default of “LAST” by hitting <enter>.
Please see “A WORD ON SELECTION RANGES” in the “Basic” section of this manual.
A sample screen output for this report is shown in figure 441 below.
Figure 441
Report of Collections by Procedure.
Menu selection #19, “Procedure Charges”, this is a report of all procedures actually performed
during the report period, together with the Base Fee, Standard Adjustment, and Charge for that
procedure. The selection screen for this menu item is as shown in Figure 442 below.
Figure 442
Selection for Procedure Charges.
Selection prompt #1, “Report Start Date:”, enter the start date of the report you want to see.
Generally this would be the beginning of a given month. In this example, we will show the beginning of
June, 2004, through the 11th of the month. Normally, this would be the end of a month or time period.
Selection prompt #2, “Report End Date:”, enter the last day of the report, or accept the default of
“TODAY” which will be replaced with today's date.
Selection prompt #3, “Provider:”, enter the provider initials for a specific provider, or <all> for all
providers.
329
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
A sample screen output for this report is seen in Figure 443 below.
Figure 443
Report of Procedure charges.
The “MX” column stands for multiplier, for those charges that can be charged for each additional
procedure of a like type, done at the same time.
Menu selection #20, “Family Receivable Ageing”, this is an aged report, by Family, of the Family
balance. This report can be produced for all providers or an individual provider. The selection screen
for this menu item is as seen in Figure 444 below.
Figure 444
Selection for family receivable ageing.
330
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection prompt #1, “Beginning Family Name:”, enter the first Family name in the range of family
names that you wish to appear on this list, or hit <enter> to accept the default of “FIRST”.
Selection prompt #2, “Ending Family Name:”, enter the last Family name in the range of family
names that you wish to appear on this list, or hit <enter> to accept the default of “LAST”.
Selection prompt #3, “Provider:”, enter the provider initials for a specific provider, or <all> for all
providers.
A sample screen output for this report is seen in Figure 445 below.
Figure 445
Report of Family Receivable Ageing.
Menu selection #21, “Family A/R Ageing w/Bal<>0”, choose this report to print A/R ageing by
Provider, or ALL, with bal <> 0, and indicate insurance and patient responsibility. The selection screen
for this menu item is as shown in Figure 446 below.
Figure 446
Selection for Family Receivable Ageing with Non-Zero Balance.
Selection prompt #1, “Beginning Family Name:”, enter the first Family name in the range of family
names that you wish to appear on this list, or hit <enter> to accept the default of “FIRST”.
Selection prompt #2, “Ending Family Name:”, enter the last Family name in the range of family
names that you wish to appear on this list, or hit <enter> to accept the default of “LAST”.
331
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection prompt #3, “Provider:”, enter the provider initials for a specific provider, or <all> for all
providers.
A sample screen output for this report is shown in Figure 447 below.
Figure 447
Report of Family Receivable Ageing with Non-Zero Balance.
Menu selection #22, “Families with Bal/Fwd <> 0”, choose this item to print a list of families with
balance forward amounts greater than 0. There is no selection screen for this menu item. The report
is as seen in Figure 448 below.
Figure 448
Report of Families with Balance Forward Non-Zero.
Menu selection #23, “Ins. Resp. w/bal <> 0 by Co.”, choose this selection to print a report of
adjustments and payments by insurance company. The selection screen for this menu item is as
seen in Figure 449 below.
332
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 449
COPYRIGHT 2004
Select Primary Insurances with Non-Zero Balances.
Selection prompt #1, “Carrier Name – from:”, to find all companies from Blue Cross to Coast
Insurance, enter <Blu> in this line, and <Cx> in the next line. Starting with <blu> will miss all names
starting with an upper case letter. ( See “A WORD ON SELECTION RANGES” in the “Basics” section
of this manual above.)
Selection prompt #2, “Carrier Name – To:”, enter an ending insurance carrier name as mentioned
above.
Selection prompt #3, “CPT Number - From:”, enter the first CPT or other code you would like to see
listed in the selection of CPT codes, or accept the default of “FIRST” by hitting <enter>.
Selection prompt #4, “CPT Number - To:”, enter the last CPT or other code you would like to see
listed in the selection of CPT codes, or accept the default of “LAST” by hitting <enter>.
Selection prompt #5, “Starting Date:”, enter the start date of the report you want to see. Generally
this would be the beginning of a given month in the past. Since it may take a month or more to get
paid, a more meaningful report would be to indicate from the first time of billings or the beginning of the
year. To accept the default of “First”, hit <enter>.
Selection prompt #6, “Ending date:”, enter the last date of the report. This would be best to be one
month ago, as indicated above, to determine delinquency. You can also accept the default of “LAST”
which will be replaced with today's date. A sample screen output for this report is seen Figure 450
below.
Menu selection #24, “Visits by Insurance Type”, choose this report to display all visits by specific
insurance company per provider. The selection screen for this menu item is as shown in Figure 451
below.
Selection prompt #1, “Starting date:”, enter the start date of the report you want to see. Generally,
this would be the beginning of a given month.
333
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 450
Figure 451
COPYRIGHT 2004
Report of Insurance Carriers with Non-Zero Balances.
Selection for Visits by Insurance.
Selection prompt #2, “Ending date:”, enter the last day of the report, or accept the default of “TODAY”
which will be replaced with today's date.
Selection prompt #3, “Provider(s):”, enter the specific provider, or hit <enter> to take the default of
“all”.
Selection prompt #4, “Provider(LU):”, this is an automatic prompt to match both the upper and lower
cases of the provider name, for backward compatibility. Just accept this default.
A sample screen output for this report is shown in Figure 452 below.
334
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 452
COPYRIGHT 2004
Report of Provider Visits by Insurance Carrier.
Menu selection #25, “Bills & Pay by Ins. Co.”, choose this item to produce a report of billings,
adjustments, and payments by Insurance Company, for all or a given provider. The selection screen
for this menu item is as shown in Figure 453 below.
Figure 453
Selections for Payments by Insurance Company.
Selection prompt #1, “Starting date:”, enter the start date of the report you want to see. Generally,
this would be the beginning of a given month.
Selection prompt #2, “Ending date:”, enter the last day of the report, or accept the default of “TODAY”
which will be replaced with today's date.
Selection prompt #3, “Provider(s):”, enter the specific provider, or hit <enter> to accept the default of
“ALL”.
Selection prompt #4, “CPT Code:”, Enter CPT Code by code number. For example: 99212 or 10060*,
or just hit <enter> to accept the default of “”ALL”.
A sample screen output for this report is seen below in Figure 454.
Menu selection #26, “Detail Collection by Ins.”, choose this report to see procedure charges,
adjustments, and payments by Insurance Company. The selection screen for this menu item is as
seen in Figure 455 below.
335
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 454
Report of Payments by Insurance Company.
Figure 455
Selection of Detail Collection by Insurance Company.
Selection prompt #1, “Ins. # start:”, enter the starting key to the insurance carrier record in the carrier
file, or hit <enter> to accept the default of “0”. You could also enter <first> to start with the first key in
the carrier file. See “A WORD ON SELECTION RANGES” discussed earlier in this reports section of
the manual. You can also narrow the range down to several or just one carrier. In the example above
you could have just entered 28765, and used the same ending value, to get only this Blue Cross
carrier.
Selection prompt #2, “Ins. # end:”, this is similar to #1 above, with the exception that this is the ending
value. You could enter <last> here to get the last key in the carrier file. You could accept the default
of “999999999” by just hitting <enter>, however if your carrier file has any non numeric keys, they will
be skipped. You could also enter <zz> to get the last key in the carrier file, assuming it contains all
alphanumeric keys.
Selection prompt #3, “Date start:”, the system will default a date of 180 prior to today's date.
However, you can enter any starting date you wish. This defaulted starting date in combination with
the defaulted ending date below will give you a selection of 180 to 90 days before today's date to look
at. By this time, all payments from carriers in the list should be in. If not, you need to investigate
further.
336
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection prompt #4, “Date end:”, enter the last date of the report, or accept the default of 90 days
prior to today's date. You can also enter any date you wish including <today> to get today's date.
Selection prompt #5, “CPT start:”, Enter CPT Code by code number. For example: 99212 or 10060*,
or just hit <enter> to accept the default of “00001”. You could also enter <first> to start with the first
procedure code. Of course, you can enter a starting range of a specific code here and in the “CPT
end” below to get information on only one procedure code.
Selection prompt #6, “CPT end:”, Enter CPT Code by code number. For example: 99212 or 10060*,
or just hit <enter> to accept the default of “99999x”. However, this will miss any non-numeric codes.
You can enter <zz> to get the last of an alpha numeric range, or enter <last> to get up to the last CPT
code.
Selection prompt #7, “Provider:”, enter the provider initials, or <all> to select all providers.
A sample screen output for this report is seen in Figure 456 below.
Figure 456
Report of Detailed Collection by Insurance Company.
This report produces a two line output. The top line starts with the carrier key, followed by the DOS,
Patient Name, CPT code, Charge, Adjustment, Payments, and Provider's initials. The second line
contains the full carrier name as in the carrier file.
Menu selection #27, “Patient Visits by Provider”, choose this selection to print the number of
patients seen each month by a provider. The selection screen for this menu item is as shown in
Figure 457 below.
Selection prompt #1, “Starting date:”, enter the start date of the report you want to see. Generally,
this would be the beginning of a given month. The default is the first day that the clinic started using
the system.
337
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 457
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection of Patients Seen by Provider.
Selection prompt #2, “Provider Initials:”, enter the specific provider, or hit <enter> to take the default
of “all”.
Selection prompt #3, “Provider lowercase:”, <enter> to accept the lower case version of selection #2.
This is required to get all visits. When the provider is listed in upper case on the report, this indicates
this was the result of a standard office visit. If it is listed as lower case, this indicates it was a NonScheduled Visit encounter.
A sample screen output for this report is seen in Figure 458 below.
Figure 458
Report of Patients Seen by Provider.
In the above example, only one month was selected. If the selection covered several months, or a
whole year, there would be a page break for each month with visits recorded.
Menu selection #28, “Prim & 2ndary Ins w/bal >0”, choose this selection to see all insurances billed
for each charge for a given range of Dates of Service, with Insurance responsible and balance greater
than 0. The selection screen for this menu item is as seen in Figure 459 beolw.
Selection prompt #1, “Date of Service starting:”, enter the starting date you wish, or hit <enter> to
take the system default of 360 days ago.
338
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 459
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection of Primary & Secondary Billings with Balance.
Selection prompt #2, “Date of Service ending:”, enter the ending date you wish, or hit <enter> to take
the system default of 30 days ago. In the above example, a date of 06/12/04 was entered to capture
our examples.
A sample screen output for this report is seen in Figure 460 below.
Figure 460
Report of Primary & Secondary Insurance Companies Billed with Balance.
In the above example, the “Ord” column indicates the order of insurances billed for a specific service.
In the example of “FOSTER, EMMA”, for the service provided on 06/07/04, you will see that the first bill
was sent to BLUE CROSS. The second carrier billed for that claim was COUNTRY LIFE
INSURANCE. All the other claims shown were only billed to the primary carrier.
Menu selection #29, “Charge Items by Trxn Descr”, choose this selection to see all transactions
with a specific phrase. Typically this is from the default pop-up box that is presented for adjustments
or other standard transactions (as seen in the charge item screens). However, you can also search for
a specific phrase not listed in those defaulted, i.e. free text. The selection screen for this menu item is
as seen in Figure 461 below.
Selection prompt #1, “From:”, enter the starting DOS you want to start looking from.
Selection prompt #2, “To:”, enter the ending DOS you want to search through.
Selection prompt #3, “Trnsxn Description:”, is where you enter the transaction term that was used in
339
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
the charge item transaction field. A pop-up box for the transaction type will be shown, as seen in
Figure 462 below.
Figure 461
Selection of Transaction Type.
Figure 462
Pop-Up Window to Select Transaction Type.
You can bypass these choices by hitting <F1>. Then at the blank input line of prompt #3, enter the
exact text you want to search for ( case sensitive). It is always better to add any reoccurring terms
used to the transaction pop-up window. This can be done in the TERMS file record “ADMTRANSACTION”.
Under the main report header ( as seen in Figure 463), the selection criteria are shown, the start and
stop dates as well as the specific transaction term to be located. Only one item was found here.
Additional items found would normally be listed sequentially below this. If we had entered <Charge>,
we would see a list of all charge items for the given time period.
340
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
A sample screen output for this report is seen below:
Figure 463
Report of Charge Items by Transaction Type.
341
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
CHAPTER 9 SYSTEM FILES
SYSTEM INFORMATION FILES MENU
The System Information Files main menu is shown below in Figure 464. Using the menu selections
from this screen will allow you to customize the system to the needs of your particular clinic.
Figure 464
Main System Information Files Menu.
SYMPTOM FILE
MENU SELECTION #1, “SYMPTOM FILE”, choose this menu item to add to or change information
in the Symptoms File. The data in this file is used for making appointments only. This allows the
user to enter part of the description of the symptom or reason for visit and get a selection list of
terms that best match that entered. This allows for more consistent terminology and the same
spelling of common terms. This will be useful in later queries into the database. The add/change
screen for this file is as shown in Figure 465 below.
To change or modify an existing symptom or reason for visit, enter part of the description for a
cross-reference lookup. In this example <dia> was entered. The cross-reference pop-up selection
window is seen in Figure 466 below.
This pop-up screen displays the key to the record on the left and the cross-reference terms on the
right. Upon picking “Diabetes”, the screen shown in Figure 467 is displayed.
Prompts #2 through #4 can now be changed. In the “ADD” mode ( entering a new term not found in
the cross-reference lookup, or hitting <F1> in the pop-up screen), you will be able to enter a new
symptom or reason for visit, as discussed below.
342
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 465
Figure 466
COPYRIGHT 2004
Symptom File Add screen.
Symptom File Cross-Reference Lookup window.
Prompt #2, “ICD-9-CM code:”, Enter the general ICD-9-CM code that best correlates to this
symptom or reason. This is an optional field at this time. If you do not know an appropriate ICD-9
code number for this, enter <000>. At a later date this field may be used to trigger specific actions.
Prompt #3, “Alternate Descriptions:”, enter the alternate descriptions that might be used to
describe the same key symptom listed above.
i.e., Key=SYNCOPE, alternate=SYNCOPE FAINT PASSED OUT
ALWAYS include the key symptom listed above in the alternate description line. To help you with
this, the key symptom is listed for you by the system as a default. Just hit the return key to accept
this. You can arrow over or use the <F10> key to bring you to the end of the default symptom.
343
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 467
COPYRIGHT 2004
Symptom File screen in Change Mode.
Then add a space and alternate symptom descriptions separated by a space.
Prompt # 4, “Yes or no (y/n)?”, to the following question: “Could evaluation or treatment of this
symptom require prior authorization by an insurance company?” Enter <y> or <n>.
Answering this question as “(Y)es” will cause the following logic to be used when an appointment is
made:
(1). If the symptom or reason for the visit could be required by any insurance company to have a
prior authorization in place before service is rendered (this prompt set to “y”);
AND
(2). One of the insurance companies in the patient's insurance file or in the HOH file has a
requirement listed for any prior authorizations;
THEN
(3).A warning flag will be presented to the user of the possible need of a prior authorization before
the patient is seen. The user can then lookup the policy to be used and determine if a prior
authorization is needed. However, an experienced appointment clerk may be able to ignore this
warning for visits known to never need a prior authorization. For example, a given company may
require prior authorizations for sterilization or weight reduction surgery. However, only a few
companies might require a prior authorization for a colonoscopy.
F8 key, “Cancel”, prior to exiting the screen by hitting <F1> or <enter> upon leaving the last prompt,
you can cancel everything you have added or changed. If you are in the “ADD” mode and hit the
<F8> key, the record will not be entered in the system. In the “CHANGE” mode, all changes will be
ignored.
344
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
MENU SELECTION #2, “PRINT SYMPTOM FILE”.
Upon selecting this menu item, you will be placed in a selection screen to indicate the starting and
ending selection criteria for the symptom/reason key. See “A WORD ON SELECTION RANGES”, in
the Basic section. Upon completing selection, you will be presented at the bottom of the screen with
the following choices: “Enter (S)creen, (P)rinter, (B)oth, (F)ile, or (O)ther printer : S”. Generally you
would just hit <enter> to see the report on the screen. If you enter <p>, the report will be sent to the
default printer. For other options check with you system administrator.
An example of the first page of this report is as shown in Figure 468 below.
Figure 468
Printout of Symptom File.
In the sample report above, there are several points to note. First, the key “HOLTER MONITOR” has
the flag set for a possible prior authorization check. This is reasonable since some carriers may
require this. Second, both “HICCCOUGH” and “HICUPS” are correct, just variations of spelling.
However, since “HICCOUGH” is listed in the cross-reference of “HICCUPS”, it would simplify things
and would reduce errors in a search for one term verses another if you delete the “HICCOGH” key.
How to do this follows.
MENU SELECTION #3, “SYMPTOM DELETE”, choose this selection to delete a symptom key.
Upon entering part of the key or cross-reference term for look up, you will see the screen shown in
Figure 469 below.
You will see a prompt at the bottom of the screen asking you, “Is this the right record ?” Enter <y> to
delete this key. Entering anything else will abort the delete operation. You will then be presented with
a second prompt at the bottom of the screen; “Please enter 'Y' to confirm delete". Enter <y> to
confirm you want to delete this record. Again, entering anything else will abort the delete operation.
345
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 469
COPYRIGHT 2004
Deleting a Symptom.
DIAGNOSIS FILE
The diagnosis file maintenance is primarily used to modify the alternate descriptions for the primary
ICD-9 diagnosis codes. The ICD-9 codes must come from the ICD-9 manual. All of the codes have
been entered by Intelligent Medical Systems, Inc. The codes in the system are all to the highest
level of specificity. Code numbers such as 250 for Diabetes Mellitus are non-billable and are not
included. However, the higher level specificity codes of diabetes Mellitus such as 250.01 are
included. The main use you will have for this file maintenance is the area of adding alternate terms
or cross-references, to be able to quickly find the diagnosis code you want. The system can handle
up to 30 cross-references for each diagnosis. These are broken up in two prompts, # 3 and # 4,
"Alternate Descriptions" and "Other Descriptions", respectively.
Each diagnosis is further characterized by the possible sex and age range for each diagnosis, as is
seen in prompts 5, 6, and 7.
CHOOSING DIAGNOSIS CODES AND DELETED CODES
Providers should be aware the Diagnosis codes with a "*" should only be chosen if a more specific
code cannot be found. These codes may require further explanation to the insurance carrier at a
later date. The notation of "(2)" means that this code should only be used for a secondary
diagnosis. A primary diagnosis should be selected first. The secondary diagnosis codes are mainly
in the "V" codes section of the ICD-9 coding manual. The deleted codes are still on your system for
reference. However, you will not be able to find these deleted codes via the cross-reference feature
since their cross-reference was changed to "DELETED_CODE". You can still look these up using
the actual code number. DO NOT use this feature to bill any new charges.
MENU SELECTION #4, “DIAGNOSIS FILE”, use this selection to add to or modify the Diagnosis
File. The add/change screen for this file is as seen in Figure 470 below.
346
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 470
COPYRIGHT 2004
Diagnosis File screen.
The selection process here is the same as the Symptom file. This screen has two different features
however. First, there is a second line (prompt #4) for other descriptions. As the software
developed, the number of cross-references was expanded to 30. Adding this prompt allows for
backward compatibility, while adding more flexibility. There is no difference between prompts #3 &
#4. Just room to add up to 30 cross-references.
You will note in the alternate descriptions above, infection is truncated to “INF”. This was done for
the prior version to allow for more cross-references to fit on one line. Now with two lines to use, this
is not as important. However, for older ICD-9 codes and those that haven't changed, the original
cross-reference data was truncated. You can now expand this if you wish to “infection”, since there
are now two lines to use. However, if you entered “infection” to find this term in a cross-reference
lookup, it would not be found. You must instead use “inf”. Therefore, until you customize
the Diagnosis file to your preference, you should enter cross-reference lookup terms with no more
than three letters. Don't forget, a cross-reference lookup must have at least three characters
followed by sets of two or more characters. To narrow your search for this diagnosis, you might
enter “acu pro inf”. This will reduce your choices to eight out of over 12,000 possible codes.
Besides, it is less typing. However, fast typist may find this to be a problem at first (by typing more
characters). You can customize the cross-reference to give you direct hits each time. Simply add a
term to prompt #3 or #4 that would result in a unique cross-reference. For example, add “apix” to
either prompts #3 or #4. Since there are no other keys with this Alternate or other description, you
will get a direct hit. An example of an existing such code in your system is “htnb”, for Hypertensionbenign, or code number 401.1.
MENU SELECTION #5, “PRINT DIAGNOSIS FILE”, choose this selection to view or print the
Diagnosis file. Upon selecting this menu item, you will be placed in a selection screen to indicate
the starting and ending selection criteria. In this case, you can accept the default of “ALL” or enter
347
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
the starting and ending ICD-9 code numbers (Not cross-reference terms). Upon completing
selection, you will be presented at the bottom of the screen with the following choices: “Enter (S)creen,
(P)rinter, (B)oth, (F)ile, or (O)ther printer : S”. Generally, you would just hit <enter> to see the report
on the screen. If you enter <p>, the report will be sent to the default printer. For other options check
with you system administrator.
An example of the first page of this report is as seen in Figure 471 below.
Figure 471
Printout of Diagnosis File.
In the sample printout above, you can see the example discussed above for code number 401.1,
with the unique cross-reference term of “htnb” to get a direct hit. The first line contains the actual
ICD-9 description, followed by the code number, the sex ( “B” for both), and minimum and maximum
age limitations. On the second line are the cross-reference “Alternate Descriptions” terms. The
“Other Descriptions” terms are not shown.
MENU SELECTION #6, “DIAGNOSIS DELETE”, works in the same manner as Menu Selection #3,
“Symptom Delete”. See that section for a description of deleting a record.
MENU SELECTION #7, “DIAGNOSIS SELECTIVE MAINTENANCE”, choose this selection to select
a range of diagnoses to modify. You are first presented with a selection screen to enter a starting
number and ending number. You are then presented sequentially with the add/change diagnosis
screen, starting with the first diagnosis number in the range you entered. Use this screen in the same
manner as in menu selection #4, “DIAGNOSIS FILE”, above.
PROCEDURE FILE
The procedure file maintenance is similar to that of the diagnosis file maintenance. The procedure
codes are based on the American Medical Association's CPTÒ manual. These codes are
enhanced by Intelligent Medical Systems, Inc., but the basic code numbers and descriptions are the
348
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
property of the American Medical Association (see license agreements). The procedure codes also
have "Alternate Descriptions" and "Other Descriptions" similar to the Diagnosis file, and are also
characterize by sex and age range. For billing purposes, only the first five characters are used
since this is all that is allowed for billing. However, to be more precise in describing a procedure,
we allow an additional character ( a sixth character) to be added to the procedure code. This added
character will be deleted at time of billing.
MENU SELECTION #8, “PROCEDURE FILE”, use this selection to add to or modify the Procedure
File. The add/change screen for this file is as shown in Figure 472 below.
Figure 472
Procedure File screen.
To clarify the use of the Procedure File, a maximum of six characters are allowed for a code. Only
the first five characters are used when sending a bill. This should be a valid procedure code. The
sixth character is optional, specific to your site, and can be alphabetical or numeric. Billing errors
will result if not used properly. The cross-reference (prompts 4 and 5 - Alternate and Other
Descriptions - on the procedure screen) is the tool you would use to affect which codes are returned
when entered in a live program. For example, if you would like more specific information in the
patient record for a total abdominal hysterectomy, CPT code: 58150, you can create the extra
codes 58150A, 58150B, and 58150C to distinguish between neither or both ovaries removed, R.
ovary removed, or L. ovary removed, respectively. To have all these procedures returned by the
cross-reference, you enter a mnemonic in the "Alternate Descriptions" or "Other Descriptions"
prompt on the Procedure File screen. If you find it easy to remember a Total Abdominal
Hysterectomy as a "TAH," you can enter "TAH” as your mnemonic on all the 58150 procedures.
When entering procedures from the Doctor or Billing menu, you would only have to enter "tah" to be
able to select from all 58150 procedures. If you enter the exact code as stored in the procedure file,
e.g. 58150 or 58150A, the cross-reference will return only that code. You can be more specific
when cross-referencing if you were to enter "left" in one of the cross-reference prompts for 58150C.
Then for a total abdominal hysterectomy with the left ovary removed, you could then enter "tah left"
349
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
in the live program and cross-reference only the 58150C procedure. If you added a code with a
particular modifier set, you can include that modifier in the cross-reference for quick selection
similarly.
For orthopedics, a fractured left humerus could be coded as 23600L. This allows for a better
description of the actual procedure done. Also the standard coding modifier should be added in the
modifier prompt for left as LT, since only the 23600 and the modifier will be seen by the insurance
company.
Because procedure codes are changed, deleted, and added every year, we do not recommend
remembering procedures by their number. If you enter a deleted procedure number, and do not
notice the that this is a deleted code, the bill will be rejected. The deleted codes are required to be
on the system for reference when reviewing old information and billing. As stated previously,
entering the exact code as stored in the procedure file will return that code only.
At the bottom of the primary screen is the <F6> “Billing” key, to go to the charges screen for this
procedure as seen in Figure 473 below.
Figure 473
Procedure File Fee screen.
Prompt #1, “Base Fee:”, is the base fee. All other fees should be equal to or less than this base
fee. The system will prompt you if you try to put in a higher value. Ignore prompt items #10 to #23
at this time. This was added for future development of charges during the global period, and is not
functional at this time. Prompts #24 & #25 are the Medicare fees for your geographical area that
are loaded for you every January 1, by IMS as part of our support service to your site. However, in
certain locations you may get notices of specific fee increases or decreases during the year. Your
site is responsible to keep up on these mid-year changes.
The <F7> “Program Names” key, is to look up names of programs that your clinic has assigned to
350
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
unique billing plans. These program names can be modified in the TERMS file under the record
key of “PROG-NAMES”. In actual practice, it is rare to use all or any of these since if the carrier is
not one of the major carriers that are listed, or Medicare, you would use the defaulted base fee.
Back to the main procedure screen, the <F9>, “Inventory” key, is for entering X-RAY inventory items
only at this time. This would only be applicable to your site if you do INHOUSE X-RAYs. In this
case, a pop-up screen will be presented so that you can choose from inventory items defined in the
TERMS file record “ADM-INVENTORY”. This TERMS record is defined as having the inventory
item listed under Term descriptions, with columns 1-10 being the inventory item number, and its
description in columns 20 to 45.
MENU SELECTION #9, “PRINT PROCEDURE FILE”,
The Procedure file printout not only shows the procedures in the file, but also compares the
Medicare fee to the base fee. Please run this report for all procedures for which you bill, and make
sure that the base fees are ALWAYS higher than the Medicare fees. It is a violation of the
Medicare laws for you to charge Medicare an amount greater than your base fees ( fees for noninsured).
The selection screen seen in Figure 474 is presented upon selecting this menu item.
Figure 474
Selection for Procedure File Printout.
Enter the CPT code number range or accept the defaults of “ALL”. Prompt #3 on this screen, “Base
Fees >:”, is to indicate the starting amount above which you want to review. This helps prevent
looking at charges your clinic never uses, and therefore has not established a fee. There are over
8,300 procedures listed in the system, most of which your clinic would not use. A sample report is
seen in in Figure 475 below.
This report finds a number of errors that must be corrected. Procedures numbers 11750, 11976,
12002, 12006, and 12032*, should all be raised to the Medicare base fee or higher. However, if
your clinic actually wants to charge below the Medicare allowable, then reduce the Medicare
amount to match.
351
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 475
COPYRIGHT 2004
Printout of Procedure File.
CHOOSING PROCEDURE CODES AND DELETED CODES
Providers should be aware that before 2004, procedure codes with a "*" indicated that this code
could have an additional visit fee attached. However, as of 2004, the “*” indicator has been
removed, and the additional charge ( normally a new patient chart fee) is included in the basic
charge. The “*” designation however has been left in our system for backward compatibility. No
additional charges should be added to this fee, unless it is truly an additional billable service and the
appropriate modifiers are added.
The deleted codes are still on your system for reference. However, you will not be able to find
these deleted codes via the cross-reference feature since their cross-reference was changed to
"DELETED_CODE". You can still look these up using the actual code number. DO NOT use this
feature to bill any new charges.
MENU SELECTION #10, “PROCEDURE DELETE”, works in a similar manner as that of Menu
Selection #3, “Symptom Delete”. See that section for a description of deleting a record.
MENU SELECTION #11, “PROCEDURE SELECTIVE MAINTENANCE”,works in a similar manner
as that of menu selection #7, “DIAGNOSIS SELECTIVE MAINTENANCE”
PATIENT INFORMATION FILE
The Patient Information file contains the list of Publications that your clinic can hand out to patients.
MENU SELECTION #12, “PT. INFORMATION FILE”, choose this selection to Add to or Change the
publications listed in the Patient Information file. The basic Add/Change screen for this file is as seen
in Figure 476 below.
352
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 476
COPYRIGHT 2004
Patient Information Maintenance screen.
The <F8> key, “View & Select Terms”, can be used to see or select a sorted list of publications already
in the system, as seen in Figure 477 below.
Figure 477
Selection List for Patient Information File.
The above listed publications are from a list of publications produced and sold by the American
Academy of Family Physicians (AAFP). The series is titled “Health Notes from Your Family Doctor,
and can be obtained by calling the AAFP at 1-800-944-0000 . To add publications from other
organizations, or your own, follow the directions below.
Prompt #1, “Publication #:”, enter a unique publication number on adding, or part of the description
for a standard cross-reference lookup.
353
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Prompt #2, “Publication:”, enter the title of the publication here.
Prompt #3, “Alternate Descriptions:”, enter the cross-reference terms to use to find this publication.
It should contain the significant words of the title, in addition to other cross-reference terms. Avoid
using “the”, “of”, etc. Separate terms with a space, and do not use commas or periods.
MENU SELECTION #13, “PRINT PT. INFORMATION FILE”, choose this selection to print the patient
information publications available at you clinic. The selection process is the same as that for menu
selection #2, “PRINT SYMPTOM FILE”, above. A sample of the screen output is shown in Figure
478 below.
Figure 478
Printout of Patient Information File.
MENU SELECTION #14, “PT. INFO. DELETE”, follows the same logic as that of menu selection #3,
“SYMPTOM DELETE”, above.
GLOSSARY FILE
The glossary file contains anatomical terms used in the system to describe the area of a procedure.
This is used solely in the “Standard Procedure” type procedure, and not in the “Defined Procedure”
type. This glossary system is left for backward compatibility for the standard procedure types. It is
recommended that all new procedures added to the system be added to the “Defined Procedure”
section discussed later.
MENU SELECTION #15, “GLOSSARY FILE”, choose this selection to enter or modify glossary terms
used in the “Standard Procedure” type procedure notes. In the screen seen in Figure 479 below, you
can enter a new anatomical term or enter part of a term for cross-reference lookup.
Prompt #1, “Enter Glossary Term:”, enter a unique new term or part of a term for cross-reference
lookup. Figure 480 below is the cross-reference pop-up selection screen obtained by entering “bac”.
354
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 479
COPYRIGHT 2004
Glossary File Maintenance screen.
Figure 480
Glossary Selection.
Upon selecting item #2 above, the screen appears as seen in Figure 481 below.
Figure 481
Glossary screen After selection.
355
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Prompt #2, “Enter cross-reference:”, enter cross-reference terms in the standard manner. That is,
alternate descriptions, using significant terms and avoiding commas and periods. Leave one space
between each cross-reference term.
Prompt #3, “Is this Strictly an Anatomical term?”, answer <y> to this prompt. The case where <n>
would apply has been eliminated by use of the TERMS file to be discussed later.
MENU SELECTION #16, “PRINT GLOSSARY FILE”, choose this selection to print the glossary file.
In the print selection screen enter the starting and ending glossary terms, or except the defaults of
“FIRST” and “LAST”, respectively.
A sample of the print screen output is as shown in Figure 482 below.
Figure 482
Printout of Glossary File.
MENU SELECTION #17, “GLOSSARY DELETE”, follows the same logic as that of menu selection
#3, “SYMPTOM DELETE”, above.
TERMS FILE
Most of the pop-up screens in the system come from the Terms file. The Terms file also contains
patient management information, substance file information, immunizations, EDI information, and
much more. These Terms are critical to system operation. The Terms file screens are used by
administrators to modify and customize the way the system works for your specific clinic. It contains
administrative terms ( keys starting with ADM-), patient history terms ( HX-), in-house lab terms ( IHL-),
outside lab terms ( LAB-), physical exam terms ( PE-), plan terms ( PLAN-), procedure terms
( PROC-), review of systems terms ( ROS-), substance file terms ( SUB-), X-Ray terms ( XRAY-), as
well as key terms for procedure notes, and subjective notes. Many of these terms can be changed by
the clinic as needed without consultation with IMS. They should be changed only by administrative
personnel at the office who understand the significance of making these changes, and understand
356
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
these changes affect ALL uses.
Certain terms, if changed without full understanding of the system, could cause billing problems,
patient management problems, etc. To prevent this problem from arising, a significant number of
terms are restricted from changes by clinic personnel, including administrators. To make changes to
these terms you must call IMS. IMS programmers will make the changes for you.
Examples of changes your administrator can make are:
Description
Types of Provider appointments
Bill over due 30 dunning message
exam abdomen hernia
Record Key
ADM-APPT_TYPE
ADM-BILL-OVER30
PE-ABD_HERNIA
Example of changes IMS must make are:
immun error for flu
Immunizations due
Labs for Carrier file
Amounts for tablets
ADM-ERRFLU
ADM-IMMUN_DUE
ADM-LABS
SUB-AMT-TAB
Examples of how the basic screen acts for these two types of terms will be shown below in the
explanation of screen data entry.
MENU SELECTION #18, “TERMS FILE”, choose this selection to add to or change terms. The
following screen allows you to add a new, unique record or lookup an existing record with the standard
cross-reference system. In the following example, after entering <appoi ty> to do a cross-reference
lookup for appointment type, the screen shown in Figure 483 is presented.
Prompt #1, “Terms Key:”, enter a new unique key term here or a part of a description for crossreference lookup.
Prompt #2, “Description:”, are the cross-reference terms used to build the cross-reference.
Prompt #3, “Max Length:” is set by IMS for existing terms and should not be modified without
consultation with IMS. The maximum length is often determined by the pop-up screen width, or by the
way the program looks at the data in the subsequent multi-value “Term Descriptions” prompt. In the
example above for appointment types, the description must be 8 characters long, and the eighth
character must be a “B”, “F”, or “M” for both, female, or male, respectively.
Prompt #4, “Record Key:”, determines if the lines in the multi-value “Term Descriptions” prompt, are
defining record keys or not. In general this should be left as “n”, for no. The only exception to this in
the current system is in the Terms key “PROC-NOTES”, which defines the subsequent keys of
procedure notes for the “Standard Procedure” notes system. In general, the “Standard Procedure”
system will be replace by the “Defined Procedure” notes system. The effect of this being set to “y” is
that you will be given an error message if you enter any spaces in a “Term Descriptions” prompt line.
Since record keys cannot contain spaces, it would not make sense to allow spaces in these lines.
357
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 483
COPYRIGHT 2004
Terms File Maintenance screen.
Multi-Value “Term Descriptions” prompt, is where you will enter information of the appropriate type
depending on where this information will be used.
The next screen ( Figure 484) is an example of a dunning message that will be printed on a bill if it is
over 30 days old but less than 60 days old:
Figure 484
Dunning Message Terms Record.
In this case, you will note that the Max Length is 60, and that this is not a key to records. In the multi
value prompt you can enter up to 60 characters per line. If you try to enter more than that, you will get
the following warning at the bottom of the screen:
358
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
“The acceptable range is 0 to 60. Press <return> to continue.”
And upon hitting <return>, the line will be blanked out.
The next example is a Terms record that only IMS programmers are allowed to change. You will note
a red, flashing line at the upper right hand corner of the screen stating:
System Term, No Change Allowed
Following ( Figure 485) is an example of an abbreviated immunization screen.
Figure 485
Immunization Information Terms Record.
As can be seen, these screens can get complicated. A description of this immunization Terms record
and how it interacts with the system is described below.
FULL IMMUNIZATION CHECK CAPABILITY
The system has the ability to do full immunization checks for the immunizations shown below.
However, your system has only been turned on for checking for the following immunizations at this
time: Pneumovax starting at 65 and every ten years thereafter; Flu starting at 65 and every year
thereafter; Td starting at 14 and every ten years thereafter. The remaining immunization checks will
be turned on as you wish. However, turning them on before any immunizations are documented
can lead to an excessive number of reminders for individuals under 22 years of age. The system is
setup to stop checking for Hib after age 5; for DTP after age 7; for HA after age 11; and for HB,
MMR, OPV/IPV, and Var after age 22. These can be changed at your discretion. You can see from
the above, that for a five year old you could end up with approximately 18 reminders if none of
these immunizations are documented as done, refused, or immune. The example of the full
immunization check screen is seen in Figure 486 below.
Following is the explanation of the eight control fields in the Term Descriptions multi-value lines.
yr=
starting year.
mo=
starting month.
sexMFB=
sex, Male, Female, or Both sexes.
imm=
Immunization code.
sy=
years until immunization required again.
sm=
months until immunization required again.
359
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
ly=
lm=
COPYRIGHT 2004
last year of are immunization required.
last month of age immunization required.
On page down,
On page down,
Figure 486
Example of Immunization Terms Record.
As you can see, making a mistake here could effect system function, and therefore access is
restricted. However, it let's you see what can be changed.
MENU SELECTION #19, “PRINT TERMS FILE”, choose this selection to print the Terms file. In the
print selection screen enter the starting and ending Terms, or accept the defaults of “FIRST” and
“LAST”, respectively.
A sample of the print screen output is shown in Figure 487 below.
360
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 487
COPYRIGHT 2004
Print screen of Terms File.
You may want to print physical exam Terms by selecting all those terms staring with “PE-”. Doctors
can look these over and see if they want any additions or changes, so that they will be available to
them when documenting a physical exam.
MENU SELECTION #20, “TERMS DELETE”, follows the same logic as that of menu selection #3,
“SYMPTOM DELETE”, above. However, deleting a TERMS record may cause significant system
problems if you do not understand exactly how the TERMS record is used in the system. As a general
rule, do not delete any TERMS records, unless this is a TERMS record that you added yourself. Any
other key TERMS that you think need to be deleted should be done with the assistance of IMS
programmers.
LAB TEST FILE
The lab test file ( LabCorp Tests File, at this time) is where all lab tests are listed. This includes both
the automated outside labs, standard outside labs, and the inhouse labs.
MENU SELECTION #21, “LABCORP TESTS FILE” ( currently LabCorp Test File), choose this
selection to review or modify information on lab tests to be ordered. Upon selecting this item, the
screen seen in Figure 488 will be presented.
Prompt #1, “Test Code:”, enter either the lab test number or partial test name for a cross-reference
lookup. Upon entering <inhouse>, the following screen shown in Figure 489 will pop-up to choose
from.
These are the InHouse lab tests, and are also tests the provider can perform. Upon selecting line #4,
“Urine HCG, InHouse”, the screen looks as seen in 490.
361
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 488
COPYRIGHT 2004
Lab Test Information File screen.
Figure 489
Cross-Reference Selection for Lab Tests.
Prompts #2 & #4, “Stom Code” & “Test Name”. are set by the system and cannot be changed.
Prompt #5, “Alternate Desc.:”, enter any other names used for this test, i.e., cross-reference terms.
Prompt # 6, “Allowed Sex:”, if this test is restricted to a specific sex, as in this case of a pregnancy
test, then indicate either <m> for male or <f> for female. If the test is applicable to either sex, then
enter <b> for both, or leave blank ( space).
Prompt #7, “From:”, enter the starting age that this test would be applicable. If there is no minimum
age, enter <0>.
Prompt #8, “To:”, enter the ending age that this test would be applicable. If there is no maximum age
enter <150>.
362
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 490
COPYRIGHT 2004
Completed Test Code screen.
After hitting <enter> at the at the change prompt, you will be taken to the bottom half of the screen for
addition or modification of the multi-valued prompt for “Billing CPT's”, with the description header of
“CPT Code(s)”. This is seen Figure 491 below.
Figure 491
Billing CPT Codes for Lab Test.
“InHouse” labs are “hard coded” and making changes here will have no effect. However, for all other
lab tests, the CPT codes listed here will be billed each time this lab test has been indicated to be billed
to the clinic. Third party billing will be addressed by the lab doing the test, and will not be affected by
any changes made here. The listing of more than one CPT code here ( each CPT code must be on a
separate line) may be appropriate for certain test panels where more than one billable test is indicated
by ordering that panel.
The <F9> key, “List all Labtests”, can be used in prompt #1 to give you a listing of all the lab tests
available in the system, from which you may select one.
MENU SELECTION #22, “Print Lab Test File” ( currently LabCorp), choose this selection to print the
Lab file. A sample of the screen output is shown in Figure 492 below.
363
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 492
COPYRIGHT 2004
Screen Print of Lab Test File.
MENU SELECTION #23, “LAB TESTS DELETE” ( currently LabCorp Tests), follows the same logic
as that of menu selection #3, “SYMPTOM DELETE”, above. However, deleting a Lab record will
eliminate the ability to order a test from any lab. As a general rule, do not delete any Lab records.
Any Labs records that you think need to be deleted should be done with the assistance of IMS
programmers.
Scenarios FILE
A scenario is a synopsis of a patient encounter for a specific diagnosis, problem, or health exam. It
may contain the subjective, objective, assessment, and plan related to that specific scenario.
The Scenarios file contains all the scenarios available for your clinic providers to use in describing
their interactions and observations with patients they see. These Scenarios can be called up from
the Provider Visit or Non-Scheduled Provider Visit screens. Since many things in patient care are
repetitive in nature for example, the common cold, hypertension, bronchitis, etc., you can document
most of the provider visit in advance for a specific type of problem, diagnosis, or health exam. In
the Scenarios file you can document the subjective, objective, assessment and plans in advance.
Upon selecting a scenario, the scenario information is copied into the active visit note. Here, it can
be modified using the standard provider screen tools. Prescriptions cannot be included in the
scenarios since these are done interactively with the provider to allow for appropriate interaction
checks.
MENU SELECTION #24, “ADD OR MAINTAIN SCENARIOS.”, choose this selection to add or
maintain Scenarios. Upon selecting this menu item you will be presented with the add screen. In the
example below, we are adding the scenario for Flu. We will copy most of the scenario from an existing
scenario for URTI, which is very similar. As in this example, clinic providers may elect to copy
scenarios of another provider for a given problem and modify it slightly for their own use. All that is
required is that the key be unique. This could easily be done by simply adding your initials to the key.
To modify a scenario, simply find the scenario with the standard cross-reference lookup technique,
and then modify as needed.
364
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
The screen for adding the new scenario described above is seen in Figure 493 below.
Figure 493
Adding a New Scenario.
Prompt #1, “Scenario Name:”, enter a partial description for a cross-reference lookup, or enter a new
key. In the example above, we entered the new key “flu with nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, & body
aches”. The system found that this key did not exist, converted the text to all upper case, and replaced
the spaces with an underline character. Replacing the spaces with an underline character makes this
into a valid key since no spaces are allowed in keys.
Prompt #2, “Scenario Xref Terms:”, the system automatically places the original key entered in
prompt #1 into this prompt, converting it to upper case. Since this is your cross-reference lookup, you
can make this more efficient by eliminating insignificant terms and punctuation. In this case, we
deleted insignificant terms to come up with a cross-reference of:
FLU NAUSEA VOMITING DIARRHEA BODY ACHES.
Next, the pop-up screen for copying will be seen as shown in Figure 494 below.
Figure 494
Copy from Another Scenario.
365
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
In this case we entered <flu> to copy another flu like scenario. The selection screen that came up is
shown in Figure 495 below.
Figure 495
Selection screen for Existing Scenarios.
Upon picking line #2 above, we get the screen shown in Figure 496 below.
Figure 496
Selected Existing Scenario Copy.
Prompt #3, “Add or Maintain SUBJECTIVE:”. This had been indicated as “y” in the copied scenario.
By hitting <enter> here, you will be taken to the Subjective screen as seen in Figure 497 below.
This screen is similar to the standard subjective screen with several items changed or eliminated. The
new scenario name is seen in prompt #1. Prompts #3, #4, #7, #21, and the multi-value prompt
“Subjective Notes” have been copied from the referenced scenario. If these had not been copied,
they would be blank. Enter <a> at the change prompt to go through each prompt, or enter the
366
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 497
COPYRIGHT 2004
Scenarios Subjective screen.
specific number of the prompt that you wish to change. The screen acts just as described in the
provider screen section of this manual.
Once the prompt items are completed, you will be taken to the multi-valued “Subjective Notes” prompt.
Here you can accept, change, or add to what has been copied, if you elected to copy from another
scenario.
You will note that there are no F-keys for ROS or Social Hx on this screen. These will be accessed at
the time of the encounter on the provider screens.
Back to “Add or Maintain Visit Scenarios”:
Prompt #4, “Add or Maintain OBJECTIVE:”. Here, enter <y> to be taken to the same type of screen
accessed via the provider visit for Objective data. If this is being copied, then the data from the copied
scenario will have populated their corresponding prompts.
Prompt #5. “Assessment:”. The assessment screen is slightly different from that seen in the provider
screens, as is seen in Figure 498 below.
Assessment screen Prompt #2, “ICD-9 Code (or Xref):”, acts in a way similar to looking up a
diagnosis as using the cross-reference lookup system in the provider screens. You will note that only
one diagnosis is allowed for each scenario. When in the provider visit, you will be able to add to,
change, or delete this diagnosis as needed. The warning on the above screen is important to
understand. You can reduce the chance of error if you identify this scenario in a way to make it clear if
there is an age or sex restriction for a given scenario, for example, “BPH SYMPTOMS, IN ADULT
MALE
367
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 498
COPYRIGHT 2004
Scenarios Assessment screen.
Back to “Add or Maintain Visit Scenarios”:
Prompt #6, “Diagnosis Related Plan:”, upon accepting “y”, or entering <y>, you will be taken to the
modified plan screen seen in Figure 499 below.
Figure 499
Scenarios Plan screen.
368
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
In this screen, you only have the ability to add a plan for this specific problem or exam. In the standard
provider screens you can add additional plans as needed. Also, picking additional scenarios after the
first will add the next appropriate plan note from the additional scenario.
Back to “Add or Maintain Visit Scenarios”:
The <F12> Key, “Security”, is used to see the security screen where you can see who entered or
modified the scenario. The security screen is shown below in Figure 500.
Figure 500
Scenarios Security screen.
The security screen above shows the user, date, time, and terminal or device used. Any review,
changes, or additions will update this list. There is no way for the end user to delete or change this
information.
MENU SELECTION #25, “SCENARIO DELETE”, follows the same logic as that of menu selection #3,
“SYMPTOM DELETE”, above. If you think a scenario should be deleted, ask the system administrator
to do this for you. The administrator can then check to be sure no one else is currently using this
scenario before deleting it.
PROCEDURE REPORT FILE
The Procedure Report is used in the “Defined” procedures section of the provider procedure note.
This is typically a minor surgery such as a skin biopsy, a procedure such as a sigmoidoscopy, or
pap smear. Of course, major procedures can also be included here. The procedure note, as well
as the defined variables in the TERMS file can give you the ability to define the procedure screen as
you need, to add specific fields to fill in, as well as a note that can be modified. This is a significant
enhancement over the standard procedure screen, in that you can not only specify the fill-in fields
and control the input and pop-up screens, but that the procedure is tied to a specific CPT code with
appropriate charges, and checks for age and sex appropriateness.
369
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
MENU SELECTION #26, “ADD PROCEDURE REPORT”
Choose this menu selection to add or modify the Defined Procedure Reports. Upon selecting this
menu item, and entering <pap> in prompt #1, a selections screen pops-up. In that screen which
comes from the Procedure files cross-reference lookup, we selected a Screening Pap Smear
( HCPCS code number Q0091), for which a defined procedure report had already been done. The
screen in Figure 501 will be displayed.
Figure 501
Defined Procedure screen.
Prompt #1, “CPT code:”, enter the CPT-4 code of the Procedure Report you want to add or change.
You can use the standard cross-reference to lookup. This specific procedure code ( CPT or
HCPCS) must already exist in the SY-PROCEDURE file. This is to insure that proper billing
information is available. The above example shows a “SCREENING PAP SMEAR”.
In the multi-valued prompt “Variable Name:” enter the variable name to be displayed next to this
prompt number ( same as line number). There can be up to 14 lines in this multi-valued prompt.
This will result in up to 14 entry fields on the Defined Procedure screen.
In the second field of each line, “Terms File Name:”, enter the name of the terms file record to be
used in the pop-up selection list, or enter <FREE> for free text entry. Once the Terms record name
has been set, go to the Terms file and add the appropriate terms for selection with this prompt.
Limit the terms length to 20 characters so that it will fit on the screen.
Hit <F9>, “Note”, to bring up the note screen seen in Figure 502 below. This is where you will enter
the default note. The note can be modified by the provider in the procedure note.
370
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 502
COPYRIGHT 2004
Defined Procedure Default Note.
Obviously, you can write a much more extensive note. There is no limit on the number of lines you
can have. Generally the note should consist of the constant parts of the note, with reference to the
variables indicated on the first screen. For example, in a sigmoidoscopy note you could state “ the
scope was passed without problem to the distance indicated above”.
The result of the above Defined Procedure note can be seen in the following example from the
actual procedure screen seen in Figure 503 below.
Figure 503
Example of Using Defined Procedure Note.
The number of Defined parameters or prompts following prompt #3, CPT code ( or HCPCS code), is
defined in the Procedure Report record. In this case, there were ten ( 10), as can be seen above.
Each of these prompts had a TERMS file key associated with them. Therefore, there is a pop-up
371
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
screen for each of these as defined in the TERMS file key. For example, for prompt #13, the popup window is shown in Figure 504 below.
Figure 504
Pop-up for Defined Procedure.
You can page up or down to see a full list of options, and then pick the most appropriate. Had this
prompt been indicated as “FREE” in the “Terms File Name:” field, then no pop-up window would be
shown, and the prompt will take any free text you enter. It is suggested that you add something to
the prompt to indicate that the entry field is free text rather than a pop-up from the Terms file. This
could be done specifically as “Free Text Field”, or implied such as “L ADN Ten (FT)”.
The <F9> Key , “Narrative”, will bring up the defaulted narrative note as shown below in Figure 505.
Figure 505
Defined Procedure Note screen.
You are placed on the next line of the narrative note where you can add notes. If you hit <F1> to
“end”, then you will be placed at the change prompt. Here, you can add, change, or delete any
lines in the note.
A chart review of this note after completion is as shown in Figure 506 below
MENU SELECTION #27, “PROCED. RPT. DELETE”, follows the same logic as that of menu
selection #3, “SYMPTOM DELETE”, above. If you think a Procedure Report should be deleted, ask
the system administrator to do this for you. The administrator can then check to be sure no one else is
currently using this Procedure Report before deleting it.
372
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 506
COPYRIGHT 2004
Review of Defined Procedure Note.
373
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
CHAPTER 10 SUBSTANCE FILES
USING THE SUBSTANCE FILE FOR WRITING PRESCRIPTIONS.
Locating the substance you want quickly.
In addition to the standard cross-reference lookup ability of the system ( based on the substance's
generic or brand name), you can also look up a substance by category. Several terms have been
added to the alternate description of many drugs in our system to make it easier to list and locate
these drugs by category. The terms include allergy, antibiotic, antidepressant, asthma, BCP (birth
control), BPH, cholesterol, diabetes, HTN, migraine, vaccine, and seizure. Also, if general drug
categories (such as NSAID, opioid, ACE inhib, SSRI, beta block...) are entered, those substances in
our file will be listed.
Pediatric and adult dosing.
Many drugs have had pediatric doses added. If a drug has "-ped" or a specific dose (frequently in
mg/kg) or a maximum dose listed following the generic name, that dose is for peds (ie: amoxicillin40mg/kg/d and propranolol-ha-max30mg/tid). While it appears that there are many more options in
choosing a drug, in reality, the adult screen remains unchanged. Those treating only adults are
able to choose a drug that has a pediatric dose and prescribe as they did before (i.e.: the adult
screen for amoxicillin-45mg/kg/g-bid capsule is identical to amoxicillin-80mg/kg/d-tid capsule).
Remembering that not all forms have the same strengths (i.e.: amoxicillin tablets are 500mg and
875mg while amoxicillin capsules are 250mg and 500mg), just choose the form you want -- capsule,
tablet, chewable, suspension.
For those treating pediatric patients, choose the dose you want and the system will automatically
prescribe the appropriate amount based on the patients weight. Since the dose of some drugs (i.e.:
adderall) must be individualized for each patient, we provide one entry to allow you to enter the
dose you want. For example, for adderall we have entered multiple peds doses. There is also one
entry without a peds dose. In this case, the pediatric screen values for amount and frequency
default to "as below", allowing you to enter the dose you want.
Dosages based on disease.
Medications often are prescribed in different dosage amounts based on the specific disease being
treated. To make the defaults in the selection screens appropriate for a specific disease, the
SmartDoctor® system shows the drug with the disease specific indication appended to the
substance description. This can be seen in Figure 507 below.
In this case picking the highlighted line will result in appropriate dosing for a pediatric patient for
otitis media, by simply accepting the defaulted dosages. Obviously, the dosing of this antibiotic is
different for the 4 conditions noted, or they wouldn't exist here.
Disease contraindications.
Disease contraindications in the prescription system use the three digit categories of the ICD-9-CM.
It would be impractical to have every possible code categorized. However, since the 3 digit code
represents all codes of a higher specificity of that primary code this works well in almost all
circumstances. For example, category 510, emphysema, contains a variety of forms of
emphysema. However, for all practical purposes, diseases listed under the three digit category of
510 would function well regarding disease contraindications. Approximately 99.9 percent of the
time using the three digit categories will work perfectly. However, any inaccuracy is on the
374
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 507
COPYRIGHT 2004
Dosage Based on Disease.
conservative side. For example, in the case of the three digit category No. 427 “Cardiac
Dysrhythmias”. The system indicates that a beta blocker may have a “Relative Contraindication”.
Although most of the conditions listed under that 3 digit code are tachycardias, and may
appropriately be treated with a beta blocker, this is flagged because category No. 427.81 “Sinoatrial
node dysfunction” which includes in its description “Sinus Bradycardia”. In this case it would be
unlikely you would want to have the patient on a beta blocker.
Blocked/Deleted drugs.
As drug formulations change, such as the drug manufacturer reformulating Diovan from a capsule
to a tablet, we need to stop prescribing the old formulation. Also, as new information about
interactions change, we may need to reclassify drugs in the system. However, a patient may have
indicated an allergy to one or more components of the old drug, and therefore, we must keep it in
the database. To do this we removed the brand name and replaced it with "*NOT FOR RX,
HISTORY ONLY".
Therefore, if you try to write Diovan by placing "dio" or "diovan", you will be presented with the
correct choices. However, if you enter "valsartan" or part of this, you will see all the generic choices
including those that were blocked. In place of the brand name you will see "*NOT FOR RX,
HISTORY ONLY". If you try to prescribe this drug you will get an age limit restriction, because we
set the minimum age to 99 and the maximum age to 1.
If you try to refill one of these old formulations, you will also get the same age restriction. We
recommend you delete this drug from the patient's medication list and write a new prescription.
375
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Table of Figures
Figure 1 Quick Menu of the Family File Maintenance screen.
Figure 2 Quick Menu of the Doctor Main Menu.
17
Figure 3 Quick Menu of the System Information Files screen.
Figure 4 Calendar Pop-Up in Month Mode. 18
Figure 5 Calendar Pop-Up in Year Mode.
19
Figure 6 Who is Logged On. 20
Figure 7 Phone Book Lookup—Inquire Mode
22
Figure 8 Selecting to Add to Phone Book
22
Figure 9 Initial Phone Book Add Screen
23
Figure 10 Add Referring Provider Option
23
Figure 11 Adding Referring Provider Information. 24
Figure 12 Clinic Phone Book Add screen
25
Figure 13 Personal Notes screen
25
Figure 14 Bulletin Board screen.
26
Figure 15 Select the Clinic Provider for changes. 28
Figure 16 Clinic Provider Change screen.
28
Figure 17 Clinic Provider Appointment Types.
30
Figure 18 Setting Up Primary Clinic Record 31
Figure 19 Billing Information for Clinic 32
Figure 20 Lab Information screen.
33
Figure 21 Default Clinic Schedule screen. 34
Figure 22 Family File Maintenance Menu
35
Figure 23 Entering New Family Data 36
Figure 24 Completed HOH screen. 38
Figure 25 Work Information screen for HOH.
38
Figure 26 Spouse Work Information screen. 39
Figure 27 Family Insurance screen. 40
Figure 28 Family Insurance Documents screen
41
Figure 29 Insurance Document screen
41
Figure 30 Completed Insurance Document. 42
Figure 31 Insurance Documents Notes screen
45
Figure 32 Prior Authorization screen 45
Figure 33 Responsible Party screen 46
Figure 34 Family Notes and Payment Information screen. 47
Figure 35 Family Print Selection screen.
47
Figure 36 Example of Family File Printout. 48
Figure 37 Example of Mailing Label Printout.
48
Figure 38 Patient Maintenance screen.
49
Figure 39 Patient Add screen. 50
Figure 40 Completed Patient Add screen. 52
Figure 41 Blood Relative Linkage screen
52
Figure 42 Patient File Printout.
53
Figure 43 Patient file Printout by Family
53
Figure 44 Mailing Labels by Patient 53
Figure 45 Mailing Labels by Family, Printout.
54
Figure 46 Appointment Scheduling Menu. 54
Figure 47 Provider Schedule screen. 57
376
17
18
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 48
Figure 49
Figure 50
Figure 51
Figure 52
Figure 53
Figure 54
Figure 55
Figure 56
Figure 57
Figure 58
Figure 59
Figure 60
Figure 61
Figure 62
Figure 63
Figure 64
Figure 65
Figure 66
Figure 67
Figure 68
Figure 69
Figure 70
Figure 71
Figure 72
Figure 73
Figure 74
Figure 75
Figure 76
Figure 77
Figure 78
Figure 79
Figure 80
Figure 81
Figure 82
Figure 83
Figure 84
Figure 85
Figure 85
Figure 86
Figure 86
Figure 87
Figure 87
Figure 88
Figure 89
Figure 90
Figure 91
Figure 92
Figure 93
Figure 94
Figure 95
COPYRIGHT 2004
Appointment Booking Menu screen.
58
Appointment Booking screen.
59
Change Appointment schedule Display Message.
59
Change Appointment Schedule Room Number. 60
Booking a Patient Appointment. 61
An Appointment Line in the Patient Appointment Schedule.
Select Date for Appointment.
63
Select Appointment Type 64
Select Appointment Time. 64
Completed Appointment Screen. 65
A Patient's Prior Authorization screen. 66
List of Appointments Made.
66
Security Screen for Appointments.
67
Insurance Carrier screen. 67
Specifying Receiver Type. 68
Select Formulary Carrier Requires.
69
Select Payer Type. 70
Selecting Lab Required by Carrier.
70
LabCorp Carrier Code screen.
71
Carrier Specific Billing Information.
71
Provider Numbers Selection screen.
72
Entering Carrier Required Prior Authorizations. 73
Payment Required by Carrier.
74
Entering the Medicare Facility Number. 75
Medical Library Add screen.
76
Pasting into the Medical Library. 78
Medical Library List. 78
Print Appointment Book Selection screen.
79
Printout of Appointment Schedule.
79
Print Patient Chart screen. 80
Printing the Patient's Past Medical History.
81
Selecting Encounter Note to Print. 81
Printing the Selected Encounter Note.
82
Sign-Out Password Change screen.
82
Family Ledger Start Screen
84
Family Ledger
85
Family Ledger Billing Screen
86
Payment Distribution
87
Payment Distribution
87
Distribution of Funds
87
Distribution of Funds
87
Select Payment Type, Pop-Up
88
Select Payment Type, Pop-Up
88
Select Insurance carrier, Pop-Up 89
Distribution to a Group of Charges.
90
Charge Item Multiple Select
90
Charge Item Distribution 91
Selecting Additional Transaction Type. 92
Example of Charge Item Correction.
93
Family Billing Messages Screen. 93
Day Sheet 94
377
62
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 96 Transaction Screen 95
Figure 97 Daily Accounting
95
Figure 98 Day Sheet Report 96
Figure 99
Day Sheet 97
Figure 100 Review Adjustments Selections Screen 97
Figure 101 Adjustment found in Transaction File 98
Figure 102 Transaction Security Screen
98
Figure 103
Billing Menu
99
Figure 104 Primary Billing screen.
100
Figure 105 Starting Billing screen.
100
Figure 106 Insurance screen. 101
Figure 107 Referring Provider and Visit Information screen.
102
Figure 108 Provider Charges and System Charges.
103
Figure 109 Adding Modifiers to Provider Charges. 103
Figure 110 Adding Additional Charges.
104
Figure 111 Selecting Narrative Type. 105
Figure 112 Completed Narrative Billing Note.
106
Figure 113
Visit Review for Billing. 106
Figure 114 Medicare Payment Exit screen. 107
Figure 115 Standard Carrier Exit Payment screen. 108
Figure 116 Select Payment Type.
108
Figure 117 Family Ledger screen.
109
Figure 118 Select Type of Distribution.
110
Figure 119 Distribution of Pt./Resp Party Payment. 110
Figure 120 Charge Item screen.
111
Figure 121 Pop-UP Transaction screen following Payment.
112
Figure 122 Transaction screen Completed. 112
Figure 123 Family Ledger After Payment Posted. 113
Figure 125 Orders for Diagnostic Services. 115
Figure 126 Orders for Patient Referrals.
115
Figure 127 Example Patient Referral Form. 116
Figure 128 Orders to Schedule Patient Procedures.
117
Figure 129 Orders for Follow-Up Appointments.
117
Figure 130 Orders for Patient Instructions and Information Handouts.
Figure 131 Final Billing Exit screen. 119
Figure 132 Initial Non-Visit Billing screen.
120
Figure 133 Non-Visit Bill with Defaulted Family Provider. 120
Figure 134 Pop-Up Provider Selection screen for Non-Visit Billing.
Figure 135 Verify Correct Family for Non-Visit Bill. 121
Figure 136 Entering Non-Visit Billing Diagnoses. 122
Figure 137 Entering a Partial Description for Diagnosis Lookup. 123
Figure 138 Selecting a Diagnosis.
123
Figure 139 Completed Diagnoses screen for Non_Visit Billing. 124
Figure 140 Adding Charges to Non-Visit Billing.
125
Figure 141 Adding a Diagnosis to Charge screen. 125
Figure 142 Place of Services screen for Non-Visit Billing. 126
Figure 144 Selecting Modifiers for Non-Visit Billing. 127
Figure 145 Completed Charge Item Line for Non-Visit Billing.
128
Figure 146 Select Patient for Secondary Billing.
128
Figure 147 Selection of Prior Bill for Secondary Billing.
129
Figure 148a Secondary Billing Screen.
129
378
118
121
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 148
Figure 149
Figure 150
Figure 151
Figure 152
Figure 153
Figure 154
Figure 155
Figure 156
Figure 157
Figure 158
Figure 159
Figure 160
Figure 161
Figure 162
Figure 163
Figure 154
Figure 165
Figure 166
Figure 167
Figure 168
Figure 169
Figure 170
Figure 171
Figure 172
Figure 173
Figure 174
Figure 176
Figure 177
Figure 178
Figure 179
Figure 180
Figure 181
Figure 182
Figure 183
Figure 184
Figure 185
Figure 186
Figure 187
Figure 188
Figure 189
Figure 190
Figure 191
Figure 192
Figure 193
Figure 194
Figure 195
Figure 196
Figure 197
Figure 198
Figure 199
COPYRIGHT 2004
Changing Modifier for Secondary Billing.
130
Modifier Change for Secondary Billing. 130
Selecting Insurance for Secondary Billing.
131
Printing Secondary Billing.
132
Review of Added Secondary Billing.
132
Selecting a Bill for Reprinting. 133
Select Non-Visit Bill to Reprint. 133
Selecting Bills to be Corrected or Deleted, Not Yet Sent.
Correcting Electronic Billing Errors.
135
Delete or Reprocess Electronic Bill with Error. 136
Selecting Electronic Bill to be Deleted. 136
Verify Electronic Bill Before Sending.
137
Delete UnProcessed Bills.
137
Delete Unprocessed Bill. 138
Remove Processing Lock on a Bill.
138
Review Bills Sent Electronically. 139
Review Bills Sent Electronically. 139
Record of Electronic Bill Transmitted. 140
Select Bill Individual Bills Sent Electronically. 141
Individual Bill Sent Electronically.
141
Response Reports Selection Menu.
142
Response Report Selection Menu.
142
Viewing THIN Response Report. 143
Select ClearingHouse 144
Select to See or Print Reports. 144
Sample Response Report.
146
Response Reports Cont. 146
Appointments Needing Prior Authorization.
147
Choosing Insurance for Prior Authorization. 148
Entering Prior Authorization Information.
149
Completing the Prior Authorization Request. 150
Daily System Monitor screen. 151
Patient Sign-In.
153
View Insurance Policies Available for this Patient.
154
Choose Insurance to Bill. 155
Insurance Policy for Billing Selected. 155
Sign-in screen with Insurance Selected.
156
Window Showing Payment Information.
157
Non-Visit Encounter screen.
158
Verify Correct Patient and Address window.
159
Non-Visit window for Type of Contact. 159
Provider Selection window. 160
Completed Non-Visit Note Information. 161
Non-Visit Note Message screen. 162
Exit of Non-Visit Encounter Note.
162
Initial Past Medical History screen for Front Office.
163
Past Medical History screen.
163
Past Medical History screen with Patient Selected.
164
Adding to Past Medical Problems.
165
Diagnosis Selection List. 165
Past Medical Problems with Diagnoses Added.
166
379
134
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 202
Figure 203
Figure 204
Figure 205
Figure 206
Figure 207
Figure 208
Figure 209
Figure 210
Figure 211
Figure 212
Figure 213
Figure 214
Figure 215
Figure 216
Figure 217
Figure 218
Figure 219
Figure 220
Figure 221
Figure 222
Figure 223
Figure 224
Figure 225
Figure 226
Figure 227
Figure 228
Figure 229
Figure 230
Figure 231
Figure 232
Figure 233
Figure 234
Figure 235
Figure 236
Figure 237
Figure 239
Figure 240
Figure 241
Figure 242
Figure 243
Figure 244
Figure 245
Figure 247
Figure 248
Figure 249
Figure 250
Figure 251
Figure 252
Figure 253
Figure 254
COPYRIGHT 2004
Past Medical history Security screen. 168
Past Surgeries screen. 168
Adding Allergies to Past Medical History.
169
Selecting Substance Causing Allergy. 170
Selecting Reaction Type. 170
Allergy screen After Refresh.
171
Adding Immunizations. 171
Immunization Selection. 172
Immunization Added.
172
Reproductive History, Adding. 173
Reproductive History Completed.
173
Family History.
174
Past Hospitalizations.
175
Add Images screen.
176
Image Path and Name to Store. 176
Reminder to Check Image window.
176
Complete Add Images screen. 177
Incomplete and Pending Orders Sub Menu.
177
Lab Order Maintenance screen. 178
Patient Lab Results Status screen.
178
Selecting External Lab to Indicate Returned. 179
External Lab Indicated as IN.
180
Request Lab Requisition Reprint.
181
Multiple Select for Requisition Reprints. 181
Requisition Reprint for External Lab.
182
Reprint Reminder for INHOUSE and Interfaced Labs. 182
Interfaced Lab Manifest by Date. 183
Interfaced Lab Manifest Report. 183
Removing Interfaced Lab Order. 184
Verify Cancel of Interfaced Lab. 184
Reprinting Interfaced Lab Requisition. 185
Reprint of Interfaced lab requisition.
186
Outstanding Lab Review. 187
Menu for INHOUSE XRAY Processing. 187
XRAY Technician Order Takeoff screen.
188
XRAY Processing screen.
188
Path and Image Number to Store Digital XRAY.
190
Reminder to Check Stored XRAY Image.
190
Completed XRAY Processing screen. 191
Sample Printout of XRAY Processing Report. 191
Pending XRAY Reading List.
192
XRAY Selected for Reading.
192
Physician Entering Final XRAY Reading.
193
Selection screen for Diagnostic Services Scheduled. 194
Viewing a Schedule Diagnostic Service.
195
Nursing Sub Menu screen.
198
Selecting Patient for Nursing Intake.
199
Nurse Intake, Verify Patient ID. 200
Nurse Intake, Checking Allergies.
200
Nurse Intake screen.
201
Nurse Intake, Signature Block Completed.
202
380
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 255 Substance Administration, Selecting Patient. 203
Figure 256 Select Patient for Substance Administration. 204
Figure 257 Substance Administration screen.
204
Figure 258 Theraputic Medication, Injection, Immunization screen.
Figure 259 Medication Administration Book. 205
Figure 260 Substance Administration Note. 206
Figure 261 Administration Site Selection List.
206
Figure 262 Medication Chart Note Review. 207
Figure 263 Pharmacy Refill Request. 207
Figure 264 Prescription Refill screen.
208
Figure 265 Refill Error Message.
209
Figure 266 Post to Controlled Substance Refill Request. 209
Figure 267 Refill screen for Nursing. 210
Figure 268 Verify Correct Brand Name.
210
Figure 269 Pregnancy Precaution for this Substance.
210
Figure 270 Breast Feeding Precaution for this Substance. 210
Figure 271 Completed Nursing Refill screen.
211
Figure 272 Pharmacy Refill Request Message screen.
212
Figure 273 Completed Nurse Signature screen.
212
Figure 274
Select Provider Responses to Review. 213
Figure 275 Doctors Response to Controlled Substance Refill request.
Figure 276 Doctor Response in Message screen. 213
Figure 277 Completed Message screen after Refill.
214
Figure 278 Doctor's Response on Refills.
215
Figure 279 Message screen for Doctor's Refill Response. 215
Figure 280 Completed Message Note in Response to Doctor.
215
Figure 280a Lab Order Takeoff screen with No Orders Pending. 216
Figure 280b Lab Takeoff screen with Pending Orders.
216
Figure 280c Performing Specimen Collection.
217
Figure 280d
Party. 218
Figure 280e Select Lab Action.
218
Figure 280f Completed Lab Order Takeoff screen. 219
Figure 280g InHouse Lab Takeoff. 219
Figure 280h Completed Nursing Component of U/A.
220
Figure 281 Selection Sub Menu for Nursing Notes. 221
Figure 282 Nursing Note Addendum. 221
Figure 283 Doctor ( Provider) Main Menu. 223
Figure 284 Initial Provider Visit screen.
224
Figure 285 Patient Selection screen. 224
Figure 286 Verify Correct Patient Selected. 225
Figure 287 Provider Visit Orientation screen.
226
Figure 288 Review of Last Visit's Plans.
227
Figure 289 Active Medical Problem List.
228
Figure 290 Chronic and Acute Medications of the Past Year.
228
Figure 291 Patient's Past Medical History. 230
Figure 292 Preload with Scenario Question. 231
Figure 293 Selecting a Scenario.
231
Figure 294 Scenario Cross-reference Selection screen.
232
Figure 295 Scenario Selection Confirmation screen.
232
Figure 296 Visit Review.
234
Figure 297 Provider Orientation screen.
234
381
205
213
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 298
Figure 299
Figure 300
Figure 301
Figure 302
Figure 303
Figure 304
Figure 305
Figure 306
Figure 307
Figure 308
Figure 309
Figure 310
Figure 311
Figure 312
Figure 313
Figure 314
Figure 315
Figure 316
Figure 317
Figure 318
Figure 319
Figure 320
Figure 321
Figure 322
Figure 323
Figure 324
Figure 325
Figure 326
Figure 327
Figure 328
Figure 329
Figure 330
Figure 331
Figure 332
Figure 333
Figure 334
Figure 335
Figure 336
Figure 337
Figure 338
Figure 339
Figure 340
Figure 341
Figure 342
Figure 343
Figure 344
Figure 345
Figure 346
Figure 347
Figure 348
COPYRIGHT 2004
Additional Scenario window.
235
Verifing Additional Scenario Selection. 236
Subjective Notes screen. 236
Selecting Subjective type for Problem. 238
Problem screen Populated with Scenario Information.
Entering Symptom Terms Using Bronchitis List.
239
Result of Adding Selected Terms.
240
Review of Systems screen.
241
Selecting Respiratory ROS Terms.
242
Provider Only, Social History screen. 243
Objective screen. 244
Select Default
244
Objective screen with Normals & Abnormals Set.
245
Lung Examination screen.
246
Lung Exam with Scenario Settings.
247
Selecting Lung Sounds. 247
Lung Sounds Completed.
248
Heart Exam screen.
248
Heart Sounds Selection. 249
Heart Sounds, Intensity. 249
Heart Sounds, Location. 250
Heart Sounds Revised. 250
Copy Objective Exam window. 250
Selecting Prior Visit Note to Copy Objective Exam.
251
Assessment screen.
252
Adding to Assessment screen. 253
Selecting from Active Medical Problems. 253
Final Assessment screen.
253
Provider Plan Menu.
254
IN House Lab Menu. 254
Starting Hematocrit screen.
255
Completed Hematocrit Data Entry.
255
Lab Test Order screen. 256
InHouse X-Ray Order screen.
257
InHouse X-Ray Order Added. 257
Select Diagnostic Test to Order. 258
Completed Diagnostic Test Order Line. 258
Order Medication Administration.
259
Entering Medication to Administer.
259
Selecting Substance to Administer.
260
Selecting Dosage Form. 260
Selecting Amount of Medication. 260
Final Medication Administration Order screen. 261
Completed Medication Order.
261
Starting Procedure Note. 262
Selectiong the Type of Procedure Note. 262
Standard Procedure Note.
263
Selecting Procedure Code.
263
Completed Standard Procedure Note. 264
Initial Prescription Writer screen. 265
New Prescription Started.
266
382
239
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 349
Figure 350
Figure 351
Figure 352
Figure 353
Figure 354
Figure 355
Figure 356
Figure 357
Figure 358
Figure 359
Figure 360
Figure 361
Figure 362
Figure 363
Figure 364
Figure 365
Figure 366
Figure 367
Figure 368
Figure 369
Figure 370
Figure 371
Figure 372
Figure 373
Figure 374
Figure 375
Figure 376
Figure 377
Figure 378
Figure 379
Figure 380
Figure 381
Figure 382
Figure 383
Figure 384
Figure 385
Figure 386
Figure 387
Figure 388
Figure 389
Figure 390
Figure 391
Figure 392
Figure 393
Figure 394
Figure 395
Figure 396
Figure 397
Figure 398
Figure 401
COPYRIGHT 2004
Drug Prescription Experience screen. 267
Drug Selection screen.
267
Absolute Compound Contra-Indication. 268
Selecting Dosage Form. 268
Completed Prescription screen. 269
Orders for Patient Instructions. 270
Give by.
271
Final Orders for Patient Instructions.
271
Ordering Referrals 272
Cross-Reference Lookup for Referral. 272
Selecting When. 273
Completed Referral Order Line. 274
Initial Schedule Procedures screen.
275
Procedure When.
275
Completed Procedure Schedule Line. 276
Schedule F/U/ Appointment.
277
Select When 277
Appt. Type. 278
Disability screen.
279
Limitations Selection.
280
Completed limitation screen.
280
Completed F/U Appointment Order.
280
Order Multiple F/U Appointments.
281
Mutiple Appointment Orders.
282
Diagnosis Related Plans. 282
Select Plan Diagnosis.
283
Diagnosis Related Plan. 283
Revised Diagnosis Related Plans screen.
284
Chart Review Selection. 284
Chart Review Selection, Cont. 285
Adding to Active Problem List. 285
Add Problem Security screen. 286
Medication Add screen. 287
Medication List Review. 288
Select Past Encounter to Review.
289
Patient Lab History Review screen.
290
Review Clinic Procedures.
291
Add Clinic Procedure Not Documented.
292
Review of Vital Signs.
292
Immunization Due, Exit Pop-up window. 294
Provider Visit Sign-Out screen. 294
Modifier Selection window. 295
Evaluation and Management Coding Assistance screen.
Data Reviewed Score, Help window.
296
Risk Level Score, Help window. 296
Completed E/M Coding Assist screen. 297
Completed Provider Visit Sign-Out screen.
297
Initial Non-Scheduled Provider Visit screen.
298
Non-Scheduled Provider Visit Intake screen. 299
Selection of Category of Service.
300
Non-Zero Balance Report, Page 1.
302
383
295
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Figure 402 Non-Zero Balance Report, Page 2.
303
Figure 403 Report Selection screen. 303
Figure 408 Listing of All Transaction, screen 2.
308
Figure 409 All Transaction w/Pt. Resp., screen 1. 309
Figure 410 All Transaction w/Pt. Resp., screen 2. 309
Figure 411 Patient Bills by Insurance Carrier.
310
Figures 412, 413, and 414 are shown above. Together they make up one report.
Figure 415 Selection for Pt. Procedures Report.
312
Figure 416 Patient Procedure Report.
313
Figure 417 Patient Diagnosis Report Selection.
313
Figure 418 Report of Patients by Diagnosis.
314
Figure 419 Selection for Appointments due. 315
Figure 420 Report of Patients with Appointments due.
316
Figure 421 Selection of Patients by Drug Prescribed.
316
Figure 422 Report of Patients by Selected Drug. 317
Figure 423 Selection for Past Due Procedures.
318
Figure 424 Report of Procedures Due by Patient. 319
Figure 425 Selection of Scheduled Patient Appointments. 319
Figure 426 Report of Scheduled Appointments by Type. 320
Figure 427 Selection of Patients by Appointment Type 321
Figure 428 Report of Patients by Appointment Type.
321
Figure 429 Selection of Patients by Insurance Carrier.
322
Figure 430 Payer Type Selection window. 322
Figure 431 Report of Patient by Insurance Carrier. 323
Figure 432 Selection for monthly Financial Report. 324
Figure 433 Monthly Financial Report.
324
Figure 434 Selection of Collections by Provider.
325
Figure 435 Report of Collections by Provider.
325
Figure 436 Selection for New charges by provider. 326
Figure 437 New Charges by Provider.
327
Figure 438 Selection Charges by Provider. 327
Figure 439 Report of Payments by Provider. 328
Figure 440 Selection of Collection by Procedure.
328
Figure 441 Report of Collections by Procedure.
329
Figure 442 Selection for Procedure Charges.
329
Figure 443 Report of Procedure charges.
330
Figure 444 Selection for family receivable ageing. 330
Figure 445 Report of Family Receivable Ageing. 331
Figure 446 Selection for Family Receivable Ageing with Non-Zero Balance.
331
Figure 447 Report of Family Receivable Ageing with Non-Zero Balance. 332
Figure 448 Report of Families with Balance Forward Non-Zero. 332
Figure 449 Select Primary Insurances with Non-Zero Balances. 333
Figure 450 Report of Insurance Carriers with Non-Zero Balances. 334
Figure 451 Selection for Visits by Insurance.
334
Figure 452 Report of Provider Visits by Insurance Carrier. 335
Figure 453 Selections for Payments by Insurance Company.
335
Figure 454 Report of Payments by Insurance Company. 336
Figure 455 Selection of Detail Collection by Insurance Company. 336
Figure 456 Report of Detailed Collection by Insurance Company. 337
Figure 457 Selection of Patients Seen by Provider. 338
Figure 458 Report of Patients Seen by Provider. 338
384
311
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
Figure 459
Figure 460
Figure 461
Figure 462
Figure 463
Figure 464
Figure 465
Figure 466
Figure 467
Figure 468
Figure 469
Figure 470
Figure 471
Figure 472
Figure 473
Figure 474
Figure 475
Figure 476
Figure 477
Figure 478
Figure 479
Figure 480
Figure 481
Figure 482
Figure 483
Figure 484
Figure 485
Figure 486
Figure 487
Figure 488
Figure 489
Figure 490
Figure 491
Figure 492
Figure 493
Figure 494
Figure 495
Figure 496
Figure 497
Figure 498
Figure 499
Figure 500
Figure 501
Figure 502
Figure 503
Figure 504
Figure 505
Figure 506
Figure 507
393
COPYRIGHT 2004
Selection of Primary & Secondary Billings with Balance.
339
Report of Primary & Secondary Insurance Companies Billed with Balance.
Selection of Transaction Type. 340
Pop-Up Window to Select Transaction Type. 340
Report of Charge Items by Transaction Type. 341
Main System Information Files Menu. 342
Symptom File Add screen.
343
Symptom File Cross-Reference Lookup window.
343
Symptom File screen in Change Mode. 344
Printout of Symptom File. 345
Deleting a Symptom.
346
Diagnosis File screen.
347
Printout of Diagnosis File.
348
Procedure File screen. 349
Procedure File Fee screen.
350
Selection for Procedure File Printout. 351
Printout of Procedure File.
352
Patient Information Maintenance screen.
353
Selection List for Patient Information File.
353
Printout of Patient Information File.
354
Glossary File Maintenance screen.
355
Glossary Selection. 355
Glossary screen After selection. 355
Printout of Glossary File. 356
Terms File Maintenance screen. 358
Dunning Message Terms Record.
358
Immunization Information Terms Record.
359
Example of Immunization Terms Record.
360
Print screen of Terms File.
361
Lab Test Information File screen.
362
Cross-Reference Selection for Lab Tests.
362
Completed Test Code screen. 363
Billing CPT Codes for Lab Test. 363
Screen Print of Lab Test File.
364
Adding a New Scenario. 365
Copy from Another Scenario.
365
Selection screen for Existing Scenarios. 366
Selected Existing Scenario Copy.
366
Scenarios Subjective screen.
367
Scenarios Assessment screen. 368
Scenarios Plan screen. 368
Scenarios Security screen.
369
Defined Procedure screen.
370
Defined Procedure Default Note. 371
Example of Using Defined Procedure Note.
371
Pop-up for Defined Procedure. 372
Defined Procedure Note screen. 372
Review of Defined Procedure Note.
373
Dosage Based on Disease.
375
385
339
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Alphabetical Index
# RF Chronic
28
# days Chronic
27
<?> 10, 14, 16, 36
<CTRL> <d>
12, 15
Accounts receivable
9, 109, 323, 324, 326
ACLS 76
Activity Status
10, 50, 51
Add images 175, 176, 177
Address
9, 10, 21, 24, 26, 30, 31, 32, 33, 36, 37, 68, 73, 114, 153, 158, 208, 363
ADM-APPT_TYPE 29, 357
ADM-BILL-OVER30
92, 357
ADM-BILL-OVER60
92
ADM-BILL-OVER90
92
ADM-IMAGE-TYPES
190
ADM-IMMUNE
171
ADM-INVENTORY 189, 351
ADM-LABS 33, 357
ADM-NL-MAIN
244
ADM-PAY_TYPE 86, 111
ADM-PROV-NUM 29, 72
ADM-TRANSACTION
91, 340
Allergies
114, 168, 200, 229
Appointment 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65
Assessment 229, 235, 251, 252, 257, 263, 269, 273, 281, 282, 295, 364, 367
Bank deposit slip 96
Base fee
102, 104, 326, 329, 350, 351
Benefits
43, 288
Bills & Pay by Ins. Co
335
Blocking factor
29, 55
BMI 127, 128, 147, 202
Booking
16, 55, 57, 58, 60, 61, 320
Bulletin board
9, 24
Calculator 19, 20
Carrier ID
29, 40, 41, 68, 143, 322
Carrier name
67, 69, 148, 333, 337
Change mode
10, 37, 51, 58, 61, 102, 124, 153
Charge Items by Trxn Descr
339
Chart review 202, 207, 242, 251, 257, 283, 293, 298, 372
Claim office number
43
Clerical
157, 163, 196, 197, 214
Clinic 30, 31, 32, 33
Co-Pay
68, 74, 107, 156
Collections by Procedure 328
Collections by Provider
325
Communication Loop
196, 197, 209, 212, 214
Community Code 51
Compound class 169, 229
386
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
CONTACT-INDIV 158
CONTACT-REASON
158
CONTACT-TYPE 158
Contra-indication 266, 267
Contraindication
264, 267, 288, 374, 375
Correct Coding Initiative 104
CPT 349, 351
Daily Accounting 94, 151
Daily Admin 94, 150, 324
Daily System Monitor
94, 150
Date 10, 11
Date of birth 10, 36, 39, 50, 187, 315
Date of Service
44, 96, 109, 110, 124, 291, 299, 326, 338, 339
Day sheet 94, 96, 97, 98
Deceased 39, 50, 51
Deductible 44, 68, 74, 107, 156
Default RxPrinter 29
Degree
23, 27, 29, 30, 197, 201, 202, 297
DELETING A CODE
166, 175
Detail Collection by Ins
335
Diagnosis
252, 348, 349, 352
Diagnosis file
346, 347, 348, 349
Diastolic
202
Distribution of funds
86, 109
Doctor main menu 15, 76, 77, 80, 191, 198, 223, 225, 243, 257, 290, 299
Doctor Menu
16
Dosing
20, 268, 374
Down arrow 11, 143, 155, 172
Drug name 209, 266, 267, 315, 317
Drugs Prescribed by Patient
315
Employer
27, 37, 140, 142
Employment Information 37, 38
Employment Status
37, 51
Families with Bal/Fwd <> 0
332
Family
34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 44, 46, 47
Family A/R Ageing w/Bal<>0
331
Family ledger
10, 11, 32, 34, 46, 84, 85, 86, 88, 91, 98, 109, 113, 135, 136, 137, 138, 151
Family number
35, 49, 84, 320
Family Receivable Ageing 330
FAMILY TREE
51
File ID
140
File/Batch ID
141, 143
FINANCIAL REPORTS 301, 323
First name 35, 50
Formulary 31, 69, 209
Front office menu 15, 65, 76, 84, 94, 96, 151, 163, 177, 179, 180, 198, 301
Generation 36, 50
Glossary file 264, 354, 356
Group name 43, 304
Group Number
27, 30, 43
HCFA-1500 44, 68, 72, 73
387
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Head Cir
202
Head of household
9
Head of Household 9, 10, 34, 35, 36, 37, 39, 49, 50, 99
Header
32, 58, 77, 187, 317, 340, 363
Heart rate 201, 202, 227
Height
202
HIPAA
12, 20, 27
HMO 37, 43
HOH 9, 37, 38, 40, 45, 46, 49, 51, 84, 89, 92, 99, 154, 301, 302, 344
Hospitalization
114, 174, 175, 229
HX-ASSOC 238
HX-BODY_AREA 238
HX-CONTEXT
238
HX-HABITS 243
HX-LASTS 238
HX-MODIFY 238
HX-QUALITY
238
HX-SEVERE
238
HX-TIMING 238
ID photo
226
Immunization
9, 104, 114, 170, 171, 172, 198, 203, 229, 235, 260, 293, 356, 359, 360
IND 40, 51
Indian Health Service
51, 140, 142
InHouse lab 102, 178, 179, 180, 185, 218, 219, 220, 255, 256, 361
Initially set Patient resp
31
Ins. Resp. w/bal <> 0 by Co.
332
Insurance 9, 10, 36, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45
Insured ID 40, 323
Interest rate 32
Interfaced lab
179, 180, 181, 183, 184, 185, 214, 216, 217, 218
Lab 23, 33, 69, 73, 76,102, 113, 127, 177, 198, 214, 235, 254, 255, 273, 289, 356, 361
Lab Test File
361, 363
LAB-DIAGNOSTIC 257
LAB-WHEN 273
Last name 35, 46, 48, 50, 60, 153, 310
Linux 15, 19
List bottom 11, 85
LMP 201
Login 13, 14, 15, 16, 21, 24, 80, 113, 138
Lot number 206, 269
Mail 9, 12, 13, 15, 47, 51, 84, 144, 147, 152, 181, 302
Mailing Labels
47, 51, 52
Manager
9, 19, 21, 34, 35, 91, 92, 98, 158, 323
Manufacturer
206, 375
Marital Status
10, 51
Medical Library
76, 77
Medical license
27, 29
Medicare
9, 12, 39, 42, 74, 75, 101, 104, 107, 237, 296, 318, 350
Medications 27, 79, 80, 114, 118, 157, 203, 208, 228, 258, 286, 296, 317, 374
Modifiers
102, 104, 127, 294, 352
Monthly Financial Report 323
388
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Multi-value 9, 10, 11, 13, 15, 29, 31
Multiplier
127, 330
My Notes
24
Narrative
105, 127, 262, 263, 264, 283, 372
New Charges by Provider 326
Non-physician Sup 29
Non-Visit Billing
119, 123, 124, 127
Notes 9, 10, 24, 37, 44, 46, 69, 122, 157, 158
Nurse 9, 55, 57, 156, 157, 158, 159, 179, 180, 193, 196, 198, 202, 208, 212, 220, 225, 231, 255,
260, 269, 288
Nursing intake
9, 220, 298
Objective
229, 235, 243, 245, 249, 251, 364, 367
Password
14, 15, 24, 26, 60
Past medical history
79, 80, 114, 118, 163, 175, 200, 227, 288, 314
Past Medical Problems
114, 164, 229
Past Surgeries
114, 166, 168, 175, 229
Patient
9, 10, 11, 15, 20, 29, 31, 32, 33, 39, 40, 43, 44, 48, 49, 50
Patient Appointments Due
278, 314
Patient Appts by Appt. Type
320
Patient Appts by Sched Prov
318
Patient by Dx
313
Patient by Ins, Sex, Age 321
Patient by Procedure done
312
Patient chart 79, 80, 235, 352
Patient Information file
352
Patient number
48
PATIENT REPORTS
301, 312
PATIENT STATEMENTS 93, 301
Payer Type 42, 69
Payment Source 42
Perform Formulary Checks
31
Phone book 9, 19, 21, 23
Phone number
9, 10, 11, 21, 23
Physician
9, 29, 37, 44, 55, 76, 101, 185, 203, 223, 265, 267, 353
Place of service
30, 125, 298
Plan 32, 37, 42, 43, 201, 227, 229, 235, 254, 264, 275, 276, 281, 283, 293
PLAN-SCHED_APPT
276
PLAN-SCHED_PRO
275
PLAN-WHO 276
Prim & 2ndary Ins w/bal >0
338
Primary Billing
44, 88, 99, 121, 127, 131, 137, 138
Print routing slip
31
Prior authorization 44, 63, 64, 73, 119, 147, 148, 149, 150, 155, 156, 344, 345
PROC-AGENT
262
PROC-ANES
262
PROC-CLOSURE 263
PROC-CONDITION
263
PROC-NOTES
262, 357
PROC-TRAYSIZE 263
Procedure 276, 289, 369, 370, 371, 372
Procedure charges 12, 103, 294, 329, 335
389
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
PROCEDURE file 75, 102, 104, 189, 348, 349, 350, 351, 370
PROCEDURE Report FILE
369
Procedures Due
317
PROG-NAMES
351
Proof of posting
151
Prov. Initials 27, 34, 193
Provider
9, 16, 17, 19, 21, 23, 279, 281, 283, 369
Provider Password 80
Quick Menu 12, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 26, 36, 60, 223, 235
QuickMenu 16, 21, 76, 80, 117, 118, 122, 134, 153, 156
Rebuild
19, 82, 83
Referral
61, 62, 76, 101, 113, 114, 193, 208, 226, 271, 272, 273, 274, 299
Referring provider 21, 23, 101, 114, 135, 140, 142, 271, 272
Refill 28, 55, 157, 179, 180, 196, 207, 265, 266, 269, 287, 298, 375
Relationship 10, 36, 37, 44, 46, 50, 174, 229
Residence 10, 51, 75
Respiration 202
Responsible party 9, 35, 36, 45, 74, 89, 99, 129
Rm# 57, 58
ROS-RESPIRATORY
242
Rvw Images 177
Scenarios 229, 230, 235, 237, 245, 246, 251, 364, 367, 368, 369
Schedule
33, 55, 101, 113, 117, 124, 151, 157, 187, 192, 198, 203, 214, 223, 243, 274, 281,
289, 297, 318, 338, 364
Scheduling 54, 55, 56, 148, 177, 275, 276, 277, 299, 320
Secondary 43, 44, 127, 131, 136, 137, 297, 298, 346
Security
9, 10, 11, 14, 15, 20, 27, 37, 50, 60, 65, 92, 94, 97, 168, 286, 287, 291, 369
Select bottom
11, 85
SELECTION RANGE
12, 47, 77, 329, 333, 336, 345
Service Facility
126
Sex 10, 29, 36
Shielding
189
Sign-in
9, 46, 74, 99, 153, 155, 156, 202, 226
Signature
44, 71, 80, 81, 82, 157, 190, 202, 211, 214, 218, 220, 297
Single valued
9, 10, 11, 15
Skilled nursing facility
75, 298
SOAP
232, 237, 289
Social history
229, 242, 295, 296
Social Security
9, 10, 11, 27, 37, 50, 60
Social Security Number 9, 10, 11, 27, 37, 50, 60
Sorting order
12
SPO 40, 46
Spouse
9, 38, 39, 42, 46
SSN 11, 27, 48, 60
Staff 9, 24, 57
State code 26, 27
Store digital X-Rays
31, 189
SUB-NOTES
237, 238
SUB-SITE 206
Subjective 202, 229, 235, 295, 356, 364, 366
SUBSTANCE FILE 356, 374
390
SmartDoctorÒ Automated Patient Care System - User Manual
COPYRIGHT 2004
Suppress bill printing
37
Suppress dunning message
92
SY-DEGREE
23
SY-SPECIALTY
23
SYMPTOM FILE 63, 277, 299, 342, 345, 347, 354
System Information Files 16, 20, 342
Systolic
202
Tax ID
27
Taxonomy Code 27
Temperature
201, 202
Terminal
13, 14, 21, 94, 97, 186, 369
Terms file 23, 29,356, 369
THIN 65, 66, 67, 142, 152
Unix 15, 19
UPIN 23, 114
Visit review 80, 105, 119, 232, 288, 289
Visits by Insurance Type 333
Vital signs 198, 226, 235, 291, 292, 298, 299
Void 62, 255, 265, 266
Weight
20, 202, 207, 344, 374
Who is Logged On System
19
Workmen's Compensation
84, 278, 279, 310
X-Ray
31, 76, 77, 102, 177, 185, 186, 187, 189, 190, 191, 256, 257, 293, 351, 356
XDELETE 35
Zip code
23, 24, 26, 27, 30, 36, 37, 68
391
Download PDF